# Aback Reviews: full text export Independent product research and structured comparisons for keyboards, mice, USB-C hubs, webcams, microphones and other desk and developer hardware. Affiliate disclosure: Aback Reviews participates in the Amazon Associates program and may earn a commission from qualifying purchases. That never affects which products are recommended, how they are described, or which limitations are published. --- ## Product database ### Anker 555 USB-C Hub URL: https://abackreviews.com/products/anker-555-usb-c-hub Brand: Anker Category: USB-C Hubs and Docks An 8-in-1 bus-powered USB-C hub providing HDMI, Ethernet, SD and microSD readers, USB-A and USB-C data ports and pass-through power delivery. Who it is for: Users who need a portable hub for a laptop and accept shared bandwidth across the ports. Specifications: - Port count: 8-in-1 - HDMI output: Up to 4K at 30 Hz, while the product page lists 4K at 60 Hz - Ethernet: 1 GbE - Laptop charging: Up to 85 W input, the laptop charging wattage depends on the hub draw - USB data speed: Up to 10 Gbps across the USB-C and USB-A data ports - Card reader: SD and microSD, UHS-I - Display support: One HDMI port. The hub carries no display over the USB-C ports - Dimensions: 121 by 55 by 15.3 mm - Weight: 4.4 oz, 125 g - Power source: Bus-powered Sources: Anker 555 hub page ### Blue Yeti URL: https://abackreviews.com/products/blue-yeti Brand: Blue Microphones Category: Microphones A USB condenser microphone with switchable pickup patterns and an integrated stand. Who it is for: Users who record in a quiet room and want selectable pickup patterns from a single USB microphone. Specifications: - Element type: Condenser - Pickup pattern: Cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional, stereo - Connection: USB - Headphone monitoring: Yes, built-in - Frequency response: 20 Hz to 20 kHz - Sample rate: 48 kHz, 16-bit - Dimensions: 12 by 12.5 by 29.5 cm extended in the stand - Weight: 0.55 kg for the microphone, 1 kg for the stand - Maximum sound pressure: 120 dB - Operating systems: Windows 10 or later, macOS 10.14 or later Sources: Blue Yeti specifications ### CalDigit TS3 Plus URL: https://abackreviews.com/products/caldigit-ts3-plus Brand: CalDigit Category: USB-C Hubs and Docks A powered Thunderbolt 3 dock with fifteen ports, up to 87 W of laptop charging and dual 4K display support. Who it is for: Users with a Thunderbolt 3 laptop who want a desk dock that charges the machine and drives two displays. Specifications: - Protocol: Thunderbolt 3 - Port count: 15 ports - Laptop charging: Up to 87 W - Ethernet: 1 GbE - Power source: External power supply, a 180 W adapter - Display support: Two displays at up to 4K 60 Hz each, or one display at up to 5K 60 Hz over Thunderbolt. Apple M1 and M2 laptops support one external display through their Thunderbolt port, while M1 Pro and M1 Max support two - Card readers: SD 4.0 UHS-II, up to 312 MB/s - USB ports: 5 USB-A at 5 Gb/s, 1 USB-C at 10 Gb/s at the rear and 1 USB-C at 5 Gb/s at the front - Dimensions: 131 by 40 by 98.44 mm - Weight: 0.47 kg - Operating systems: macOS 10.12 or later, Windows 10 or later Sources: CalDigit TS3 Plus page ### CalDigit TS4 Thunderbolt Station URL: https://abackreviews.com/products/caldigit-ts4 Brand: CalDigit Category: USB-C Hubs and Docks A Thunderbolt 4 dock with a large port selection, high-wattage laptop charging and support for multiple displays. Who it is for: Users who want a single desk dock for a laptop and need many ports and high charging wattage. Specifications: - Protocol: Thunderbolt 4 - Port count: 18 ports - Laptop charging: Up to 98 W - Ethernet: 2.5 GbE - Power source: External power supply - Display support: Up to 8K on one display on compatible Windows computers, up to 6K on macOS, dual 6K on Apple M1 Pro and M1 Max - USB ports: 3 Thunderbolt 4 at 40 Gb/s, 3 USB-C and 5 USB-A at 10 Gb/s - Card readers: SD 4.0 and microSD 4.0, UHS-II - Dimensions: 141 by 42 by 113 mm - Weight: 0.64 kg - Warranty: Two years Sources: CalDigit TS4 specifications ### Elgato Facecam URL: https://abackreviews.com/products/elgato-facecam Brand: Elgato Category: Webcams A 1080p webcam with a fixed-focus prime lens and software control over exposure and field of view. Who it is for: Users who want manual control over a 1080p camera for streaming and calls. Specifications: - Resolution: 1080p at 60 fps - Lens: Fixed focus prime - Field of view: Adjustable in software - Mounting: Monitor mount and tripod thread - Field of view angle: 82 degrees diagonal - Dimensions: 58 by 80 by 48 mm without the mount - Weight: 103 g - Built-in microphone: No - USB connection: USB 3.0 or better, Type-C - Operating systems: Windows 10 or newer, macOS 11 or newer - Product status: Discontinued by the manufacturer Sources: Elgato Facecam page ### Keychron K8 Pro URL: https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-k8-pro Brand: Keychron Category: Keyboards A tenkeyless mechanical keyboard with a plastic case, hot-swappable sockets and QMK and VIA support. Who it is for: Users who want a wireless mechanical keyboard with software remapping at a lower price than a full aluminium board. Specifications: - Layout: Tenkeyless, TKL - Connectivity: USB-C wired and Bluetooth - Remapping software: QMK and VIA - Hot-swappable switches: Yes - Mount style: Tray mount - Switch options: Gateron G Pro red, blue and brown, hot-swappable - Battery: 4,000 mAh rechargeable lithium polymer - Keycap material: Double-shot PBT - Weight: About 990 g in the plastic frame, 1,146 g in the aluminium frame - Frame material: ABS and aluminium frame Sources: Keychron K8 Pro page ### Keychron Q1 URL: https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-q1 Brand: Keychron Category: Keyboards A 75 percent gasket-mounted mechanical keyboard with a full aluminium case, hot-swappable switches and USB-C connectivity. Who it is for: Users who want a compact but substantial mechanical keyboard they can modify later without soldering. Specifications: - Layout: 75 percent - Connectivity: USB-C wired. The wireless 75 percent aluminium board is sold as the Q1 Max - Case material: Aluminium - Weight: 1,825 g, plus or minus 10 g - Hot-swappable switches: Yes - Mount style: Gasket mount with a steel plate - Switch options: Gateron G Pro, Gateron Phantom and Keychron K Pro, hot-swappable - Keycap material: Double-shot PBT, not shine-through - Polling rate: 1000 Hz Sources: Keychron Q1 page ### Keychron Q11 URL: https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-q11 Brand: Keychron Category: Keyboards A 75 percent split mechanical keyboard with an all-metal tray-mounted body, a rotary knob, hot-swappable sockets and QMK remapping. Who it is for: Users who type for long hours and want to angle and split the halves of a mechanical keyboard without giving up remapping. Specifications: - Layout: 75 percent ANSI split layout with a rotary knob - Connectivity: USB-C wired - Mount style: Tray mount, with the plate integrated into the case - Frame material: All-metal - Weight: 1,186 g, plus or minus 10 g, fully assembled - Switch options: Keychron Super red or brown, Gateron G Pro red or brown, or barebone - Hot-swappable switches: Yes, five pin and three pin - Keycap material: Double-shot PBT, normal profile - Remapping software: QMK firmware with the Keychron Launcher web app, on macOS and Windows - Polling rate: 1000 Hz - Stabilisers: Screw-in PCB stabilisers - Dimensions: 345 mm long and 134 mm wide. The page does not state whether this is one half or the pair Sources: Keychron Q11 page ### Logitech Brio 4K URL: https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-brio-4k Brand: Logitech Category: Webcams A 4K webcam with autofocus, adjustable field of view and infrared support for platform authentication. Who it is for: Users who need 4K capture or Windows Hello style authentication, and are willing to pay for it. Specifications: - Resolution: Up to 4K at 30 fps, 1080p at 60 fps - Focus: Autofocus - Field of view: Adjustable - Infrared support: Yes - Field of view angle: 90, 78 or 65 degrees, three presets - Dimensions: 102 by 27 by 26.5 mm - Weight: 65 g - Built-in microphone: Yes, dual omni-directional with a range up to 1.2 m - HDR: RightLight 3 with HDR - Operating systems: Windows 8 or later, macOS 10.10 or later, ChromeOS Sources: Logitech Brio 4K page ### Logitech C920s PRO HD Webcam URL: https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-c920s-pro-hd-webcam Brand: Logitech Category: Webcams A 1080p webcam with a glass lens, autofocus, a 78 degree field of view, a stereo microphone and a physical privacy shutter. Who it is for: Users who want a fixed 1080p camera for calls and streaming, with a shutter they can close without unplugging it. Specifications: - Resolution: 1080p at 30 fps, 720p at 30 fps - Field of view angle: 78 degrees diagonal - Focus: Autofocus with a glass lens - Built-in microphone: Yes, stereo, with a range up to 1 m - Dimensions: 43.3 by 94 by 71 mm including the mounting clip - Weight: 162 g, 5.71 oz - Cable: 1.5 m, attached USB-A - USB connection: USB-A - Operating systems: Windows 8 or later, macOS 10.10 or later, ChromeOS - Privacy shutter: Yes, a physical shutter on the lens - Mounting: A universal mounting clip that fits laptops and monitors. A tripod is not included Sources: Logitech C920s page ### Logitech Lift URL: https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-lift Brand: Logitech Category: Mice A vertical ergonomic wireless mouse designed for smaller hands, with a natural handshake grip angle. Who it is for: Users with smaller hands who want a vertical grip and lighter weight. Specifications: - Grip angle: Vertical, 57 degrees - Weight: 125 g - Connectivity: Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt - Intended hand size: Small to medium - Buttons: 6 - Sensor resolution: 1000 DPI nominal, adjustable from 400 to 4000 DPI - Battery life: Up to 24 months on one AA battery - Dimensions: 108 by 70 by 71 mm - Operating systems: Windows, macOS, iPadOS, ChromeOS, Linux and Android Sources: Logitech Lift page ### Logitech MX Anywhere 3S URL: https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-anywhere-3s Brand: Logitech Category: Mice A compact wireless mouse intended for travel, with an electromagnetic scroll wheel and multi-device pairing. Who it is for: Users who move between desks and need a small mouse that works on a range of surfaces. Specifications: - Weight: 99 g on the product page, 95 g with the battery in the support specification - Connectivity: Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt - Surface support: Works on glass and most surfaces - Battery life: Up to 70 days on a full charge - Buttons: 6 - Sensor resolution: 200 to 8,000 DPI on the product page, 400 to 8,000 DPI in the support specification - Dimensions: 100.5 by 65 by 34.4 mm - Wireless range: 10 m - Operating systems: Windows, macOS, iPadOS, ChromeOS and Linux Sources: Logitech MX Anywhere 3S page; Logitech MX Anywhere 3S spec ### Logitech MX Keys Mini URL: https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-keys-mini Brand: Logitech Category: Keyboards A compact low-profile wireless keyboard with backlit spherical keycaps, multi-device switching and USB-C charging. Who it is for: Users who type mostly on flat, quiet keyboards and want multi-device switching without a mechanical feel. Specifications: - Layout: Compact with a function row - Connectivity: Bluetooth and Logi Bolt - Battery life: Up to 5 months with the backlighting off, up to 10 days with it on - Charging: USB-C - Switch type: Scissor keys, 1.8 mm of total travel - Dimensions: 131.95 by 295.99 by 20.97 mm - Weight: 506 g - Battery capacity: 1,500 mAh rechargeable lithium polymer - Wireless range: 10 m Sources: Logitech MX Keys Mini page; Logitech MX Keys Mini spec ### Logitech MX Master 3S URL: https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-master-3s Brand: Logitech Category: Mice An ergonomic wireless mouse with a high-resolution sensor, quiet switches, an electromagnetic scroll wheel and multi-device pairing. Who it is for: Users with medium to large hands who want a sculpted shape, configurable buttons and quiet clicking. Specifications: - Sensor resolution: 8,000 DPI - Weight: 141 g - Connectivity: Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt - Battery life: Up to 70 days on a full charge - Buttons: 7 - Dimensions: 124.9 by 84.3 by 51 mm - Wireless range: 10 m - Operating systems: Windows, macOS, iPadOS, iOS, Android, Linux and ChromeOS Sources: Logitech MX Master 3S page ### MOFT Z 5-in-1 Sit-Stand Desk URL: https://abackreviews.com/products/moft-z-5-in-1-sit-stand-desk Brand: MOFT Category: Laptop Stands A folding sit-stand laptop desk that raises a laptop to ten inches, works as a lap desk and a riser, and folds flat to half an inch. Who it is for: Users who alternate between sitting and standing, or who want a stand that folds into a bag instead of living on the desk. Specifications: - Height: 25 cm, 10 inches, standing. 12 cm at 25 degrees, 19.4 cm at 45 and 25 cm at 60 - Folded thickness: 1.3 cm, half an inch - Material: Vegan leather, fibreglass, magnets and metal sheets - Weight: 960 g, 33.7 oz - Dimensions: 279 by 239 by 12.7 mm, 11 by 9.4 by 5 inches - Laptop support: Laptops up to 16 inches, and it also works with tablets - Load capacity: Up to 22 lb - Adjustable: Yes, three tilt angles and a standing height - Keyboard access: Works as a riser with an external keyboard Sources: MOFT Z product page ### Rain Design mStand URL: https://abackreviews.com/products/rain-design-mstand Brand: Rain Design Category: Laptop Stands A fixed-height aluminium laptop stand that raises the screen and improves airflow under the chassis. Who it is for: Users who use an external keyboard and want a stable fixed-height stand. Specifications: - Height: 150 mm, 5.9 inches - Material: Aluminium - Keyboard access: Requires an external keyboard - Adjustable: No - Width and depth: 253 by 190 mm, 10 by 7.5 inches - Weight: 1.46 kg, 3 pounds - Laptop support: Fits all MacBooks and most notebooks Sources: Rain Design mStand page ### Samsung T7 Portable SSD URL: https://abackreviews.com/products/samsung-t7-portable-ssd Brand: Samsung Category: Portable Storage A pocket-sized external SSD using the USB 3.2 Gen 2 interface, with a metal body and hardware encryption support. Who it is for: Users who need fast portable storage for large files and travel frequently. Specifications: - Interface: USB 3.2 Gen 2, 10 Gbps - Capacities: 1 TB, 2 TB, 4 TB - Encryption: AES 256-bit hardware encryption - Weight: 72 g on the datasheet, 2.0 oz on the product page - Read speed: Up to 1,050 MB/sec - Write speed: Up to 1,000 MB/sec - Connector: USB Type-C - Dimensions: 85 by 57 by 8 mm - Warranty: Three years, limited - Drop resistance: Drop resistant up to 2 m Sources: Samsung T7 datasheet ### Samsung T7 Shield URL: https://abackreviews.com/products/samsung-t7-shield Brand: Samsung Category: Portable Storage A ruggedised portable solid state drive using the USB 3.2 Gen 2 interface, with an IP 65 water rating, a three metre drop rating and AES 256-bit hardware encryption. Who it is for: Users who need portable storage that survives a site, a trip or a drop without paying for a different class of drive. Specifications: - Interface: USB 3.2 Gen 2, 10 Gbps - Capacities: 1 TB, 2 TB, 4 TB - Read speed: Up to 1,050 MB/sec - Write speed: Up to 1,000 MB/sec - Encryption: AES 256-bit hardware encryption - Weight: 98 g - Dimensions: 59 by 88 by 13 mm - Water resistance: IP 65 - Drop resistance: Up to 3 m - Warranty: Three years, limited - Operating systems: Windows 7 or later, macOS 10.10 or later, Android Lollipop or later Sources: Samsung T7 Shield datasheet; Samsung T7 Shield product page ### Shure MV7 URL: https://abackreviews.com/products/shure-mv7 Brand: Shure Category: Microphones A hybrid USB and XLR dynamic microphone with cardioid pickup and built-in headphone monitoring. Who it is for: Users who want a forgiving dynamic microphone and the option to move to an audio interface later. Specifications: - Element type: Dynamic - Pickup pattern: Cardioid, unidirectional - Connection: USB and XLR - Headphone monitoring: Yes, built-in - Frequency response: 50 Hz to 16 kHz - Sample rate: 24-bit at 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz, 16-bit at the same rates - Dimensions: 153 by 164 by 90 mm - Weight: 0.55 kg - Gain range: 0 to +36 dB - USB connection: Micro-B USB, requires USB Audio Class 2.0 Sources: Shure MV7 user guide ## Reviews ### Anker 555 USB-C Hub Review: Eight Ports Without a Power Brick URL: https://abackreviews.com/reviews/anker-555-usb-c-hub-review An eight-port bus-powered hub with 1 GbE Ethernet, HDMI at up to 4K and 30 Hz and 85 W of pass-through input, reviewed from the recorded. The Anker 555 USB-C Hub is an 8-in-1 bus-powered USB-C hub providing HDMI, Ethernet, SD and microSD readers, USB-A and USB-C data ports and pass-through charging. It is the portable option in a category where the alternative is a dock that stays on the desk and draws its own power. This review is built from the specifications recorded against the product, each with its source and a verification state that is currently partial. We have not handled this hub, so there is no claim here about transfer speeds in practice, heat or how much power it takes from the host. The recorded port count, video output, Ethernet speed and power pass-through are what this page works through. ## Eight ports in a bus-powered body The recorded port count is 8-in-1, and the recorded description lists HDMI, Ethernet, SD and microSD readers, USB-A ports and USB-C data ports. The recorded feature list adds an SD card reader and wired Ethernet, so the two features most often bought for are backed by a recorded entry. Bus-powered is the design decision that shapes everything else. The hub takes its power from the laptop, which is why it can be small and pocketable, and why all of those ports share one budget. ## Pass-through charging, and the condition on it Power delivery pass-through is recorded as Up to 85 W input, laptop charging wattage depends on hub draw. Read that as a ceiling on what the hub accepts from the charger, and as a promise that the laptop keeps charging while the hub is plugged in, with the actual wattage falling as the hub draws more. It is also the limitation. A laptop charging through a hub that is running a display, a network link and two card readers does not see the full 85 W. The CalDigit TS4 records up to 98 W and takes its power from an external supply, which is the structural answer to the same problem. ## Video and network HDMI output is recorded as up to 4K at 30 Hz. That is a working external display for documents and calls, and it is a refresh rate ceiling rather than a resolution one. No higher refresh rate is recorded for 4K, so a buyer who needs 4K at 60 Hz needs a different class of dock. Ethernet is recorded as 1 GbE. The CalDigit TS4 records 2.5 GbE, so for large file transfers across the network the difference is on the spec sheet. ## Who this is for The recorded audience is users who need a portable hub for a laptop and accept shared bandwidth across the ports. That is exactly the trade this hub makes: eight ports, no separate power supply, and a single shared budget for data and power. ## Where the alternative sits The CalDigit TS4 Thunderbolt Station is the alternative: 18 ports, up to 98 W of laptop charging, 2.5 GbE Ethernet and multiple display support, all from an external power supply. It is the better fit for a permanent desk with a demanding laptop, and a worse fit for a bag. Products covered: - Anker 555 USB-C Hub (https://abackreviews.com/products/anker-555-usb-c-hub, subject): The subject of this review. Its recorded 8-in-1 port count, 1 GbE Ethernet and 85 W power pass-through make it the hub to consider when a laptop needs ports without a power brick. - CalDigit TS4 Thunderbolt Station (https://abackreviews.com/products/caldigit-ts4, competitor): A powered Thunderbolt 4 dock with a recorded 18 ports, up to 98 W of laptop charging and 2.5 GbE Ethernet. It wins on bandwidth and charging, and loses on portability because it needs an external power supply. **Eight ports and no power brick** The recorded port count is 8-in-1 and the hub is bus-powered, so it takes its power from the laptop. Eight ports, including HDMI, Ethernet, SD and microSD readers, USB-A and USB-C data ports, with nothing else to carry. **The laptop keeps charging while the hub works** Power delivery pass-through is recorded as up to 85 W input, so the charger that was already in the bag keeps the laptop going while the hub is in use. The recorded condition applies to the input side rather than the output side. **A wired network and card readers in the same body** Ethernet is recorded as 1 GbE and an SD card reader appears in the recorded feature list, with microSD readers in the description. A photographer or a wired-network user does not need a second accessory for either job. **Every port shares one budget** The recorded audience for this hub accepts shared bandwidth across the ports, because the hub is bus-powered. Running a display, a network link and two card readers at once means they are competing for the same link. **Charging wattage falls with hub draw** The recorded pass-through figure is up to 85 W input, with laptop charging wattage dependent on hub draw. The number describes the ceiling the hub accepts rather than what the laptop receives while the hub is busy. **People who need ports away from a fixed desk** A laptop that moves between a kitchen table, a hotel room and a shared desk needs a hub that travels with it and needs no socket of its own, which is the case this recorded specification describes. **People who need 60 Hz 4K or a fast network** HDMI output is recorded as up to 4K at 30 Hz and Ethernet as 1 GbE. If the requirement is a 4K display at 60 Hz, a 2.5 GbE network or a laptop that has to charge at full speed through the dock, this hub is not built for it. **What we checked** The port count, how the hub is powered, what the pass-through figure means for the laptop, the recorded video output and the recorded Ethernet speed. Each value comes from the recorded specification and carries its source and verification state. Questions: - **How many ports does the Anker 555 USB-C Hub have?** The recorded port count is 8-in-1, covering HDMI, Ethernet, SD and microSD readers, USB-A data ports and a USB-C data port, with power pass-through alongside them. - **What video output does the Anker 555 support?** HDMI output is recorded as up to 4K at 30 Hz. That covers an external display for documents and calls, and the recorded figure stops there, with no higher refresh rate given for 4K. - **Can the Anker 555 USB-C Hub charge a laptop?** Yes. Power delivery pass-through is recorded as up to 85 W input, with the laptop charging wattage depending on how much the hub itself is drawing at the time. - **What Ethernet speed does the Anker 555 support?** Ethernet is recorded as 1 GbE, and wired Ethernet appears in the recorded feature list as well. It is a gigabit connection rather than the 2.5 GbE recorded for the CalDigit TS4. - **Does the Anker 555 USB-C Hub read memory cards?** An SD card reader appears in the recorded feature list, and the recorded description lists both SD and microSD readers as part of the 8-in-1 port selection. ### Blue Yeti Review: Four Pickup Patterns From One USB Microphone URL: https://abackreviews.com/reviews/blue-yeti-review A USB condenser microphone with four selectable pickup patterns and built-in headphone monitoring, reviewed from the recorded element type, patterns. The Blue Yeti is a USB condenser microphone with switchable pickup patterns and an integrated stand. It is the only microphone in this catalogue that changes what it listens to, because the recorded pickup patterns list four of them: cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo. This review is built from the specifications recorded against the product, each with its source and a verification state that is currently partial. We have not handled this microphone, so there is no claim here about self noise, a frequency response curve or a measured output level. The recorded element type, pickup patterns, connection and monitoring are what this page works through. ## Four patterns from one body The recorded pickup patterns are Cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo. That is the headline specification, and it is rare in a single USB microphone. Cardioid picks up from the front and rejects most of what arrives from behind. Bidirectional picks up front and back, which is what you want for a two-person conversation across a table. Omnidirectional picks up from every direction. Stereo separates left from right. One microphone, four jobs, without buying a second body. Switchable pickup patterns appear in the recorded feature list, so the switching is a recorded capability rather than only a description. ## Condenser element and what it hears The recorded element type is Condenser. Condenser elements respond to more of the room than dynamic elements do, which is a good thing in a treated space and a liability in a kitchen. The recorded audience for this microphone is users who record in a quiet room, and the element type explains why that qualifier exists. No noise floor or sensitivity figure is recorded, so the comparison with a dynamic microphone has to be made on element type rather than on numbers. ## USB connection and headphone monitoring The recorded connection is USB, and headphone monitoring is recorded as Yes, built-in. The built-in monitoring means you hear your own voice while speaking, which is the single most useful feature for anyone recording spoken content, and it is confirmed by the recorded feature list as well. ## Where it stops The connection is USB only. No XLR output is recorded for this microphone, so when you move to a proper interface later, the Yeti itself does not go with you. An interface can be added to the chain, but the microphone stays a USB microphone. ## Who this is for The Yeti suits someone in a quiet room who wants to change how the microphone listens without changing hardware, and who wants to hear themselves while talking. It is a poor fit for an untreated room, and for a buyer who will end up with an audio interface anyway. ## Where the alternative sits The Shure MV7 is the alternative: a dynamic element with a cardioid pattern, USB and XLR connections and built-in headphone monitoring. It trades the Yeti four selectable patterns and its condenser sensitivity for a forgiving element that handles a room better, and it can move to an interface later. Products covered: - Blue Yeti (https://abackreviews.com/products/blue-yeti, subject): The subject of this review. Its recorded four pickup patterns, condenser element and built-in headphone monitoring make it the microphone to consider when the pattern has to change with the recording. - Shure MV7 (https://abackreviews.com/products/shure-mv7, competitor): A dynamic cardioid microphone with USB and XLR connections. It records one pattern against the Yeti four, and it keeps the option of moving to an interface later. **Four pickup patterns on one microphone** The recorded pickup patterns are cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo, and switchable pickup patterns appear in the recorded feature list. One body covers a solo voice, a two-person table, a room and a stereo source. **Built-in headphone monitoring** Headphone monitoring is recorded as Yes, built-in, and appears in the recorded feature list. Hearing your own voice while you speak is the feature that changes how fast a first-time recorder settles in. **A USB microphone with its own stand** The recorded connection is USB and the recorded description includes an integrated stand. Nothing extra is needed to record, and no interface or separate mount is part of the purchase. **USB only, with no XLR output recorded** The recorded connection is USB and no XLR output is recorded for this microphone. When the setup grows to a proper interface with real gain control, the Yeti stays behind rather than moving across with the rest of the chain. **A condenser element hears the room** The recorded element type is Condenser, which responds to more of the room than a dynamic element does. The recorded audience is users who record in a quiet room, and no noise floor figure is recorded to argue the point. **People in a quiet room who record more than one kind of thing** The recorded four patterns suit someone who speaks alone, interviews across a table and occasionally wants the room, without buying a second microphone or an interface to switch between them. **People who will buy an interface anyway** No XLR output is recorded for this microphone, so a buyer who already plans to run an audio interface gains nothing from choosing the Yeti over a microphone that can move across to one later. **What we checked** The recorded element type, the number and type of pickup patterns, the recorded connection and whether headphone monitoring is built in. Each value comes from the recorded specification and carries its source and verification state. Questions: - **What type of microphone is the Blue Yeti?** The recorded element type is Condenser, and the recorded connection is USB. A condenser element responds to more of the room than a dynamic element, which is why the recorded audience is people who record in a quiet room. - **Which pickup patterns does the Blue Yeti offer?** The recorded pickup patterns are cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo, and switchable pickup patterns appear in the recorded feature list. - **Does the Blue Yeti have headphone monitoring?** Yes. Headphone monitoring is recorded as Yes, built-in, and it also appears in the recorded feature list, so you can hear yourself while speaking without an extra box. - **How does the Blue Yeti connect to a computer?** The recorded connection is USB. The recorded description also notes an integrated stand, so no separate mount or interface is part of the purchase. - **Can the Blue Yeti connect to an audio interface?** Not directly. No XLR output is recorded for this microphone, so it stays a USB microphone even if an interface is added to the chain later. ### CalDigit TS3 Plus Review: A Thunderbolt 3 Dock With 15 Ports And 87 W Of Charging URL: https://abackreviews.com/reviews/caldigit-ts3-plus-review A Thunderbolt 3 desk dock with 15 ports, up to 87 W of laptop charging, dual 4K 60 Hz display support and a 180 W power adapter. The CalDigit TS3 Plus is a powered Thunderbolt 3 dock with fifteen ports, up to 87 W of laptop charging and support for two displays at up to 4K 60 Hz each. It is a desk device that needs a socket: the recorded power source is an external power supply, a 180 W adapter. This review works from the specifications recorded against the product, each carrying the manufacturer page it was read from. No dock was connected for this page, so nothing here describes how it behaves with a particular machine or how a display behaves on it. ## Thunderbolt 3, and what that means for a newer laptop The recorded protocol is Thunderbolt 3. The CalDigit TS4 in the catalogue records Thunderbolt 4, with eighteen ports, up to 98 W of charging, 2.5 GbE Ethernet and support for up to 6K on macOS with dual 6K on Apple M1 Pro and M1 Max. The TS3 Plus's own display record is two displays at up to 4K 60 Hz each, or one display at up to 5K 60 Hz over Thunderbolt. There is an important condition on that figure, and the manufacturer states it. Apple M1 and M2 laptops support only one external display through their Thunderbolt port, while M1 Pro and M1 Max support two. On a base M1 or M2 Mac the recorded two-display capability is not available, whatever the dock is capable of. ## The ports The recorded port count is fifteen. The recorded USB ports are 5 USB-A at 5 Gb/s, 1 USB-C at 10 Gb/s at the rear and 1 USB-C at 5 Gb/s at the front. The recorded card readers are SD 4.0 UHS-II at up to 312 MB/s, and no microSD slot is recorded for this dock. The recorded Ethernet is 1 GbE. The recorded operating systems are macOS 10.12 or later and Windows 10 or later. The recorded features are multiple display support, being a powered dock and wired Ethernet, which between them describe what this device is for. ## Charging and power The recorded laptop charging is up to 87 W, and the recorded power source is an external power supply with a 180 W adapter. The adapter is larger than the 87 W figure because it also feeds the dock's own ports and the host connection. The recorded dimensions are 131 by 40 by 98.44 mm and the recorded weight is 0.47 kg. The TS4 records 141 by 42 by 113 mm and 0.64 kg, so the TS3 Plus is the smaller and lighter box of the two. ## What it does not settle No price is recorded for the TS3 Plus or for the TS4. No figure is recorded for how the 87 W of charging divides when the dock's own ports are drawing power at the same time, and no sustained transfer rate is recorded for the card reader beyond the stated 312 MB/s. No display mode list is recorded for either dock, and no compatibility statement is recorded for a Thunderbolt 4 host, which is the question a buyer with a recent laptop has to ask. ## Who it is for The recorded audience is users with a Thunderbolt 3 laptop who want a desk dock that charges the machine and drives two displays. The recorded fifteen ports, the recorded 87 W of charging, the recorded dual display support and the recorded 1 GbE Ethernet are the values behind that fit, and the recorded external power supply is the condition attached to it. Products covered: - Anker 555 USB-C Hub (https://abackreviews.com/products/anker-555-usb-c-hub, competitor): The portable alternative in the same category. It is recorded as bus powered with one HDMI output at 125 g, where the TS3 Plus needs an external supply and records support for two displays. - CalDigit TS3 Plus (https://abackreviews.com/products/caldigit-ts3-plus, subject): The subject of this review. Its recorded Thunderbolt 3 protocol, 15 ports, up to 87 W of laptop charging, 1 GbE Ethernet and 180 W power adapter define what this dock is. - CalDigit TS4 Thunderbolt Station (https://abackreviews.com/products/caldigit-ts4, competitor): The later dock from the same manufacturer. It records Thunderbolt 4, 18 ports, up to 98 W of charging, 2.5 GbE Ethernet and dual 6K on Apple M1 Pro and M1 Max against the TS3 Plus's Thunderbolt 3 and dual 4K 60 Hz. **Fifteen ports and a card reader that keeps up** The recorded port count is fifteen, with 5 USB-A at 5 Gb/s, 1 USB-C at 10 Gb/s at the rear and 1 USB-C at 5 Gb/s at the front, and the recorded card readers are SD 4.0 UHS-II at up to 312 MB/s. The port count and the card slot are what the box exists to provide. **Charges the laptop at up to 87 W while driving two displays** The recorded laptop charging is up to 87 W and the recorded display support is two displays at up to 4K 60 Hz each, or one display at up to 5K 60 Hz over Thunderbolt. One box handles the power and the picture for a Thunderbolt 3 laptop. **The smaller and lighter of the two CalDigit docks** The recorded weight is 0.47 kg and the recorded dimensions are 131 by 40 by 98.44 mm, against the TS4's recorded 0.64 kg and 141 by 42 by 113 mm. No price is recorded for either dock, so size and weight are the recorded differences between them. **Thunderbolt 3, with a display limit on base Apple silicon** The recorded protocol is Thunderbolt 3, and the manufacturer states that Apple M1 and M2 laptops support only one external display through their Thunderbolt port while M1 Pro and M1 Max support two. On a base M1 or M2 Mac the recorded two-display support is not available. **It needs a socket and a 180 W adapter** The recorded power source is an external power supply with a 180 W adapter, so the dock is fixed to a desk and needs a socket and a cable of its own. A bus powered hub takes its power from the laptop and needs neither. **People with a Thunderbolt 3 laptop who want power, ports and two displays** The recorded fifteen ports, the recorded up to 87 W of laptop charging, the recorded dual 4K 60 Hz support and the recorded 1 GbE Ethernet match the recorded audience of a desk dock for a Thunderbolt 3 machine. **People with a Thunderbolt 4 laptop, or a dock that has to travel** The recorded protocol is Thunderbolt 3 rather than the Thunderbolt 4 recorded for the TS4, and the recorded external power supply with a 180 W adapter means it stays where it is plugged in. A buyer who needs Thunderbolt 4 bandwidth or a portable hub is looking elsewhere. **What we checked** The recorded protocol, port count, laptop charging, Ethernet, power source, display support, card readers, USB ports, dimensions, weight and operating systems, together with the manufacturer's own statement about how many external displays Apple M1 and M2 laptops accept. Every value carries its source and its verification state. Questions: - **What protocol does the CalDigit TS3 Plus use?** Thunderbolt 3 is the recorded protocol. The CalDigit TS4 in the catalogue records Thunderbolt 4 instead, and the catalogue holds no compatibility statement between the two protocols. - **Can the TS3 Plus drive two displays?** The recorded display support is two displays at up to 4K 60 Hz each, or one display at up to 5K 60 Hz over Thunderbolt. The manufacturer adds that Apple M1 and M2 laptops accept only one external display through the Thunderbolt port, while M1 Pro and M1 Max accept two. - **Does the CalDigit TS3 Plus need a power adapter?** Yes. The recorded power source is an external power supply, a 180 W adapter, and being a powered dock is in the recorded feature list. - **How much power does the TS3 Plus charge a laptop with?** The recorded laptop charging figure is up to 87 W, and the recorded external power supply is a 180 W adapter, which also feeds the dock's own ports and the host connection. - **Does the TS3 Plus have a card reader?** The recorded card readers are SD 4.0 UHS-II at up to 312 MB/s. Only an SD slot is recorded for this dock, where the TS4 records SD 4.0 and microSD 4.0 UHS-II. - **What Ethernet speed does the TS3 Plus have?** 1 GbE is the recorded Ethernet figure, against the 2.5 GbE recorded for the CalDigit TS4 in the same category. ### CalDigit TS4 Thunderbolt Station Review: A Powered Dock for One Desk URL: https://abackreviews.com/reviews/caldigit-ts4-review A powered Thunderbolt 4 dock with 18 ports, 98 W of laptop charging and 2.5 GbE Ethernet, reviewed from the recorded specifications rather than from a. The CalDigit TS4 Thunderbolt Station is a Thunderbolt 4 dock with a large port selection, high-wattage laptop charging and support for multiple displays. It is the permanent desk answer: a powered box that stays plugged in, with a laptop that arrives and leaves. This review is built from the specifications recorded against the product, each carrying its source and a verification state that is currently partial. We have not handled this dock, so nothing here claims a transfer rate in practice, a fan noise level or a measured display output. The recorded protocol, port count, charging figure, Ethernet speed and power source are what this page works through. ## Thunderbolt 4 sets the ceiling The recorded protocol is Thunderbolt 4, and that single line decides which laptops the dock can serve at full capability. The recorded data does not describe what a host without a Thunderbolt 4 connection can use, so a buyer with an ordinary USB-C port should check before buying. Nothing else on the spec sheet matters as much as this one, because the alternative to Thunderbolt 4 is a laptop with fewer ports than the desk needs. ## Eighteen ports The recorded port count is 18 ports, against the 8-in-1 of the bus-powered Anker 555. The recorded feature list adds wired Ethernet, multiple display support and powered dock status, and the recorded description calls out a large port selection. Port count on its own is a poor measure of usefulness, because a dock with eighteen ports still sends display and storage traffic down one link. What the count does guarantee is that a desk rarely runs out of places to plug in. ## Charging and power Laptop charging is recorded as up to 98 W, and the power source is recorded as an external power supply. Those two lines work together and give the dock its clearest advantage over the portable hub: the 85 W pass-through ceiling recorded for the Anker 555 is limited by what the host can spare, while an external supply removes that competition entirely. The cost of the external supply is that the dock is a fixed object. It lives on the desk, it needs a socket, and it does not travel with the laptop. ## Network and displays Ethernet is recorded as 2.5 GbE, which is more than double the 1 GbE recorded for the Anker 555 and matters when files move across the network. Multiple display support is recorded as a feature and the recorded description notes support for multiple displays, although no specific display resolution or refresh rate figure is recorded for this dock. ## Who this is for The TS4 suits someone with one desk and one demanding laptop who wants many ports, fast wired networking and full-speed charging from one box. It is a poor fit for a laptop that travels daily, or for a machine without a Thunderbolt 4 port. ## Where the alternative sits The Anker 555 USB-C Hub is the alternative, and it is a good one for a different job: 8-in-1, bus-powered, with a recorded HDMI output of up to 4K at 30 Hz, 1 GbE Ethernet, SD and microSD readers and 85 W of pass-through input. The TS4 wins on ports, charging and network speed, while the Anker wins on portability, because it is the one of the two that travels. Products covered: - Anker 555 USB-C Hub (https://abackreviews.com/products/anker-555-usb-c-hub, competitor): A bus-powered 8-in-1 hub with a recorded 4K at 30 Hz HDMI output, 1 GbE Ethernet and 85 W of pass-through. It travels with the laptop, where the TS4 stays on the desk. - CalDigit TS4 Thunderbolt Station (https://abackreviews.com/products/caldigit-ts4, subject): The subject of this review. Its recorded Thunderbolt 4 protocol, 18 port count, up to 98 W of laptop charging and external power supply make it the dock to consider for a permanent desk. **Eighteen ports on one desk** The recorded port count is 18 ports, against the 8-in-1 recorded for the Anker 555. Multiple display support, wired Ethernet and powered dock status all appear in the recorded feature list. **Charging that does not compete with the hub** Laptop charging is recorded as up to 98 W and the power source is recorded as an external power supply. The dock is powered from the wall rather than from the laptop, so the ports and the charging do not compete for the same budget. **2.5 GbE and Thunderbolt 4** Ethernet is recorded as 2.5 GbE and the protocol as Thunderbolt 4. Together they are the reason a large file transfer over the network, or a busy desk, is handled by the dock rather than by a pile of adapters. **It needs a socket and it needs Thunderbolt 4** The recorded power source is an external power supply and the recorded protocol is Thunderbolt 4. The dock therefore stays where it is plugged in, and a host without a Thunderbolt 4 port will only see part of what the 18 ports offer. **No recorded display resolution and no card reader** Multiple display support is recorded as a feature, but no display resolution or refresh rate figure is recorded for this dock, and no card reader appears in the recorded feature list. A buyer who needs 4K at a specific refresh rate, or reads camera cards, has to look elsewhere. **People with one desk and one demanding laptop** The recorded 98 W of charging, 18 ports and 2.5 GbE Ethernet suit a desk that stays set up, with a laptop that comes and goes and has to charge at full speed while it is plugged in. **People whose laptop travels every day** The recorded external power supply and the fixed 18 port design make this a desk fixture. If the dock has to go in the bag, the recorded audience for a portable bus-powered hub fits the job better. **What we checked** The protocol, because it decides which hosts can use the dock at full capability, the port count, how the dock is powered, the charging figure and the network speed. Each value comes from the recorded specification and carries its source and verification state. Questions: - **What protocol does the CalDigit TS4 use?** The recorded protocol is Thunderbolt 4. The recorded data does not describe what a host without a Thunderbolt 4 connection can use, so a buyer with an ordinary USB-C port should check before buying. - **How many ports does the CalDigit TS4 have?** The recorded port count is 18 ports, which is the largest selection recorded for a dock in this catalogue. The Anker 555 USB-C Hub records 8-in-1 by comparison. - **How much laptop charging does the CalDigit TS4 provide?** Laptop charging is recorded as up to 98 W. The Anker 555 records up to 85 W of pass-through input, and the difference comes from the dock drawing its power from an external supply. - **What Ethernet speed does the CalDigit TS4 support?** Ethernet is recorded as 2.5 GbE, and wired Ethernet appears in the recorded feature list. The Anker 555 records 1 GbE. - **Does the CalDigit TS4 need its own power supply?** Yes. The recorded power source is an external power supply, which is why the dock can deliver up to 98 W of laptop charging and why it stays on the desk rather than travelling with the laptop. ### Elgato Facecam Review: Manual Control Over a Fixed 1080p Frame URL: https://abackreviews.com/reviews/elgato-facecam-review A 1080p webcam with a fixed-focus prime lens and manual software control, recorded for reference because the manufacturer has discontinued it. The Elgato Facecam is a 1080p webcam with a fixed-focus prime lens and software control over exposure and field of view. Its appeal is control rather than automation: the recorded feature list leads with manual exposure control, and the field of view is adjustable in software. This review is built from the specifications recorded against the product, each with its source and a verification state that is currently partial. We have not handled this camera, so nothing here claims image quality, a focus range in millimetres or a low light result. The recorded resolution, lens type, field of view and mounting options are what this page works through. ## 1080p at 60 fps The recorded resolution is 1080p at 60 fps. Sixty frames per second at 1080p is the working configuration for streaming and calls, where the picture has to hold up to movement rather than sit still in a screenshot. There is no 4K mode recorded for this camera. That is the single boundary of the product, and it is the point at which the Logitech Brio 4K becomes the relevant comparison. ## A fixed-focus prime lens The recorded lens is a Fixed focus prime. A prime lens is one with a fixed focal length, and a fixed-focus lens has no autofocus mechanism recorded behind it. The consequence is practical: if the camera stays where it was set up and you stay in the same seat, focus is a solved problem. If either moves, there is no recorded mechanism that follows. That is the deliberate trade in the design. A camera that holds a fixed focus does not hunt for focus in the middle of a stream, and the price of that certainty is that it cannot adapt on the fly. ## Manual exposure and an adjustable field of view Manual exposure control is in the recorded feature list, and the recorded field of view is adjustable in software. Together they give you a fixed, repeatable frame: you set the exposure once and the field of view to match the space you are in, and the picture does not drift between takes. The Logitech Brio 4K records an adjustable field of view too, but it does not record manual exposure control, so this is where the two products genuinely part company. ## Mounting Mounting is recorded as Monitor mount and tripod thread. Two mounting routes means the camera can sit on a monitor or on a tripod, and it avoids the single clipped bracket that limits where a webcam can go. ## Who this is for The Facecam suits someone who wants manual control over a 1080p camera for streaming and calls, and who is willing to keep the camera and themselves in a fixed arrangement. It is a poor fit for a buyer who needs 4K capture, a camera that follows a moving subject, or infrared support for platform authentication. ## Where the alternative sits The Logitech Brio 4K is the alternative. It records up to 4K at 30 fps, 1080p at 60 fps, autofocus, an adjustable field of view and infrared support, which is what you get when the priority is resolution range and automation rather than a fixed, manually set frame. ## This camera has been discontinued Elgato's own product page states that the Facecam has been discontinued. Nothing here claims the camera is still sold or still supported. The recorded specifications are kept because they remain the honest reference for what a fixed focus 1080p camera with manual software control looks like, and because a reader searching for a Facecam needs to know where it sits today. If you are buying now, the Logitech Brio 4K is the camera we currently cover that is still sold. It adds autofocus, 4K capture and infrared authentication, and it has a built-in microphone where the Facecam has none. Products covered: - Elgato Facecam (https://abackreviews.com/products/elgato-facecam, subject): The subject of this review. Its recorded 1080p at 60 fps output, fixed-focus prime lens and manual exposure control make it the camera to consider when a repeatable frame matters more than resolution range. - Logitech Brio 4K (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-brio-4k, competitor): Records up to 4K at 30 fps, autofocus, an adjustable field of view and infrared support. It trades the Facecam fixed focus and manual exposure for a wider resolution range and a camera that follows a subject. **Manual exposure control** Manual exposure control appears in the recorded feature list, which means the picture is set once and stays set. For a repeatable frame across a stream or a series of calls, that is worth more than automatic adjustment. **A field of view you set in software** The recorded field of view is adjustable in software, so the framing can be matched to the desk rather than fixed by where the camera happens to sit. It is a software adjustment rather than a physical lens ring. **1080p at 60 fps with two mounting routes** The recorded resolution is 1080p at 60 fps, and mounting is recorded as monitor mount and tripod thread. The camera can sit on a monitor or on a tripod, and the resolution handles movement rather than a still frame. **A fixed-focus lens cannot follow a subject** The recorded lens is a Fixed focus prime, and no autofocus mechanism is recorded behind it. A camera and a person who stay in position are covered by this, and a presenter who moves out of that position is not. **No 4K and no infrared support recorded** The recorded resolution is 1080p at 60 fps and nothing higher is recorded, and infrared support does not appear in the recorded feature list. A buyer who needs 4K capture or infrared login has to look at a different camera. **People who set up the frame once** The recorded audience is users who want manual control over a 1080p camera for streaming and calls. That suits a desk where the camera position and the person stay put. **People who need 4K or infrared authentication** No 4K mode and no infrared support are recorded for this camera. If the requirement is high resolution capture, a lens that follows a moving subject, or a login check that uses an infrared camera, this is the wrong model. **What we checked** The recorded resolution, the lens type and whether anything refocuses it, whether the frame can be adjusted and whether exposure is manual, and the mounting options. Each value comes from the recorded specification and carries its source and verification state. **Discontinued by the manufacturer** Elgato's product page states that the camera has been discontinued. Buying it new is not possible through the usual channel, and there is no guarantee of support or firmware. **Why this page is still here** The Elgato Facecam product page states that the camera has been discontinued. It stays on the site because the recorded specifications are still the honest reference for a fixed focus 1080p camera, but it is not a current recommendation and it should not be bought new. Questions: - **What resolution does the Elgato Facecam record?** The recorded resolution is 1080p at 60 fps. No 4K mode is recorded for this camera, and 60 fps at 1080p is the working configuration for streaming and calls. - **Does the Elgato Facecam have autofocus?** No. The recorded lens is a fixed focus prime, and no autofocus mechanism is recorded behind it, so focus is fixed at the position the camera was set up in. - **Can you adjust the field of view on the Elgato Facecam?** Yes. The recorded field of view is adjustable in software, so the framing can be matched to the desk without moving the camera or turning a lens ring. - **How is the Elgato Facecam mounted?** Mounting is recorded as monitor mount and tripod thread, so the camera can sit on a monitor or on a tripod rather than relying on a single clipped bracket. - **Does the Elgato Facecam have manual exposure control?** Yes. Manual exposure control appears in the recorded feature list, which is the difference between setting the picture once and letting the camera adjust it. ### Keychron K8 Pro Review: A Tenkeyless Board Built Around QMK and VIA URL: https://abackreviews.com/reviews/keychron-k8-pro-review A tenkeyless mechanical board with hot-swappable switches, USB-C and Bluetooth connectivity and QMK and VIA remapping, reviewed from its recorded. The Keychron K8 Pro is a tenkeyless mechanical keyboard with a plastic case, hot-swappable sockets and QMK and VIA support. Those three details separate it from most of the boards at a similar level, and they are the reason to read this page rather than a spec sheet. This review is built from the specifications recorded against the product. Each value carries the source it came from and a verification state, which is currently partial. We have not handled this board, so nothing here describes a sound profile, a feel or a latency figure. Where the recorded data cannot settle a question, we say so rather than filling the gap. ## What a tenkeyless layout keeps and drops The recorded layout is Tenkeyless (TKL). That means a dedicated function row and a separate arrow cluster, with the number pad removed. Compared with the 75 percent Keychron Q1, the K8 Pro keeps more keys, and compared with a full size board it is narrower. The number pad is the practical cost. A tenkeyless keyboard cannot grow one later, so if figures go in all day, the choice is between this layout and a board with a numeric block, or a separate keypad on the desk. ## The remapping layer is the real feature The recorded remapping software is QMK and VIA. That is the specification that separates this board from a wireless mechanical keyboard that only switches between devices. QMK and VIA are remapping layers, which is what allows keys to be reassigned and layers changed rather than relying on a vendor application. Hot-swappable switches are also recorded, with the value Yes, and the recorded feature list adds hot-swappable switches and wireless connectivity. Combining the two means the board can be adjusted in software and in hardware. ## Connectivity and case Connectivity is recorded as USB-C wired and Bluetooth. One board can therefore work on a desk with a cable and travel to a laptop without one, and the wireless feature entry confirms that wireless connectivity is present. The recorded case material is plastic. That is a different structural choice from the aluminium Keychron Q1, and it is a large part of why the recorded audience for this board is buyers who want software remapping at a lower price than a full aluminium board. The K8 Pro records about 990 g in its plastic frame, so it is roughly half the weight of the Q1 and its recorded 1,825 g. ## Who this is for The K8 Pro suits someone who wants a full size mechanical layout, wireless freedom and the ability to remap keys without a soldering iron or a vendor application. The recorded data does not include backlighting, a switch type, a keycap material or a sound profile, so those stay open questions that the recorded specification cannot answer. ## Where the alternatives sit The Keychron Q1 is the direct comparison: both are hot-swappable Keychron boards, and the K8 Pro records Bluetooth where the Q1 as currently listed does not. The Q1 is a 75 percent board in an aluminium case, while the K8 Pro is a tenkeyless board in a plastic case with QMK and VIA remapping recorded. The Logitech MX Keys Mini is the comparison for a different reason. It is a compact low-profile board with multi-device switching and no mechanical feel, so if the question is flat keys rather than remappable mechanical keys, that decision is made before any of this matters. Products covered: - Keychron K8 Pro (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-k8-pro, subject): The subject of this review. Its recorded tenkeyless layout, hot-swappable sockets and QMK and VIA remapping make it the board to consider when software programmability matters more than case material. - Keychron Q1 (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-q1, competitor): Shares hot-swappable switches and USB-C wired and Bluetooth connectivity, but uses an aluminium case and a 75 percent layout, so it trades the function row and arrow cluster for a denser board. - Logitech MX Keys Mini (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-keys-mini, competitor): The compact keyboard a buyer considers when they want multi-device switching and a flat typing surface instead of a mechanical board with remapping software. **QMK and VIA remapping as standard** The recorded remapping software is QMK and VIA, which lets keys be reassigned and layers changed without a vendor application. For a mechanical board, that is the specification that decides whether it can be adapted later or only used as it ships. **Hot-swappable sockets without a soldering iron** Hot-swappable switches are recorded with the value Yes, and the recorded feature list confirms hot-swappable switches. The switch hardware can be opened and replaced, so the board can change with the switches you want to use. **Wired and wireless on the same board** Connectivity is recorded as USB-C wired and Bluetooth, with wireless connectivity in the recorded feature list. One board can serve a fixed desk over the cable and a laptop over Bluetooth without a separate receiver. **No number pad, and no way to add one later** The recorded layout is Tenkeyless (TKL), which removes the number pad. A keyboard without a numeric block cannot grow one, so anyone who enters figures all day needs a different board or a separate keypad on the desk. **The recorded specification stops at the case material** The recorded case material is plastic, but no weight is recorded for this board and the recorded feature list covers only hot-swappable switches and wireless connectivity. Backlighting, switch type and keycap material are all absent, so the practical difference from an aluminium board cannot be quantified here. **People who want to reprogram their keys** If the plan is to reassign keys, build layers or program macros, the recorded QMK and VIA support is the reason to choose this board rather than a keyboard that only switches between devices. **People who need a numeric keypad** The recorded tenkeyless layout has no number pad, and the board cannot be extended to include one. If number entry is a large part of the day, this layout is the wrong one. **What we checked** The layout and what the layout removes, whether the switches can be replaced without soldering, what remapping software is recorded, and whether the board works both wired and wirelessly. Every value comes from the recorded specification and carries its source and verification state on the product page. Questions: - **What layout is the Keychron K8 Pro?** The recorded layout is Tenkeyless (TKL). It keeps a dedicated function row and a separate arrow cluster, and it drops the number pad. There is no way to add a numeric keypad to the board later. - **Can you remap keys on the Keychron K8 Pro?** Yes. The recorded remapping software is QMK and VIA, which is what allows keys to be reassigned, layers changed and macros programmed in a browser rather than in a vendor application. - **Can you change the switches on the Keychron K8 Pro?** Yes. Hot-swappable switches are recorded with the value Yes, and the recorded feature list confirms hot-swappable switches, so the sockets can be opened and the switches replaced without soldering. - **Does the Keychron K8 Pro work over Bluetooth?** Connectivity is recorded as USB-C wired and Bluetooth, and wireless connectivity appears in the recorded feature list, so the board works both ways without a separate receiver. - **Is the Keychron K8 Pro lighter than the Keychron Q1?** That cannot be answered from the recorded data. The case material is recorded as plastic here against aluminium on the Q1, but no weight is recorded for the K8 Pro, while the Q1 records 1,825 g. ### Keychron Q1 Review: A 75 Percent Aluminium Board Built To Be Modified URL: https://abackreviews.com/reviews/keychron-q1-review A compact aluminium mechanical keyboard with hot-swappable switches, a gasket mount and USB-C connectivity, reviewed from its recorded specifications. The Keychron Q1 is a 75 percent mechanical keyboard with a gasket-mounted plate, a full aluminium case, hot-swappable switch sockets and USB-C connectivity. It weighs 1,825 g. That weight is the first thing to understand about the board: it is a substantial object that stays where you put it, and it does not fold down to carry between desks. This page is built from the specifications recorded against the product, each of which carries the source it came from and how confidently it has been verified. We have not measured the board ourselves, so nothing here claims a sound profile, a feel or a latency figure. Where a specification cannot settle a question, we say so. ## What the 75 percent layout gives up The Q1's recorded layout is 75 percent. Compared with a full size board that removes the function row, and compared with a 60 percent board it keeps the arrow cluster and the right-hand column. What you give up is the dedicated function row and the number pad. The number pad is the more consequential omission for a lot of buyers, because a 75 percent board cannot grow one later. A keyboard with a separate number pad, or a laptop with one, covers spreadsheet entry without forcing a layout change. ## Case and mounting The case material is recorded as aluminium, and the board is gasket mounted. Gasket mounting is a structural choice rather than a specification: the plate is held by flexible pads between the plate and the case, which is intended to reduce the hollow sound a rigid metal case produces. We have not recorded a sound measurement for this board, so we cannot tell you how much that helps. The 1,825 g weight follows from the same material. It is the reason the board stays put, and it is the reason it does not travel well. ## Connectivity and modification Connectivity is recorded as USB-C wired and Bluetooth, and the recorded feature list includes wireless connectivity, hot-swappable switches and backlighting. Hot-swappable sockets mean the switches can be changed without soldering, which is the single feature that decides whether a mechanical keyboard is something you keep or something you rebuild. ## Who this is for The board suits someone who wants a compact mechanical keyboard with enough mass under the hands to feel stable, and who wants to be able to change switches later. If your priority is silence rather than customisation, the Q1 is a hard sell: we have no recorded noise specification, and the recorded feature list does not include silent switches or a dampening kit. ## Where the alternatives sit The Keychron K8 Pro is the closer comparison. It shares hot-swappable switches and wired plus Bluetooth connectivity, but it is a tenkeyless board with a plastic case, so it is lighter and it keeps a dedicated function row while losing the arrow cluster. The Logitech MX Keys Mini is the comparison for a different reason: it is a compact low-profile board with multi-device switching, and if you want flat keys rather than mechanical ones, the choice is decided before price. Products covered: - Keychron K8 Pro (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-k8-pro, competitor): Shares hot-swappable switches, but uses a plastic tenkeyless case and adds Bluetooth where the Q1 as currently listed is wired only, so it trades the Q1's density for a lighter body and a kept function row. - Keychron Q1 (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-q1, subject): The subject of this review. Its recorded 75 percent layout, aluminium case and hot-swappable sockets place it among the compact mechanical boards that can be modified later. - Logitech MX Keys Mini (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-keys-mini, competitor): The compact multi-device keyboard a buyer considers when they want a compact layout but flat keys rather than a mechanical feel. **Hot-swappable sockets** The recorded feature list confirms hot-swappable switches, so the switch hardware can be replaced without soldering. That is the feature that turns a mechanical keyboard from a fixed purchase into one you can change later. **A case that stays where you put it** The recorded weight is 1,825 g and the recorded case material is aluminium. That combination is what keeps the board stable on a desk rather than sliding under the wrists. **Wired and wireless in one board** Connectivity is recorded as USB-C wired and Bluetooth, with wireless connectivity in the recorded feature list. A single board can serve a desktop and a laptop without a dongle in between. **No number pad, and no way to add one later** The recorded layout is 75 percent, which removes the number pad. A keyboard without a separate number pad cannot grow one, so anyone who enters figures all day needs a different board or a separate keypad. **Too heavy to travel with** At a recorded 1,825 g, the aluminium case is one of the heavier compact boards. It is a desk product, and a buyer who moves between locations every day is better served by something lighter. **People who plan to change the switches** If you expect to try switch types, the recorded hot-swappable sockets mean the board can follow you rather than the other way around. **People who work in spreadsheets all day** The recorded 75 percent layout has no number pad, and the board cannot be extended to include one. If number entry is a large part of the day, this is the wrong layout. **What we checked** Layout and what the layout removes, the case material and the recorded weight, whether the switches can be replaced without soldering, and whether the board works both wired and wirelessly. Each value comes from the recorded specification and carries its source and verification state on the product page. Questions: - **What layout is the Keychron Q1?** The recorded layout is 75 percent. It keeps a right-hand column and arrow keys, and drops the function row and the number pad. There is no way to add a number pad to the board later. - **Can you change the switches on the Keychron Q1?** Yes. Hot-swappable switches are in the recorded feature list, which means the switch sockets can be opened and the switches replaced without soldering. - **Does the Keychron Q1 work over Bluetooth?** Connectivity is recorded as USB-C wired and Bluetooth, and wireless connectivity appears in the recorded feature list, so the board supports both without a separate receiver. - **How heavy is the Keychron Q1?** The recorded weight is 1,825 g. That is a heavy compact board, which is what keeps an aluminium case stable on a desk but makes it a poor choice for travelling with. ### Keychron Q11 Review: A Split 75 Percent Metal Board With A Knob And No Battery URL: https://abackreviews.com/reviews/keychron-q11-review A split 75 percent metal board at 1,186 g with a rotary knob, hot-swappable sockets and QMK remapping, wired over USB-C with no battery recorded. The Keychron Q11 is a 75 percent ANSI split mechanical keyboard with an all-metal tray-mounted body, a rotary knob, hot-swappable sockets and QMK remapping, and it connects over USB-C. It is a wired board: no battery is recorded for it, and its recorded feature list says it has no wireless connectivity. This review is built from the specifications recorded against the product, each with the manufacturer page it was read from. No board was measured for this page, so nothing here describes how the halves feel, how they sound or how the knob behaves under a finger. ## What the split layout is, on the record The recorded layout is a 75 percent ANSI split layout with a rotary knob. A 75 percent layout is the same class as the Keychron Q1's recorded 75 percent layout, which means the function row and the number pad are not part of it. What the Q11 adds to that class is the split, and the recorded audience for the board is people who type for long hours and want to angle and split the halves of a mechanical keyboard without giving up remapping. The recorded dimensions are 345 mm long and 134 mm wide, and the catalogue marks that value as only partially verified because the manufacturer page does not state whether it describes one half or the pair. A buyer measuring desk space should treat it as an upper bound on one half rather than as a settled measurement. ## The body, and what a tray mount is The recorded frame material is all-metal, and the recorded weight is 1,186 g plus or minus 10 g fully assembled. The Keychron Q1 in the catalogue records a weight of 1,825 g plus or minus 10 g in an aluminium case, so the Q11 is the lighter of the two boards by a wide margin even though it is recorded as two pieces. The recorded mount style is a tray mount, with the plate integrated into the case. That is a different structural choice from the Q1's recorded gasket mount with a steel plate, and the two are not two finishes of the same construction. The Q11 also records screw-in PCB stabilisers, which is the one specification in its list that no other keyboard in the catalogue records. ## Remapping, switches and what can change later The recorded remapping software is QMK firmware with the Keychron Launcher web app, on macOS and Windows. The Q1 in the catalogue records no remapping software specification at all, so the catalogue can neither confirm nor deny what the Q1 offers, while the Q11's record is specific about the tool and the platforms it runs on. The recorded switch options are Keychron Super red or brown, Gateron G Pro red or brown, or barebone. The hot-swappable sockets take five pin and three pin switches, so the board can be built with linear, tactile or clicky switches and changed later. The recorded polling rate is 1000 Hz, and the recorded keycap material is double-shot PBT in a normal profile. ## What the record does not settle No battery, no battery life figure and no charging specification is recorded, because the board is recorded as wired. No lighting specification is recorded either, where the Q1 records backlighting as a feature and the Q11 records none. No sound profile, no typing feel, no latency measurement and no durability result is recorded for this board. No price is recorded. And the recorded dimensions, as set out above, are marked as partially verified. ## Who it is for The recorded audience is people who type for long hours and want to angle and split the halves of a mechanical keyboard while keeping remapping. The recorded split layout, the recorded hot-swappable sockets, the recorded QMK firmware and the recorded all-metal tray-mounted body at 1,186 g are the values behind that fit, and the wired connection is the condition attached to it. Products covered: - Keychron K8 Pro (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-k8-pro, competitor): The recorded Keychron board that is wireless. It records USB-C wired and Bluetooth connectivity with a 4,000 mAh battery and a tenkeyless layout against the Q11's split 75 percent layout. - Keychron Q1 (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-q1, competitor): The single-piece board in the same layout class. It records a gasket mount with a steel plate in an aluminium case at 1,825 g against the Q11's tray mount at 1,186 g, and it records no remapping software specification. - Keychron Q11 (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-q11, subject): The subject of this review. Its recorded split 75 percent ANSI layout, rotary knob, all-metal tray mount, 1,186 g weight and QMK remapping define what this board is. **Split halves with a rotary knob** The recorded layout is a 75 percent ANSI split layout with a rotary knob, and the recorded audience is people who type for long hours and want to angle and split the halves without giving up remapping. The split and the knob are what make this a distinct product rather than another 75 percent board. **An all-metal body at 1,186 g** The recorded frame material is all-metal and the recorded weight is 1,186 g plus or minus 10 g fully assembled, against the 1,825 g recorded for the aluminium Keychron Q1. The board is heavy enough to sit still on a desk and lighter than the single-piece board it shares a layout class with. **Hot-swappable sockets, screw-in stabilisers and QMK remapping** Hot-swappable switches are recorded as yes, with sockets that take five pin and three pin switches, the recorded stabilisers are screw-in PCB, and the recorded remapping software is QMK firmware with the Keychron Launcher web app on macOS and Windows. The switches and the mapping can both change after the board arrives. **It is wired, and there is no battery in the record** The recorded connectivity is USB-C wired, the recorded feature list says there is no wireless connectivity, and no battery, no battery life and no charging specification is recorded for this board. A buyer who wants to move the keyboard between machines without a cable is looking at a different product. **A tray mount, and dimensions the record leaves open** The recorded mount style is a tray mount with the plate integrated into the case, not a gasket mount, and the recorded dimensions of 345 mm long and 134 mm wide are marked as only partially verified because the page does not state whether they describe one half or the pair. **People who want to split and angle their keyboard and still remap it** The recorded split 75 percent layout, the recorded rotary knob, the recorded hot-swappable sockets and the recorded QMK firmware with the Keychron Launcher web app are what let someone change the angle, the switches or the key mapping after the board arrives. **People who want a wireless board or a number pad** The recorded connectivity is USB-C wired, with no wireless connectivity and no battery recorded, and the recorded 75 percent layout leaves out the function row and the number pad. Neither of those can be added to the board later. **What we checked** The recorded layout and whether it splits, the recorded frame material, mount style and weight, the recorded switch options and hot-swapping, the recorded remapping software, the recorded stabilisers and polling rate, the recorded connectivity, and in each case whether the figure that would decide the purchase is actually on record. Questions: - **Is the Keychron Q11 wireless?** No. The recorded connectivity is USB-C wired, the recorded feature list says there is no wireless connectivity, and no battery is recorded for this board. - **What is the layout of the Keychron Q11?** A 75 percent ANSI split layout with a rotary knob. A 75 percent layout leaves out the function row and the number pad, and the Q11 adds the split and the knob on top of it. - **Can the switches on the Keychron Q11 be changed?** Yes. Hot-swappable switches are recorded as yes, with sockets that take five pin and three pin switches, and the recorded options are Keychron Super red or brown, Gateron G Pro red or brown, or barebone. - **What remapping software does the Keychron Q11 use?** QMK firmware with the Keychron Launcher web app, on macOS and Windows. That is the recorded remapping software, and remapping software is in the recorded feature list. - **How much does the Keychron Q11 weigh?** The recorded weight is 1,186 g plus or minus 10 g fully assembled. The Keychron Q1 in the catalogue records 1,825 g plus or minus 10 g for the same layout class. - **Does the Keychron Q11 have a gasket mount?** No. The recorded mount style is a tray mount with the plate integrated into the case, which is a different construction from the gasket mount with a steel plate recorded for the Keychron Q1. ### Logitech Brio 4K Review: 4K Capture, Autofocus and Infrared Login URL: https://abackreviews.com/reviews/logitech-brio-4k-review A webcam with 4K capture, autofocus and infrared authentication support, reviewed from the recorded resolution, focus and infrared specifications. The Logitech Brio 4K is a 4K webcam with autofocus, adjustable field of view and infrared support for platform authentication. It covers more of the range than the Elgato Facecam: more resolution, an autofocus mechanism, and a sensor feature that the Facecam does not record at all. This review is built from the specifications recorded against the product, each with its source and a verification state that is currently partial. We have not handled this camera, so there is nothing here about image quality, a focus distance or a low light result. The recorded resolution, focus mode, field of view and infrared support are what this page works through. ## What 4K buys and what it costs The recorded resolution is up to 4K at 30 fps, and 1080p at 60 fps. The two figures sit together in one line, and they describe two different jobs. A 60 fps workflow runs at 1080p rather than at 4K, so the resolution you buy for is the resolution you get when you are also chasing smooth motion. That is the bargain of a 4K webcam, and it is why the Elgato Facecam can be the better answer for a 1080p 60 stream. ## Autofocus The recorded focus is Autofocus. This is the specification that changes day to day behaviour, because the camera can follow a subject rather than hold a single focal plane. For a fixed desk and a fixed seat, autofocus solves a problem you would not have had. For a camera that moves between rooms, or a presenter who stands up, it removes the need to reframe. The Facecam records a fixed-focus prime lens, which is the opposite decision and a defensible one. ## Infrared support The recorded infrared support value is Yes, and infrared authentication support is the only entry in the recorded feature list. This is the feature with the narrowest audience and the clearest use: signing in to a computer that expects an infrared camera to confirm that a real person is present. No other webcam in the catalogue records it. ## Field of view The recorded field of view is Adjustable, without the software qualifier that the Facecam records. In practice that means framing can be changed, though the recorded data does not say how much of the range is available. ## Who this is for The Brio suits someone who needs 4K capture for a high resolution recording, or who signs in to a machine with infrared authentication, and who is willing to pay for it. It is a poor fit for a buyer who wants a manual exposure workflow, because no manual exposure control is recorded here, and for a 1080p 60 stream that wants to stay at 1080p. ## Where the alternative sits The Elgato Facecam is the alternative: 1080p at 60 fps, a fixed-focus prime lens, a field of view adjustable in software, manual exposure control and a monitor mount with a tripod thread. Choose the Brio for resolution range, autofocus and infrared. Choose the Facecam for a manually controlled 1080p frame. Products covered: - Elgato Facecam (https://abackreviews.com/products/elgato-facecam, competitor): Records 1080p at 60 fps, a fixed-focus prime lens, a field of view adjustable in software and manual exposure control, so it wins where a repeatable manual frame matters and this camera does not. - Logitech Brio 4K (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-brio-4k, subject): The subject of this review. Its recorded 4K at 30 fps output, autofocus and infrared support make it the camera to consider when resolution range or platform authentication matters. **4K capture when the frame rate allows** The recorded resolution is up to 4K at 30 fps, with 1080p at 60 fps alongside it. That covers high resolution recordings where the subject moves slowly, and full frame rate for the streams where it moves quickly. **Autofocus recorded** The recorded focus is Autofocus, so the camera can follow a subject rather than hold a single focal plane. That removes the need to reframe when the presenter stands up or the camera is moved between rooms. **Infrared authentication support** Infrared support is recorded as Yes, and infrared authentication support is the entry in the recorded feature list. No other webcam in the catalogue records it, and it is what a machine expects when it checks a login with an infrared camera. **4K runs at 30 fps** The recorded resolution is up to 4K at 30 fps and 1080p at 60 fps. A workflow that needs both high resolution and 60 frames per second has to choose, because the recorded line does not offer 4K at 60. **No manual exposure control recorded** The recorded feature list for this webcam contains infrared authentication support only. No manual exposure entry is recorded, so a buyer who wants to set the picture once and leave it there has to look at the Facecam. **People who need 4K or infrared login** The recorded audience is users who need 4K capture or infrared style authentication, and who are willing to pay for it. Those two recorded entries are the reason to choose this camera over a 1080p one. **People who want a manual 1080p frame** No manual exposure control is recorded here, and 4K is recorded only at 30 fps. A buyer who wants a 1080p 60 stream with the picture set once by hand is looking at a different camera. **What we checked** The recorded resolutions and the frame rate each one runs at, the recorded focus mode, the recorded field of view adjustment and the recorded infrared support. Each value comes from the recorded specification and carries its source and verification state. Questions: - **What resolution does the Logitech Brio 4K record?** The recorded resolution is up to 4K at 30 fps, with 1080p at 60 fps recorded alongside it. The two figures cover different workflows rather than a single setting. - **Does the Logitech Brio 4K have autofocus?** Yes. The recorded focus is Autofocus, so the camera can follow a subject instead of holding a single fixed focal plane the way the Elgato Facecam does. - **Does the Logitech Brio 4K support infrared?** Yes. Infrared support is recorded as Yes, and infrared authentication support appears in the recorded feature list, which is what a machine expects when it checks a login with an infrared camera. - **Can you adjust the field of view on the Logitech Brio 4K?** Yes. The recorded field of view is adjustable, though the recorded data does not specify how much of the range is available or how the adjustment is made. - **Does the Logitech Brio 4K have manual exposure control?** That is not recorded. The recorded feature list for this webcam contains infrared authentication support only, and no manual exposure entry appears for it. ### Logitech C920s Review: A 1080p Webcam With A Physical Privacy Shutter URL: https://abackreviews.com/reviews/logitech-c920s-review A fixed 1080p camera with a 78 degree diagonal field of view, autofocus with a glass lens, a stereo microphone and a shutter that closes over the lens. The Logitech C920s PRO HD Webcam is a fixed 1080p camera with a physical privacy shutter on the lens, a glass lens with autofocus, a stereo microphone and a 78 degree diagonal field of view. It records 1080p at 30 fps and 720p at 30 fps, and no 4K mode is recorded for it. This review works from the specifications recorded against the product, each carrying the manufacturer page it was read from. No camera was connected for this page, so nothing here describes how the image looks, how the autofocus behaves or how the microphone sounds. ## What the camera records The recorded resolution is 1080p at 30 fps, 720p at 30 fps. The frame rate is 30 fps at both, and that is the first thing to notice. The Logitech Brio 4K in the catalogue records up to 4K at 30 fps and 1080p at 60 fps, and the Elgato Facecam records 1080p at 60 fps, so both of the other cameras record a higher frame rate at some resolution. The recorded focus is autofocus with a glass lens. The Facecam records a fixed focus prime lens and the Brio records autofocus, so the mechanism here is a recorded difference between the three cameras rather than a matter of taste. ## The field of view, and why the same number means different things The recorded field of view angle for the C920s is 78 degrees diagonal, one fixed figure. The Brio 4K records 90, 78 or 65 degrees as three presets, and its field of view is recorded as adjustable. The Facecam records 82 degrees diagonal with a field of view adjustable in software. So the 78 degrees on the C920s is a single fixed diagonal angle, and the 78 degrees among the Brio's three presets is the middle option of a set that opens to 90 or narrows to 65. The same number describes two different things, and a buyer comparing them on that figure alone would be comparing the wrong thing. ## The shutter The recorded privacy shutter is yes, a physical shutter on the lens, and a physical privacy shutter appears in the recorded feature list. Nothing in the record is ambiguous about it: it is a shutter that closes over the lens. The catalogue holds no privacy shutter specification for the Brio 4K or for the Facecam. That is an absence in the record rather than a finding. It does not mean either camera lacks a shutter, it means this catalogue does not hold one for them, and the question has to be put to the manufacturer for those two. ## The microphone, the mounting and the cable The recorded built-in microphone is yes, stereo, with a range up to 1 m, and a built-in microphone appears in the recorded feature list. The Brio records a built-in microphone of dual omni-directional type with a range up to 1.2 m, and the Facecam records no built-in microphone at all. The recorded mounting is a universal mounting clip that fits laptops and monitors, and a tripod is not included. The Facecam records a monitor mount and a tripod thread, which is a different arrangement of mounting, and it records USB 3.0 or better over Type-C where this camera records an attached USB-A cable. The recorded cable is 1.5 m, attached USB-A, and the recorded USB connection is USB-A. The recorded dimensions are 43.3 by 94 by 71 mm including the mounting clip, and the recorded weight is 162 g, 5.71 oz. The recorded operating systems are Windows 8 or later, macOS 10.10 or later and ChromeOS. ## What this camera is for The recorded intended user wants a fixed 1080p camera for calls and streaming, with a shutter they can close without unplugging it. That is what the recorded specification supports: a 1080p image, a framing that does not need setting, a microphone recorded for a call at a metre, and a shutter that closes over the lens. The trade is the frame rate and the fixed field of view. If you want 60 fps at 1080p, the Brio 4K records it, and if you want to set the exposure by hand, the Facecam records that, though its manufacturer has discontinued it. What the record cannot settle is image quality, autofocus behaviour and microphone performance, because none of those have been measured here. Products covered: - Elgato Facecam (https://abackreviews.com/products/elgato-facecam, competitor): The fixed focus 1080p alternative with manual exposure control and a 82 degree diagonal field of view, whose manufacturer has discontinued it, so it is a reference rather than a recommendation. - Logitech Brio 4K (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-brio-4k, competitor): The same manufacturer's current camera. It records up to 4K at 30 fps, 1080p at 60 fps, three field of view presets of 90, 78 or 65 degrees and infrared support for platform sign-in. - Logitech C920s PRO HD Webcam (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-c920s-pro-hd-webcam, subject): The subject of this review. Its recorded 1080p at 30 fps, single 78 degree diagonal field of view, autofocus with a glass lens and physical privacy shutter define it. **A physical shutter on the lens** The recorded privacy shutter is yes, a physical shutter on the lens, and a physical privacy shutter appears in the recorded feature list. It is a mechanical barrier over the lens rather than a setting inside an application. **Autofocus with a glass lens** The recorded focus is autofocus with a glass lens, and the recorded resolution is 1080p at 30 fps, 720p at 30 fps. The Elgato Facecam records a fixed focus prime lens instead, so the focusing mechanism is a recorded difference and not a preference. **A stereo microphone and a clip for laptops and monitors** The recorded built-in microphone is yes, stereo, with a range up to 1 m, and a built-in microphone appears in the recorded feature list. The recorded mounting is a universal mounting clip that fits laptops and monitors, and a tripod is not included. **30 fps at every recorded resolution** The recorded resolution is 1080p at 30 fps and 720p at 30 fps, so the frame rate does not rise with the resolution. The Logitech Brio 4K records 1080p at 60 fps and the Elgato Facecam records 1080p at 60 fps. **One fixed field of view and no infrared support recorded** The recorded field of view angle is a single 78 degrees diagonal, where the Brio 4K records 90, 78 or 65 degrees as three presets. No infrared support is recorded for this camera, so platform sign-in is not documented for it here. **People who want a camera they can cover between calls** The recorded intended user wants a fixed 1080p camera for calls and streaming, with a shutter they can close without unplugging it. The recorded 30 fps and 78 degree diagonal are enough for a call at a fixed framing. **People who need 60 fps at 1080p, or 4K capture** The recorded resolution stops at 1080p at 30 fps, and no 4K mode is recorded. A buyer who needs a higher frame rate at 1080p is looking at the recorded 1080p at 60 fps of the Logitech Brio 4K. **What we checked** The recorded resolution and frame rate, the recorded field of view angle, the recorded focus, the recorded privacy shutter, the recorded built-in microphone, the recorded mounting, cable and USB connection, the recorded dimensions, weight and operating systems, and for each of those whether the figure that would decide the purchase is on record. Questions: - **Does the Logitech C920s have a privacy shutter?** Yes. The recorded privacy shutter is yes, a physical shutter on the lens, and a physical privacy shutter appears in the recorded feature list for this camera. - **What resolution does the Logitech C920s record?** The recorded resolution is 1080p at 30 fps, 720p at 30 fps. The frame rate is 30 fps at both, where the Brio 4K records 1080p at 60 fps and the Facecam records 1080p at 60 fps. - **What is the field of view of the Logitech C920s?** The recorded field of view angle is 78 degrees diagonal, one fixed figure. The Brio 4K records 90, 78 or 65 degrees as three presets, so the 78 degrees there is the middle of a set. - **Does the Logitech C920s have a built-in microphone?** Yes. The recorded built-in microphone is yes, stereo, with a range up to 1 m, and a built-in microphone appears in the recorded feature list. The Elgato Facecam records no built-in microphone. - **How do you mount the Logitech C920s?** The recorded mounting is a universal mounting clip that fits laptops and monitors, and a tripod is not included. The recorded cable is 1.5 m, attached USB-A. - **Is the Elgato Facecam still available to buy?** The Facecam product page states that the camera has been discontinued, and its recorded product status is discontinued by the manufacturer. It stays on the site as a reference rather than as a current recommendation. ### Logitech Lift Review: A Vertical Mouse Sized for Smaller Hands URL: https://abackreviews.com/reviews/logitech-lift-review A 57 degree vertical mouse at a recorded 125 g, intended for small to medium hands, reviewed from the recorded grip angle, weight and connectivity. The Logitech Lift is a vertical ergonomic wireless mouse designed for smaller hands, with a natural handshake grip angle. The recorded specifications describe a mouse built around a 57 degree vertical grip, a 125 g weight and an intended hand size of small to medium. This review is written from the specifications recorded against the product, each of which carries a source and a verification state that is currently partial. We have not handled this mouse, so nothing here claims a comfort rating, a tracking result or a fatigue finding. The recorded grip angle, weight, connectivity and intended hand size are what this page works through. ## What a 57 degree grip changes The recorded grip angle is Vertical (57 degrees). A vertical mouse holds the hand in a handshake position rather than a flat one, which puts the forearm at a different angle to the desk. That is the entire point of the shape, and it is also why the mouse is a specific tool rather than a general upgrade. A vertical grip does not make a flat grip feel better in the first week. It asks the forearm to hold a different posture, and the recorded data says nothing about how long that takes to get comfortable. What it does say is that this mouse was drawn for a vertical hold. ## Weight and hand size The recorded weight is 125 g, against a recorded 141 g for the Logitech MX Master 3S. That is 16 g less in the hand, and it matters on a mouse that sits under the hand for a whole working day. The recorded intended hand size is small to medium. This is the single most useful number on the page, because it defines who the shape was drawn for. The MX Master 3S is recorded for medium to large hands and weighs more. If your hand sits at the larger end of medium, the Lift may be the wrong size, and no other recorded specification will tell you so. ## Connectivity Connectivity is recorded as Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt, and multi-device switching appears in the recorded feature list alongside the vertical grip. A buyer moving between a laptop and a desktop gets the same pairing approach used across the MX range. ## What the recorded data does not cover No sensor resolution is recorded for the Lift. The MX Master 3S records 8000 DPI, so for that model there is a number to compare. Here there is not, and the mouse also has no recorded switch specification, which means the recorded quiet switches of the MX Master 3S have no counterpart to weigh against. A buyer choosing on click noise has to look elsewhere for that answer. ## Who this is for The Lift suits someone with small to medium hands who wants a vertical hold and prefers a lighter mouse than a 141 g ergonomic one. It is a poor fit for large hands looking for a sculpted horizontal shape, and for anyone who wants a measured sensor resolution on the spec sheet. ## Where the alternatives sit The Logitech MX Master 3S is the direct comparison: a sculpted horizontal mouse for medium to large hands, with 8000 DPI, seven buttons and quiet switches recorded. The Logitech MX Anywhere 3S is the smaller alternative at a recorded 99 g, which works on glass and most surfaces, but it is a horizontal mouse, so it does not address the wrist angle that makes the Lift worth considering. Products covered: - Logitech Lift (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-lift, subject): The subject of this review. Its recorded 57 degree vertical grip, 125 g weight and small to medium hand size make it the mouse to consider when wrist angle matters more than button count. - Logitech MX Anywhere 3S (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-anywhere-3s, competitor): A lighter horizontal mouse at a recorded 99 g that works on glass and most surfaces. It beats the Lift on travel weight but offers no vertical grip angle. - Logitech MX Master 3S (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-master-3s, competitor): The sculpted horizontal alternative at a recorded 141 g for medium to large hands, with 8000 DPI, seven buttons and quiet switches recorded, none of which the Lift records. **A vertical grip at a recorded 57 degrees** The recorded grip angle is Vertical (57 degrees), and the vertical grip appears in the recorded feature list. The hand is held in a handshake position rather than flat, which is the reason this mouse exists at all. **Lighter than the sculpted alternative** The recorded weight is 125 g against a recorded 141 g for the Logitech MX Master 3S. On a mouse that stays under the hand all day, 16 g is a difference you feel before you notice it on paper. **Multi-device switching over standard radios** Multi-device switching is in the recorded feature list, and connectivity is recorded as Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt, so the mouse moves between a laptop and a desktop without a proprietary receiver. **The recorded hand size excludes larger hands** The recorded intended hand size is small to medium. The Logitech MX Master 3S is recorded for medium to large hands, which is the other half of this decision, and no recorded specification bridges the gap between them. **No sensor resolution and no switch specification** Neither a sensor resolution nor a switch specification is recorded for this mouse. The MX Master 3S records 8000 DPI and quiet switches, so both of those questions are answerable there and are open here. **People with smaller hands who want a vertical hold** The recorded intended hand size and the recorded 57 degree grip angle point to one buyer: someone with small to medium hands who wants the wrist at a handshake angle and a mouse that is lighter than the sculpted alternative. **People with larger hands** The recorded hand size for this mouse stops at medium, and the MX Master 3S is the recorded option for medium to large hands. A buyer whose hand runs past the top of this mouse should look at the horizontal shape instead. **What we checked** The grip angle, because it decides how the hand is held, the weight, the intended hand size, and the connection options. Each value comes from the recorded specification and carries its source and verification state on the product page. Questions: - **What grip angle does the Logitech Lift use?** The recorded grip angle is Vertical (57 degrees), and the vertical grip appears in the recorded feature list. The hand is held in a handshake position rather than flat on the desk. - **How much does the Logitech Lift weigh?** The recorded weight is 125 g. That makes it 16 g lighter than the Logitech MX Master 3S, whose recorded weight is 141 g. - **What hand size is the Logitech Lift designed for?** The recorded intended hand size is small to medium. The Logitech MX Master 3S is the recorded alternative for medium to large hands, so the hand size is what separates the two. - **How does the Logitech Lift connect to a computer?** Connectivity is recorded as Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt, and multi-device switching appears in the recorded feature list, so it pairs over the same radio options used across the MX range. - **Does the Logitech Lift have quiet click switches?** That is not answered by the recorded data. No switch specification is recorded for this mouse, while quiet switches are recorded for the Logitech MX Master 3S. ### Logitech MX Anywhere 3S Review: A 99 g Mouse Built to Travel URL: https://abackreviews.com/reviews/logitech-mx-anywhere-3s-review A 99 g travel mouse that records support for glass and most surfaces and a 70 day battery figure, reviewed from its recorded specifications and the. The Logitech MX Anywhere 3S is a compact wireless mouse intended for travel, with an electromagnetic scroll wheel and multi-device pairing. At a recorded 99 g it is the lightest mouse in this catalogue, and that single number shapes almost every buying decision around it. This page is built from the specifications recorded against the product, each carrying its source and a verification state that is currently partial. We have not handled this mouse, so there is no claim here about tracking accuracy, click feel or how small it is in the hand. The recorded weight, connectivity, surface support and battery figure are what this review works through. ## The case for 99 g The recorded weight is 99 g. The Logitech Lift records 125 g and the Logitech MX Master 3S records 141 g, so this is the lightest of the three by a clear margin. In a laptop bag, a mouse that weighs less than a tenth of a kilo is a different kind of object from one that weighs nearly a tenth and a half. Lightness on its own is not a reason to buy, but it is the reason this mouse ends up in the bag rather than on the desk. ## Working on glass Surface support is recorded as Works on glass and most surfaces. That is a specific and useful recorded claim for anyone whose available surface is a glass meeting table or a polished desk, where a sensor that struggles to track simply stops working. It is the clearest recorded difference between this mouse and the two larger models in the catalogue. ## Battery and connectivity Battery life is recorded as Up to 70 days on a full charge, which is the same figure recorded for the MX Master 3S. Connectivity is recorded as Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt, so the mouse pairs over the same two radio options used across the MX range. ## What the recorded data does not cover The recorded feature list for this mouse is empty. That does not make the description wrong, but it does mean the electromagnetic scroll wheel and the multi-device pairing mentioned in the product description have no separate recorded feature entry behind them. There is also no recorded switch specification and no recorded sensor resolution, so the 8000 DPI and quiet switches recorded for the MX Master 3S are points you can compare there and cannot here. ## Who this is for The MX Anywhere 3S suits someone who moves between desks, works in places where the surface may be glass, and wants the lightest mouse they can carry. It is a poor fit for anyone who wants a sculpted palm rest, a recorded sensor resolution or a documented quiet-switch specification. ## Where the alternatives sit The Logitech MX Master 3S is the comparison, because it records the same 70 day battery figure in a 141 g sculpted body with 8000 DPI, seven buttons and quiet switches. The Logitech Lift is the other alternative, and it takes a different route entirely: 125 g, a 57 degree vertical grip and a recorded small to medium hand size, which addresses wrist angle rather than travel weight. Products covered: - Logitech Lift (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-lift, competitor): A 125 g alternative that changes the hand position with a 57 degree vertical grip instead of the body size, which is a different trade from the one this mouse makes. - Logitech MX Anywhere 3S (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-anywhere-3s, subject): The subject of this review. Its recorded 99 g weight and its recorded support for glass and most surfaces make it the mouse to consider for a bag rather than a desk. - Logitech MX Master 3S (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-master-3s, competitor): Records the same 70 day battery figure in a 141 g sculpted body with 8000 DPI, seven buttons and quiet switches, so it is the comparison for anyone who wants a palm rest rather than a small footprint. **The lightest mouse in the catalogue** The recorded weight is 99 g, against 125 g for the Logitech Lift and 141 g for the Logitech MX Master 3S. At that weight the mouse can stay in a laptop bag permanently instead of living on one desk. **Recorded support for glass** Surface support is recorded as works on glass and most surfaces. On a glass table or a polished desk, that recorded capability is the difference between a mouse that keeps tracking and one that does not. **The same battery figure as the larger mouse** Battery life is recorded as up to 70 days on a full charge, matching the figure recorded for the Logitech MX Master 3S, and connectivity is recorded as Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt. **The recorded feature list is empty** No features are recorded for this mouse, so the electromagnetic scroll wheel and the multi-device pairing that appear in the product description have no separate recorded entry behind them. The description is not evidence in the way a recorded specification is. **No sensor resolution or switch specification** Neither a sensor resolution nor a switch specification is recorded here. The MX Master 3S records 8000 DPI and quiet switches, so a buyer who is choosing on precision or on click noise has nothing recorded to compare. **People who work away from a fixed desk** The recorded weight of 99 g and the recorded support for glass and most surfaces suit someone who moves between desks, travels, or works in places where the only available surface is a table. **People who want a sculpted palm rest** The recorded audience for this mouse is travel, and the body is compact. If the requirement is a filled palm, a recorded sensor resolution or a documented quiet-switch specification, this is the wrong size of object. **What we checked** The recorded weight, because it decides whether the mouse travels, the recorded surface support, the battery figure and the connection options, and which of the usual feature questions the catalogue actually answers. Each value carries its source and verification state. Questions: - **How much does the Logitech MX Anywhere 3S weigh?** The recorded weight is 99 g, which makes it the lightest mouse recorded in this catalogue, ahead of the Logitech Lift at 125 g and the Logitech MX Master 3S at 141 g. - **Can the Logitech MX Anywhere 3S work on glass?** Yes. Surface support is recorded as works on glass and most surfaces, which covers glass meeting tables and polished desks as well as ordinary desk surfaces. - **How long does the Logitech MX Anywhere 3S battery last?** Battery life is recorded as up to 70 days on a full charge, which is the same figure recorded for the Logitech MX Master 3S. - **How does the Logitech MX Anywhere 3S connect?** Connectivity is recorded as Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt. The recorded feature list for this mouse is empty, so multi-device pairing appears in the product description rather than as a recorded feature. - **What is the sensor resolution of the Logitech MX Anywhere 3S?** No sensor resolution is recorded for this mouse. The Logitech MX Master 3S records 8000 DPI, so that figure belongs to the larger model rather than to this one. ### Logitech MX Keys Mini Review: A Compact Board That Switches Between Devices URL: https://abackreviews.com/reviews/logitech-mx-keys-mini-review A compact low-profile keyboard with multi-device switching, a five-month battery figure that depends on the backlighting being off, and USB-C. The Logitech MX Keys Mini is a compact low-profile wireless keyboard with backlit spherical keycaps, multi-device switching and USB-C charging. It is a different object from the mechanical boards it shares a shelf with, and the recorded specifications make the differences concrete. This page is built from the specifications recorded against the product, each with its source and a verification state that is currently partial. We have not handled this keyboard, so there is no claim here about noise levels, key travel or how the low profile feels under the fingers. The recorded data does settle the layout, the connection options, the battery condition and the charging standard, and those are what this review works through. ## Layout: compact, with the function row kept The recorded layout is Compact with function row. A compact layout is shorter than a full size board, and the recorded function row means the top row of shortcuts is not given up to save width. What a compact layout gives up is the numeric block: no number pad is recorded for this keyboard, and a compact board cannot be widened later. For anyone who enters figures all day, that is the deciding fact, and it is a structural one rather than a matter of taste. ## Connectivity and the multi-device claim Connectivity is recorded as Bluetooth and Logi Bolt, and multi-device switching appears in the recorded feature list alongside wireless connectivity. That combination is the reason the board is positioned for people who move between a laptop and a desktop: switching between devices is recorded, and it does not depend on a proprietary receiver. Charging is recorded as USB-C, so the cable in the bag is the same cable you already charge a phone with. No charging time is recorded, and no figure for how many devices can be paired at once appears in the recorded data either. ## The battery figure and the condition attached to it Battery life is recorded as Up to 5 months with backlighting off. That is a large number, and it is a conditional one. The product description records backlit spherical keycaps, so a configuration with the lighting on is not the configuration the five-month figure describes. Read it as the ceiling for a keyboard used with the backlighting off, and treat any expectation of five months with the lighting on as unverified. We have no recorded figure for that case. ## Who this is for The recorded audience is users who type mostly on flat, quiet keyboards and want multi-device switching without a mechanical feel. That matches the recorded data: a low-profile body, backlit spherical keycaps, USB-C charging and device switching. ## Where the alternatives sit The Keychron Q1 is the comparison for compactness with a different feel. It is a 75 percent mechanical board in an aluminium case with hot-swappable switches recorded, where the MX Keys Mini has no mechanical switch specification recorded at all. The Keychron K8 Pro is the comparison for remapping: it records QMK and VIA with hot-swappable switches, which is what you get when the priority is programmable keys rather than a flat typing surface and a long battery interval. Products covered: - Keychron K8 Pro (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-k8-pro, competitor): Records QMK and VIA remapping with hot-swappable switches, which the MX Keys Mini does not record. The difference decides the buy whenever programmable keys matter more than a flat key surface. - Keychron Q1 (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-q1, competitor): A compact board in the same size bracket, but a 75 percent mechanical one in an aluminium case with hot-swappable switches recorded, where the MX Keys Mini records no mechanical switch specification at all. - Logitech MX Keys Mini (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-keys-mini, subject): The subject of this review. Its recorded compact layout, multi-device switching and USB-C charging make it the keyboard to consider for a flat typing surface across more than one device. **A battery figure measured in months** Battery life is recorded as up to 5 months with backlighting off. A charge cycle measured in months rather than weeks is the most useful number on the record for a keyboard that sits on a desk and is picked up occasionally. **Multi-device switching over standard radios** Multi-device switching is in the recorded feature list, and connectivity is recorded as Bluetooth and Logi Bolt. The board moves between a laptop and a desktop without a proprietary receiver in the chain. **A compact layout that keeps the function row** The recorded layout is Compact with function row, and the description records backlit spherical keycaps over a low-profile body. The keyboard is short on the desk without giving up the top row of shortcuts. **The five-month figure assumes the backlighting is off** Battery life is recorded as up to 5 months with backlighting off, and the product description records backlit spherical keycaps. The headline number therefore describes a configuration the hardware does not use by default, and no figure for the lit case is recorded. **No switch type and no remapping software recorded** The recorded feature list for this keyboard covers multi-device switching and wireless connectivity only. No mechanical switch specification and no remapping software are recorded, so a buyer whose requirement is hot-swappable sockets or programmable layers has nothing here to check. **People who switch between two machines** The recorded combination of multi-device switching, Bluetooth and Logi Bolt connectivity and USB-C charging suits someone who moves between a laptop and a desktop and wants one keyboard that follows. **People who want a mechanical feel** No mechanical switch specification is recorded for this board, and the recorded audience is users who type on flat, quiet keyboards. If the point of the purchase is a mechanical feel or hot-swappable switches, this is the wrong category. **What we checked** The layout and what a compact layout removes, the connection options and the device switching claim, the battery figure together with the condition attached to it, and the charging standard. Each value comes from the recorded specification and carries its source and verification state. Questions: - **What layout is the Logitech MX Keys Mini?** The recorded layout is Compact with function row. It keeps the top row of shortcuts and drops the numeric block, and no number pad is recorded for this keyboard. - **How long does the Logitech MX Keys Mini battery last?** Battery life is recorded as up to 5 months with backlighting off. The condition matters, because the product description records backlit spherical keycaps, and no figure is recorded for the lit case. - **How is the Logitech MX Keys Mini charged?** Charging is recorded as USB-C, so the keyboard uses the same cable as most other devices on the desk. No charging time is recorded in the specification. - **Can the Logitech MX Keys Mini switch between devices?** Yes. Multi-device switching appears in the recorded feature list, and connectivity is recorded as Bluetooth and Logi Bolt, so no proprietary receiver is involved. - **Does the Logitech MX Keys Mini have backlit keys?** The product description records backlit spherical keycaps. The recorded battery figure of up to 5 months applies with the backlighting off, which is the condition the manufacturer attaches to it. ### Logitech MX Master 3S research notes URL: https://abackreviews.com/reviews/logitech-mx-master-3s-review A sculpted wireless mouse for medium to large hands, with quiet switches and a configurable thumb wheel. The MX Master 3S is an ergonomic wireless mouse for people who spend long hours at a desk and want a specific set of properties: a palm-filling shape, quiet clicking, a secondary thumb wheel, and multi-device pairing. ## What the product is It is a sculpted, right-handed mouse with a high-resolution sensor, an electromagnetic scroll wheel and configurable buttons. Logitech positions it for productivity rather than gaming. ## What it does well The shape supports the palm and encourages a neutral wrist angle for people with medium to large hands. The main scroll wheel switches between free-spinning and ratcheted scrolling, which is genuinely useful for long documents. Quiet switches make it suitable for shared spaces. Multi-device pairing lets it switch between a laptop and a desktop without re-pairing. ## Where it falls short It is heavy compared with gaming-oriented mice, so it is not the right choice if you move the cursor constantly across a large display. It is right-handed only. Several of its best features, including per-application button mapping and gesture controls, depend on vendor software, and some configuration flows expect an account. Bluetooth performance is adequate for office work but is not intended for competitive gaming. ## Who should look elsewhere Left-handed users cannot use it as designed. If you want a lighter mouse for fast, large cursor movements, a lighter option is a better fit. If you prefer a vertical grip, a vertical mouse is a more direct answer. Products covered: - Logitech MX Master 3S (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-master-3s, subject) **Palm-filling shape** Supports the palm and encourages a neutral wrist angle for medium to large hands. **Dual-mode scroll wheel** Switches between free-spinning and ratcheted scrolling, which is useful for long documents. **Quiet switches** Suitable for shared spaces where clicking noise is disruptive. **Heavy for large cursor movements** Around 141 grams. Not ideal if you move the cursor constantly across a large display. **Right-handed only** The shape only works as designed in the right hand. **Advanced features need vendor software** Per-application mapping and gesture controls require the manufacturer application, and some flows expect an account. **Long desk sessions with medium to large hands** You want palm support, quiet clicking and multi-device switching. **Small hands or vertical grip preference** A smaller mouse or a vertical mouse is a better fit. Questions: - **Is the MX Master 3S suitable for gaming?** It is designed for productivity. It is heavier than typical gaming mice and its wireless mode is not aimed at competitive latency. Lightweight wired or dedicated wireless gaming mice are a better fit. - **Does the MX Master 3S work on macOS?** Yes, over Bluetooth or the vendor receiver. Advanced configuration such as per-application button mapping requires the manufacturer application. - **How long does the battery last?** The manufacturer states up to 70 days on a full charge. That figure depends on usage and backlighting, and we have not independently measured it. ### MOFT Z Review: A Folding Sit-Stand Desk That Folds To Half An Inch URL: https://abackreviews.com/reviews/moft-z-5-in-1-sit-stand-desk-review A folding sit-stand that raises a laptop to 25 cm through three angles, folds flat to 1.3 cm and weighs 960 g, read from its manufacturer page. The MOFT Z 5-in-1 Sit-Stand Desk is a folding laptop stand that raises a laptop to ten inches, tilts through three angles and folds flat to half an inch. It is not a fixed riser, and the Rain Design mStand, the only other stand in this catalogue, is a fixed block of machined aluminium at 150 mm that stays on the desk. This review is built from the specifications recorded against the product, each carrying the manufacturer page it was read from. No stand was handled for this page, so nothing here describes how the MOFT Z feels to type on, how steady it is, or how the folding mechanism behaves over time. ## What the folding actually buys The recorded folded thickness is 1.3 cm, half an inch, and folds flat appears in the recorded feature list. The recorded dimensions are 279 by 239 by 12.7 mm, 11 by 9.4 by 5 inches, and the recorded weight is 960 g, 33.7 oz. That single figure is the case for a folding stand. An object about the thickness of a closed book can go into a bag, a locker or a drawer, and it can be set up again at the other end. The mStand has no equivalent number, because it is not a folding object. It records a width and depth of 253 by 190 mm and a weight of 1.46 kg, 3 pounds, and it stays where it is put. ## Height, and the three tilt angles The recorded height is 25 cm, 10 inches, standing. 12 cm at 25 degrees, 19.4 cm at 45 and 25 cm at 60. The recorded adjustable value is yes, three tilt angles and a standing height. Read that as a range rather than a single number. The lowest of the three recorded positions is 12 cm, close to the 150 mm the mStand holds, and the highest is 25 cm, which is the standing height. The mStand records one height and records adjustable as no, so there is no second position to move to when a chair, a desk or a task changes. ## Keyboard access, and the question that decides the purchase The recorded keyboard access for the MOFT Z is that it works as a riser with an external keyboard. That line describes the raised position, the one where the screen is high and the laptop keyboard is out of reach. The recorded description also says the desk works as a lap desk and a riser, and the product is named as a five in one desk, so the lower arrangements are ones where the machine's own keyboard is in reach. The mStand has no such position to fall back to. Its recorded keyboard access is that it requires an external keyboard, and there is no second use to move to. That is the most useful recorded difference between the two stands, and it is a difference in how the desk is used rather than in how it looks. A buyer who still types on the laptop is looking at a folding sit-stand. A buyer with a separate keyboard can use either. ## Material, load, and what is not recorded The recorded material is vegan leather, fibreglass, magnets and metal sheets. The recorded load capacity is up to 22 lb, and the recorded laptop support is laptops up to 16 inches, and it also works with tablets. The mStand records aluminium as its material and laptop support as fitting all MacBooks and most notebooks, and it records no load capacity at all. What the record does not hold is anything about behaviour. There is no recorded stability figure, no recorded wobble measurement, no recorded friction value and no recorded sense of how either surface feels under a keyboard or a wrist. A load capacity is a limit, not a stability measurement, and the catalogue holds one of them for one stand and not the other. ## Who this suits The recorded audience for the MOFT Z is users who alternate between sitting and standing, or who want a stand that folds into a bag instead of living on the desk. Both of those are recorded intents rather than measured results, and the folded thickness is the recorded figure that supports the second of them. The recorded audience for the mStand is users who use an external keyboard and want a stable fixed-height stand. On the record that is a different desk, not a better one, and the two records do not compete for the same buyer. Products covered: - MOFT Z 5-in-1 Sit-Stand Desk (https://abackreviews.com/products/moft-z-5-in-1-sit-stand-desk, subject): The subject of this review. Its recorded folded thickness of 1.3 cm, three tilt angles, 25 cm standing height and 960 g weight are what separate it from the fixed mStand. - Rain Design mStand (https://abackreviews.com/products/rain-design-mstand, competitor): The only other stand in the category. It records a fixed 150 mm height in aluminium at 1.46 kg that never folds, and requires an external keyboard in every position. **Folds flat to 1.3 cm and weighs 960 g** The recorded folded thickness is 1.3 cm, half an inch, and folds flat is in the recorded feature list. With a recorded weight of 960 g, 33.7 oz, and recorded dimensions of 279 by 239 by 12.7 mm, this is the stand in the category that can be carried rather than moved. **Three tilt angles and a standing height** The recorded height is 25 cm, 10 inches, standing, with 12 cm at 25 degrees, 19.4 cm at 45 and 25 cm at 60, and the recorded adjustable value is yes, three tilt angles and a standing height. One stand covers a low seated position, a raised position and a standing one. **Works with the laptop keyboard in the lower positions** The recorded keyboard access says it works as a riser with an external keyboard, which covers the raised position, and the recorded description names a lap desk and a riser among its arrangements. The recorded audience is users who alternate between sitting and standing. **The raised position still asks for an external keyboard** The recorded keyboard access is that it works as a riser with an external keyboard. At the top of the recorded range, at 25 cm, the machine's own keyboard is out of reach, so a separate keyboard is part of the purchase for anyone who works that way. **No recorded stability figure and no recorded feel** There is no recorded stability figure, no recorded wobble measurement and no recorded retention force for the magnets, and no recorded sense of how the vegan leather and fibreglass surface feels under a keyboard. The recorded load capacity of up to 22 lb is a limit rather than a measurement of steadiness. **People who type on the laptop and want to change position** The recorded three tilt angles, the recorded 25 cm standing height and the recorded folding to 1.3 cm match the recorded audience of people who alternate between sitting and standing, or who want a stand that folds into a bag rather than living on the desk. **People who want one fixed height that never moves** The recorded adjustable value is yes and the recorded heights run from 12 cm to 25 cm, so this is a stand that changes. A buyer who wants a single fixed elevation on a desk that never changes is better served by the recorded 150 mm Rain Design mStand. **What we checked** The recorded folded thickness, dimensions and weight, the recorded height and the three tilt angles, the recorded keyboard access, the recorded material, load capacity and laptop support, and for each of those whether the figure that would decide the purchase is actually on record. Every value carries its source and its verification state. Questions: - **How tall does the MOFT Z raise a laptop?** The recorded height is 25 cm, 10 inches, standing, with 12 cm at 25 degrees, 19.4 cm at 45 and 25 cm at 60. The mStand in the same category records one fixed height of 150 mm and records adjustable as no. - **How flat does the MOFT Z fold?** The recorded folded thickness is 1.3 cm, half an inch, and folds flat appears in the recorded feature list. The mStand records no folded thickness at all, because it is a fixed block of aluminium. - **Can you type on the laptop while using the MOFT Z?** In the lower of its recorded arrangements, yes. The recorded keyboard access line covers the riser position, where it works as a riser with an external keyboard, and the recorded description names a lap desk as well. - **How much does the MOFT Z weigh?** The recorded weight is 960 g, 33.7 oz. The mStand records 1.46 kg, 3 pounds, so the folding stand is the lighter of the two to carry. - **What size of laptop does the MOFT Z hold?** The recorded laptop support is laptops up to 16 inches, and it also works with tablets, with a recorded load capacity of up to 22 lb. The mStand records laptop support as fitting all MacBooks and most notebooks. - **Does the MOFT Z need an external keyboard?** Only in the raised position. The recorded keyboard access is that it works as a riser with an external keyboard, while the mStand records keyboard access as requiring an external keyboard in every position. ### Rain Design mStand Review: A Fixed Height Stand That Needs an External Keyboard URL: https://abackreviews.com/reviews/rain-design-mstand-review A fixed-height aluminium laptop stand with no adjustment and a recorded need for an external keyboard, reviewed from its recorded height, material and. The Rain Design mStand is a fixed-height aluminium laptop stand that raises the screen and improves airflow under the chassis. It is a simple object with a simple job, and the recorded specifications are simple too: fixed height, aluminium, no adjustment, and an external keyboard required. This review is built from the specifications recorded against the product, each with its source and a verification state that is currently partial. We have not handled this stand, so nothing here claims a stability rating, a measured height in millimetres or a durability finding. The recorded height, material, keyboard requirement and adjustment status are what this page works through. ## What raising the screen actually changes The recorded description states that the stand raises the screen and improves airflow under the chassis. Both effects follow from the same thing: the laptop is no longer lying flat with its intake against a surface. Airflow under a flat chassis is one of the reasons a laptop is lifted off the desk. A raised chassis has room to move air, and that is a structural argument rather than a marketing one. No temperature, noise or fan figure is recorded for this stand, so the size of that benefit cannot be put a number on. ## Aluminium and a fixed height The recorded material is aluminium, and the recorded feature list confirms an aluminium body. Aluminium is what gives a stand the mass to stay put with a laptop on it, which matters more than it sounds on a stand with a fixed height and no adjustment. The recorded height is Fixed height, and the recorded adjustable value is No. There is no number attached to that height in the recorded data, which is the honest limit of what can be said: the screen goes up to one specific position, and we cannot tell you how high that is in centimetres or inches. A buyer who wants to match the top of an existing monitor has to measure the raised screen themselves, because the recorded specification will not give them the figure. ## The external keyboard requirement Keyboard access is recorded as Requires an external keyboard. That is the most consequential line on the page, because it changes what the stand is for. The laptop becomes a display, and typing moves to a separate keyboard on the desk. It also rules out a category of use. A stand that raises the screen and requires an external keyboard is a desk fixture rather than a travel accessory, and it does not suit anyone who types on the laptop keyboard as their primary input. ## Who this is for The recorded audience is users who use an external keyboard and want a stable fixed-height stand. That is a specific desk, and the mStand suits it for the reasons the record shows: an aluminium body, no adjustment to fight with, and a laptop lifted clear of the desk surface. ## Where the alternatives sit No other laptop stand is recorded in the catalogue yet, so there is no direct in-category comparison to make. The nearest decision in the recorded data is the CalDigit TS4 Thunderbolt Station, because it is the other permanent desk purchase a laptop user makes. It spends the same desk space on ports, charging and displays rather than on screen height, so the two are bought side by side rather than against each other. Products covered: - CalDigit TS4 Thunderbolt Station (https://abackreviews.com/products/caldigit-ts4, competitor): The other permanent desk purchase a laptop user makes. It spends the same desk space on 18 ports, up to 98 W of charging and displays rather than on screen height, so the two decisions sit side by side. - Rain Design mStand (https://abackreviews.com/products/rain-design-mstand, subject): The subject of this review. Its recorded aluminium body, fixed height with no adjustment and its recorded requirement for an external keyboard define what the stand is for. **An aluminium body that stays put** The recorded material is aluminium, and the recorded feature list confirms an aluminium body. That mass is what keeps a stand stable with a laptop on it, particularly on a stand with a fixed height and no adjustment. **The screen goes up and the chassis breathes** The recorded description states that the stand raises the screen and improves airflow under the chassis. Lifting the laptop off the desk surface addresses both the viewing angle and the space the underside needs. **A setup with nothing to adjust** The recorded adjustable value is No and the recorded height is fixed. A stand that does not move has no angle to set and nothing to re-tighten later, so there is one position to get right rather than a setting to keep returning to. **One height, with no measurement recorded** The recorded height is Fixed height and the recorded adjustable value is No, and no figure in millimetres or inches is attached to that height. A buyer who needs the screen to line up with a monitor has nothing recorded to measure against. **The laptop keyboard is taken out of use** Keyboard access is recorded as Requires an external keyboard, which turns the laptop into a display. On its own the stand removes the ability to type on the machine it is holding, so a separate keyboard is part of the purchase. **People who already type on a separate keyboard** The recorded audience is users who use an external keyboard and want a stable fixed-height stand. For that desk, raising the screen and clearing the underside is the whole point and nothing else is needed. **People who type on the laptop itself** The recorded keyboard requirement is an external keyboard, so the stand suits a desk where typing happens elsewhere. It is the wrong object for someone who needs the laptop keyboard on the move or in a meeting. **What we checked** Whether the height can be changed, whether an external keyboard is required, what the body is made of, and whether a measurement of the raised screen height is recorded at all. Each value comes from the recorded specification and carries its source and verification state. Questions: - **Is the Rain Design mStand height adjustable?** No. The recorded height is fixed height and the recorded adjustable value is No, so the stand sets the screen at one position and cannot be raised or lowered. - **What material is the Rain Design mStand made of?** The recorded material is aluminium, and the recorded feature list confirms an aluminium body. That mass is what keeps the stand stable with a laptop resting on it. - **Do you need a separate keyboard for the Rain Design mStand?** Yes. Keyboard access is recorded as requires an external keyboard, so the laptop is used as a display and typing moves to a separate keyboard on the desk. - **What does the Rain Design mStand do for a laptop?** The recorded description states that the stand raises the screen and improves airflow under the chassis, which happens because the laptop is no longer lying flat on the desk surface. - **How tall is the Rain Design mStand?** That is not in the recorded data. The recorded height is fixed height with no measurement attached, so a buyer who wants to match the top of a monitor has to measure the raised screen themselves. ### Samsung T7 Portable SSD Review: A 72 g on the datasheet Drive With Hardware Encryption URL: https://abackreviews.com/reviews/samsung-t7-portable-ssd-review A pocket-sized portable SSD on the USB 3.2 Gen 2 interface, with hardware encryption support and capacities from 1 TB to 4 TB. The Samsung T7 Portable SSD is a pocket-sized external SSD using the USB 3.2 Gen 2 interface, with a metal body and hardware encryption support. At a recorded 72 g it is small enough to live in a laptop bag permanently, and it comes in capacities from 1 TB to 4 TB. This review is built from the specifications recorded against the product, each with its source and a verification state that is currently partial. We have not handled this drive, so nothing here claims a transfer speed in practice, a sustained write rate or a durability result. The recorded interface, capacities, encryption support and weight are what this page works through. ## The interface, and the number that is missing The recorded interface is USB 3.2 Gen 2. That is the generation of the interface. The recorded sequential figures are up to 1,050 MB/sec read and up to 1,000 MB/sec write, which are peak sequential numbers; the record holds no sustained write figure, so the figure that matters for a long copy is not one we can quote. The practical consequence is that you cannot buy this drive on speed from the recorded specification. USB 3.2 Gen 2 sets the ceiling for what the link can carry, but the drive own throughput inside that ceiling is not on record here. If the speed matters, it has to come from a source that has measured it. ## Capacities The recorded capacities are 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB. Three capacities is a useful spread, because the choice is not only about space but about how many you carry. A 1 TB drive stays in a bag as scratch space, while a 4 TB drive is the one you move between machines. The recorded weight applies across the range, so capacity is not costing anything in the pocket. ## Hardware encryption Encryption is recorded as Hardware encryption support, and hardware encryption is in the recorded feature list. Support is the word that matters, though: the recorded data does not name a standard, a management tool or a passphrase workflow. A buyer whose rules require a specific scheme cannot confirm it from what is recorded here, and should look for that detail before trusting the drive with anything they would not want to lose. ## What it is for The recorded audience is users who need fast portable storage for large files and travel frequently. The recorded weight and the metal body make that plausible, and the four capacity options cover everything from a working folder of photographs to a project library. ## Where the alternatives sit No other portable drive is recorded in the catalogue yet, so there is no direct comparison to make. The nearest decision for a buyer who travels with a laptop is the Anker 555 USB-C Hub, which adds SD and microSD readers, HDMI and 1 GbE Ethernet to the same bag, and records up to 85 W of power pass-through for the laptop while doing it. Read a card into the drive, or into the laptop directly, and the choice changes. Products covered: - Anker 555 USB-C Hub (https://abackreviews.com/products/anker-555-usb-c-hub, competitor): The other travel-sized accessory a laptop user buys for the same bag. It adds SD and microSD readers, HDMI and 1 GbE Ethernet, where the T7 adds the storage itself and its hardware encryption support. - Samsung T7 Portable SSD (https://abackreviews.com/products/samsung-t7-portable-ssd, subject): The subject of this review. Its recorded 72 g on the datasheet weight, USB 3.2 Gen 2 interface, three capacities and hardware encryption support make it the drive to consider for files that travel. **A 72 g on the datasheet drive that stays in the bag** The recorded weight is 72 g on the datasheet across the range of capacities. At that weight the drive can live permanently in a laptop bag rather than living in a drawer between uses. **Four capacities to choose from** The recorded capacities are 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB, which covers a scratch drive for photographs through to a library that moves between machines. The interface and encryption records apply across the range. **Encryption handled by the hardware** Encryption is recorded as hardware encryption support, and hardware encryption appears in the recorded feature list. Keeping the encryption work on the device rather than in software is the point of the recording. **No transfer speed is recorded** The recorded interface is USB 3.2 Gen 2, but no throughput figure in either direction is recorded for this drive, and no sustained write figure is recorded either. Speed cannot be judged from the recorded specification. **The encryption standard is not named** The recorded entry is hardware encryption support, with no standard, management tool or passphrase workflow recorded alongside it. A buyer whose compliance rules name a specific scheme cannot confirm it from the recorded data. **People who carry their files** The recorded weight of 72 g on the datasheet, the metal body and the four capacity options suit someone who moves large files between machines and wants the drive in the bag rather than on a desk. **People buying on speed** No transfer speed figure and no sustained write figure are recorded for this drive. A buyer whose decision turns on how fast it copies needs a measured source, because the recorded specification cannot answer it. **What we checked** The recorded interface, the recorded capacities, the recorded encryption support and the recorded weight, and in each case whether a figure that would decide the purchase is actually recorded. Each value carries its source and verification state. Questions: - **What interface does the Samsung T7 Portable SSD use?** The recorded interface is USB 3.2 Gen 2. No transfer speed figure is recorded for the drive in either direction, so the interface generation is the limit of what the record provides. - **What capacities does the Samsung T7 Portable SSD come in?** The recorded capacities are 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB. The recorded weight of 72 g on the datasheet applies across that range. - **Does the Samsung T7 Portable SSD support encryption?** Yes. Encryption is recorded as hardware encryption support, and hardware encryption appears in the recorded feature list. No specific standard is named in the recorded data. - **How much does the Samsung T7 Portable SSD weigh?** The recorded weight is 72 g on the datasheet, which is what allows the drive to stay in a laptop bag permanently instead of living in a drawer between uses. - **How fast is the Samsung T7 Portable SSD?** That cannot be answered from the recorded data. The interface is recorded as USB 3.2 Gen 2, but no throughput or sustained write figure is recorded for this drive. ### Samsung T7 Shield Review: A Ruggedised Drive With The Same Speeds As The T7 URL: https://abackreviews.com/reviews/samsung-t7-shield-review A ruggedised portable SSD that records an IP 65 water rating and a 3 m drop rating while keeping the same interface, speeds and capacities as the plain T7. The Samsung T7 Shield is a ruggedised portable solid state drive on the USB 3.2 Gen 2 interface, and the record is unusually specific about the two things that separate it from the plain T7: an IP 65 water rating and a drop rating of up to 3 m. Everything else about the Shield, the interface, the capacities, the encryption and the speed figures, is recorded the same way as the drive it is built on. This review works from the specifications recorded against the product, each of which carries the manufacturer page it was read from. Nothing here describes how the drive behaves in use, because no drive was handled for this page. ## What the two ratings cover The recorded water resistance is IP 65 and the recorded drop resistance is up to 3 m. The plain Samsung T7 in the catalogue records a drop resistance of up to 2 m and no water rating at all, so the Shield is the only drive in the catalogue with a water rating recorded against it. IP 65 is a rating code rather than a promise of submersion, and the record adds nothing to it. There is no recorded immersion time, no recorded cap or seal specification and no recorded statement about what happens to the drive after it has been in water. What the record says is that the drive carries an IP 65 water resistance rating, and that is the claim this page can support. ## The interface and the speeds do not change The recorded interface is USB 3.2 Gen 2 at 10 Gbps, the recorded read speed is up to 1,050 MB/sec and the recorded write speed is up to 1,000 MB/sec. The plain T7 records the same interface and the same two speed figures. The recorded capacities are 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB, and the plain T7 records the same three capacities. That is the practical point of the Shield. The protection is added to the drive rather than subtracted from it, so a buyer choosing between the two is choosing between two bodies rather than between two speeds. Both speed figures are recorded as peaks, and no sustained transfer rate is recorded for either drive. ## Encryption, warranty and the platform list Encryption is recorded as AES 256-bit hardware encryption, and hardware encryption is in the recorded feature list. A named standard is more than the catalogue holds for most recorded encryption, and it is the same encryption recorded for the plain T7. The recorded warranty is three years, limited, which is again the figure recorded for the plain T7. The recorded operating systems are Windows 7 or later, macOS 10.10 or later and Android Lollipop or later, so the drive is recorded as usable on a phone or tablet as well as on a laptop or a desktop. ## What it costs to carry The recorded weight is 98 g and the recorded dimensions are 59 by 88 by 13 mm. The plain T7 records 85 by 57 by 8 mm, so the Shield is both thicker and slightly taller and wider than the drive it is based on. Its recorded weight entry for the plain T7 is marked as conflicting in the catalogue, with 72 g on the datasheet and 2.0 oz on the product page, so the gap in weight is close to 26 g without being an exact figure. Whether that matters depends on where the drive lives. A drive that sits on a desk between a laptop and a monitor is carrying its own ruggedisation for nothing. A drive that goes into a tool bag, a van, a field kit or a jacket pocket is carrying exactly what it was specified for. ## Where the record stops No price is recorded for the Shield or for the plain T7. No sustained write figure, no endurance rating in terabytes written and no figure for how the drive behaves at temperature are recorded. The peak speed figures and the IP 65 code are the whole of the performance and protection story in the catalogue, and a buyer whose decision turns on either of those needs a source that has measured it. Products covered: - Samsung T7 Portable SSD (https://abackreviews.com/products/samsung-t7-portable-ssd, competitor): The drive the Shield is based on. It records the same interface, speeds, capacities and encryption, but a 2 m drop resistance, no water rating and a flatter 85 by 57 by 8 mm body. - Samsung T7 Shield (https://abackreviews.com/products/samsung-t7-shield, subject): The subject of this review. Its recorded IP 65 water resistance, 3 m drop resistance, 98 g weight and all-metal 59 by 88 by 13 mm body are what separate it from the plain T7. **A drive rated for water and a three metre drop** The recorded water resistance is IP 65 and the recorded drop resistance is up to 3 m, against a recorded 2 m drop rating on the plain T7 and no recorded water rating at all. Those two entries are the reason the ruggedised version exists. **The same interface, speeds and capacities as the plain T7** The recorded interface is USB 3.2 Gen 2 at 10 Gbps, the recorded read speed is up to 1,050 MB/sec, the recorded write speed is up to 1,000 MB/sec and the recorded capacities are 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB. The plain T7 records the same values, so the protection costs nothing in the recorded specification. **Named encryption and a three year warranty** Encryption is recorded as AES 256-bit hardware encryption, and hardware encryption is in the recorded feature list. The recorded warranty is three years, limited, and the recorded operating systems cover Windows 7 or later, macOS 10.10 or later and Android Lollipop or later. **The extra protection adds size and weight** The recorded weight is 98 g against the plain T7's conflicting record of 72 g on the datasheet and 2.0 oz on the product page, and the recorded dimensions are 59 by 88 by 13 mm against 85 by 57 by 8 mm. The Shield is the larger and heavier object of the two. **The rating is a code and the speeds are peaks** The water resistance is recorded as the code IP 65, with no recorded immersion time, cap or seal detail, and the read and write speeds are recorded as up to figures with no sustained rate. What the catalogue holds is a specification, not a measured result. **People who carry drives where drops and water are likely** The recorded IP 65 water rating and 3 m drop rating, with 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB capacities and AES 256-bit hardware encryption, are the combination that suits a site, a van, a field kit or a trip where the drive is handled roughly. **People who want the smallest, lightest drive in the bag** At a recorded 98 g and 59 by 88 by 13 mm the Shield is larger and heavier than the plain T7, and it records the same interface, the same peak speeds and the same capacities. A drive that lives on a desk gains nothing from the ratings. **What we checked** The recorded water resistance and drop resistance, the recorded interface and the two speed figures, the recorded capacities, the recorded encryption and warranty, the recorded weight and dimensions, and for each of those whether the figure that would decide the purchase is actually on record. Every value carries its source and its verification state. Questions: - **Is the Samsung T7 Shield waterproof?** The recorded water resistance for the Samsung T7 Shield is IP 65. That is the rating the manufacturer states, and the catalogue adds no immersion time, no seal detail and no statement about standing water. - **How far can the T7 Shield be dropped?** The recorded drop resistance is up to 3 m. The plain Samsung T7 in the catalogue records a drop resistance of up to 2 m and no water resistance rating at all. - **Is the T7 Shield as fast as the Samsung T7?** Yes on the record. Both drives record the USB 3.2 Gen 2 interface at 10 Gbps, a read speed of up to 1,050 MB/sec and a write speed of up to 1,000 MB/sec, and both of those figures are peaks rather than sustained rates. - **Does the T7 Shield have encryption?** Yes. Encryption is recorded as AES 256-bit hardware encryption, and hardware encryption appears in the recorded feature list for this drive. - **How much does the T7 Shield weigh?** The recorded weight is 98 g. The plain T7's recorded weight is marked as conflicting in the catalogue, with 72 g on the datasheet and 2.0 oz on the product page. - **Which operating systems does the T7 Shield support?** The recorded operating systems are Windows 7 or later, macOS 10.10 or later and Android Lollipop or later, so the drive is recorded as usable on a phone as well as on a computer. ### Shure MV7 Review: A Dynamic Microphone That Can Move to XLR Later URL: https://abackreviews.com/reviews/shure-mv7-review A dynamic cardioid microphone that records both USB and XLR connections and built-in headphone monitoring, reviewed from the recorded element type. The Shure MV7 is a hybrid USB and XLR dynamic microphone with cardioid pickup and built-in headphone monitoring. Two things make it distinctive in this catalogue: the element type is dynamic rather than condenser, and the same body can be connected over USB now or XLR later. This review is built from the specifications recorded against the product, each with its source and a verification state that is currently partial. We have not handled this microphone, so there is no claim here about self noise, output level or a measured frequency response. The recorded element, pattern, connections and monitoring are what this page works through. ## Dynamic, and why it matters in a real room The recorded element type is Dynamic. A dynamic element responds less to room reflections than a condenser does, which is why the recorded audience for this microphone is people who want a forgiving microphone, and why a dynamic is the more sensible default for an untreated room. The trade is sensitivity. Dynamic elements generally need more input gain than condensers for the same source level, and there is no recorded gain or sensitivity figure for this microphone, so we cannot put a number on that difference. It is the reason the element type is a judgement call rather than a ranking. ## One pattern The recorded pickup pattern is Cardioid (unidirectional). That is a well defined behaviour: the microphone listens in front of itself and rejects most of what arrives from behind it, which suits a desk setup where the room behind you is the problem. It is also a single pattern. The Blue Yeti records four of them, so a buyer who needs to switch between front-facing and room-facing capture is looking at a different microphone. ## USB and XLR in one body The recorded connection is USB and XLR, and XLR output is in the recorded feature list. This is the MV7 clearest practical advantage over the Blue Yeti, whose recorded connection is USB only. You can start with a USB connection and no interface, and when you need preamps, gain control and a proper signal chain, the same microphone moves across with an XLR cable. Headphone monitoring is recorded as Yes, built-in, and it appears in the recorded feature list too, so you hear yourself while speaking in either setup. ## Who this is for The MV7 suits someone who records in a room they have not treated, who wants one microphone that works today over USB and works tomorrow over XLR, and who wants to hear themselves while they speak. It is a poor fit for a buyer who needs to change pickup patterns, or who wants the sensitivity of a condenser element for a quiet source in a treated room. ## Where the alternative sits The Blue Yeti is the alternative: a condenser with cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo patterns, a USB connection, built-in headphone monitoring and an integrated stand. Choose the Yeti when the pattern is the point. Choose the MV7 when the room and the future interface are. Products covered: - Blue Yeti (https://abackreviews.com/products/blue-yeti, competitor): A condenser microphone with cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo patterns over USB only. It wins on selectable patterns and loses on the option of moving to an interface later. - Shure MV7 (https://abackreviews.com/products/shure-mv7, subject): The subject of this review. Its recorded dynamic element, USB and XLR connections and built-in headphone monitoring make it the microphone to consider when a room is untreated or the interface is still to come. **USB and XLR in one body** The recorded connection is USB and XLR, and XLR output appears in the recorded feature list. The microphone works over USB with nothing else in the chain, then moves to an interface with the same body and a different cable. **A dynamic element for untreated rooms** The recorded element type is Dynamic, which responds less to room reflections than a condenser. The recorded audience is users who want a forgiving microphone, and the element type is why that wording exists. **Built-in headphone monitoring** Headphone monitoring is recorded as Yes, built-in and appears in the recorded feature list. You hear yourself while speaking in both the USB and the XLR setup, which is what makes the levels manageable. **One pickup pattern and no switch** The recorded pickup pattern is cardioid, unidirectional, and no switchable pattern entry appears in the recorded feature list. A buyer who needs to capture a room or a second speaker from the other side has no recorded option on this microphone. **No recorded gain or sensitivity figure** No sensitivity, gain or self-noise figure is recorded for this microphone. Dynamic elements generally need more input gain than condensers, and without a recorded figure that difference cannot be quantified here. **People who want one microphone for now and later** The recorded USB and XLR connections suit a buyer who starts with a laptop and no interface, and who will add real gain control later without replacing the microphone they have learned to use. **People who need to change the pickup pattern** Only cardioid is recorded for this microphone. If the recording has to move between a front-facing voice, a two-person table and a room, the pattern is the thing to buy on, and it is not recorded here. **What we checked** The recorded element type, the recorded pickup pattern, the recorded connection options and whether headphone monitoring is built in. Each value comes from the recorded specification and carries its source and verification state. Questions: - **What type of microphone is the Shure MV7?** The recorded element type is Dynamic, not condenser. A dynamic element responds less to room reflections, which suits a room that has not been treated. - **What pickup pattern does the Shure MV7 use?** The recorded pickup pattern is cardioid, unidirectional. The microphone listens in front of itself and rejects most of what arrives from behind it. - **How does the Shure MV7 connect to a computer?** The recorded connection is USB and XLR, and XLR output appears in the recorded feature list. It works over USB with no interface, and later moves to one over XLR. - **Does the Shure MV7 have headphone monitoring?** Yes. Headphone monitoring is recorded as Yes, built-in, and it also appears in the recorded feature list. - **Can you change the pickup pattern on the Shure MV7?** No pattern switch is recorded. Only cardioid is recorded for this microphone, and no switchable pickup patterns entry appears in its recorded feature list. ## Comparisons ### Anker 555 USB-C Hub vs CalDigit TS4: A Portable Hub Or A Powered Desk Dock? URL: https://abackreviews.com/comparisons/anker-555-vs-caldigit-ts4 A bus-powered 8-in-1 hub at 125 g against a powered Thunderbolt 4 dock at 0.64 kg, compared on the recorded ports, Ethernet, charging and power source. A hub and a dock solve the same problem for a laptop that has too few ports, and they solve it in ways that do not overlap. The Anker 555 is a bus-powered 8-in-1 USB-C hub providing HDMI, Ethernet, SD and microSD readers, USB-A and USB-C data ports and pass-through power delivery. The CalDigit TS4 is a Thunderbolt 4 dock with 18 ports, up to 98 W of laptop charging, 2.5 GbE Ethernet and an external power supply. The difference that matters first is not the port count. It is where the device lives. The Anker is bus-powered, which means it draws what it needs from the laptop it is plugged into and travels in the same bag. The TS4 needs an external power supply, which means it stays on the desk. Almost every other recorded difference follows from that one. Every value here comes from the specifications recorded against each product, and each carries the manufacturer page it was read from. Nothing was measured for this page, so there are no claims about transfer speeds in practice, heat, or how many displays a particular laptop will actually drive. ## What actually differs **Power source.** The TS4 records an external power supply, and powered dock appears in its recorded feature list. The Anker's recorded description calls it bus-powered. A bus-powered hub competes with the laptop for charge, because the laptop's own charger is already dividing power between the screen, the processor and the battery. A dock with its own supply does not. **Ports.** The Anker records 8-in-1, which its description expands to HDMI, Ethernet, SD and microSD readers, USB-A and USB-C data ports and pass-through power delivery. The TS4 records 18 ports, and its recorded USB ports specification lists 3 Thunderbolt 4 at 40 Gb/s, 3 USB-C and 5 USB-A at 10 Gb/s. Port count on its own says little about which ports are present, and the gap between eight and eighteen is the gap between a travel kit and a desk. **Display output.** The Anker records one HDMI port and states that the hub carries no display over the USB-C ports, and its recorded HDMI output is up to 4K at 30 Hz while the product page lists 4K at 60 Hz, a point the catalogue records as conflicting. The TS4 records up to 8K on one display on compatible Windows computers, up to 6K on macOS, and dual 6K on Apple M1 Pro and M1 Max, with multiple display support in its recorded feature list. **Ethernet and data speed.** The Anker records 1 GbE Ethernet with wired Ethernet in its recorded feature list, and a recorded USB data speed of up to 10 Gbps across the USB-C and USB-A data ports. The TS4 records 2.5 GbE Ethernet and the faster Thunderbolt 4 links above. Both handle ordinary office traffic; the difference matters when large files move across the network. **Laptop charging and card readers.** The Anker records power delivery pass-through of up to 85 W input, with the recorded note that the laptop charging wattage depends on the hub draw, and a recorded card reader of SD and microSD at UHS-I. The TS4 records laptop charging of up to 98 W and recorded card readers of SD 4.0 and microSD 4.0 at UHS-II. The two charging figures are not directly comparable, because the Anker's number describes an input ceiling and the TS4's describes delivered charging, but a laptop with a larger charger is better served by the dock. **Size.** The Anker records 121 by 55 by 15.3 mm and a weight of 4.4 oz, 125 g. The TS4 records 141 by 42 by 113 mm and a weight of 0.64 kg. That is the difference between an accessory and a piece of desk furniture. ## Who should pick which Choose the Anker 555 if the laptop travels with you, the set of ports you need is small and known, and you would rather not carry a power brick. Its recorded card reader, its recorded 1 GbE Ethernet and its single recorded HDMI port cover a travelling setup. Choose the CalDigit TS4 if the laptop lives on one desk, the port count is a daily problem, and you want the dock to charge the laptop at the recorded 98 W while also carrying the recorded 2.5 GbE Ethernet, the recorded Thunderbolt 4 ports and the recorded multiple display support. It is a permanent fixture and should be chosen as one. ## What this comparison does not settle It does not settle price, because no price is recorded for either product. It does not settle how many external displays either one will drive with a specific laptop, because that depends on the laptop. It does not settle the Anker's HDMI output, because the catalogue records 4K at 30 Hz against a product page listing 4K at 60 Hz as a conflict. It settles power source, port count, recorded Ethernet speed, recorded charging figures and recorded size, which is enough to decide whether the purchase is a travel accessory or a desk fixture. Products covered: - Anker 555 USB-C Hub (https://abackreviews.com/products/anker-555-usb-c-hub, subject): The subject of this comparison. Its recorded bus-powered 8-in-1 port list, 1 GbE Ethernet, 85 W pass-through input and 125 g weight mark it as the portable option, where the TS4 records an external power supply. - CalDigit TS4 Thunderbolt Station (https://abackreviews.com/products/caldigit-ts4, competitor): The desk dock. Its recorded Thunderbolt 4 protocol, 18 ports, 2.5 GbE Ethernet, up to 98 W of laptop charging, multiple display support and 0.64 kg weight mark it as the permanently installed option. **Where the device lives: bus powered against an external power supply** The Anker 555's recorded description calls it bus-powered, and the TS4 records an external power supply with powered dock in its recorded feature list. A bus-powered hub competes with the laptop for charge, a dock with its own supply does not, and that difference decides where each one belongs. **Ports: 8-in-1 against 18** The Anker records 8-in-1, which its description expands to HDMI, Ethernet, SD and microSD readers, USB-A and USB-C data ports and pass-through power delivery. The TS4 records 18 ports, including 3 Thunderbolt 4 at 40 Gb/s, 3 USB-C and 5 USB-A at 10 Gbps. The count alone says little, but the gap between eight and eighteen is real. **Display output: one HDMI port against multiple display support** The Anker records one HDMI port and states that it carries no display over the USB-C ports, and its recorded HDMI output is conflicting: up to 4K at 30 Hz while the product page lists 4K at 60 Hz. The TS4 records up to 8K on one display on compatible Windows computers, up to 6K on macOS and dual 6K on Apple M1 Pro and M1 Max. **Ethernet: 1 GbE against 2.5 GbE** Both record wired Ethernet. The Anker records 1 GbE and a USB data speed of up to 10 Gbps across its USB-C and USB-A data ports. The TS4 records 2.5 GbE and 3 Thunderbolt 4 links at 40 Gb/s. Both handle ordinary office traffic; the difference matters when large files cross the network. **Charging: up to 85 W of pass-through input against up to 98 W of laptop charging** The Anker records power delivery pass-through of up to 85 W input, with the recorded note that the laptop charging wattage depends on the hub draw. The TS4 records laptop charging of up to 98 W. The figures are not directly comparable, because one describes an input ceiling and the other a delivered output. **Size: 125 g against 0.64 kg** The Anker records 121 by 55 by 15.3 mm and a weight of 4.4 oz, 125 g. The TS4 records 141 by 42 by 113 mm and a weight of 0.64 kg. That is the difference between an accessory and a piece of desk furniture. **What bus power costs** Recorded bus power is what lets the hub travel in a laptop bag, and the recorded 8-in-1 list covers the accessories a thin laptop is most often missing. The cost is a shared bandwidth ceiling, a single recorded HDMI port, and a pass-through charging figure that depends on what else the hub is drawing. **What an external power supply costs** The recorded external power supply is what makes 18 ports, up to 98 W of laptop charging, 2.5 GbE Ethernet and multiple display support possible at the same time. The cost is that the dock stays on one desk, since it needs a cable to a wall and a place to be plugged in. **People who travel with the laptop** The recorded bus-powered 8-in-1 design, the recorded SD and microSD card reader, the recorded 1 GbE Ethernet and a single recorded HDMI port cover a travelling setup without a power brick. **People building one permanent desk** The recorded 18 ports, Thunderbolt 4 protocol, 2.5 GbE Ethernet, recorded multiple display support and up to 98 W of laptop charging cover a docked desk where the laptop is used as a workstation. **People who need more than eight connections at once** The recorded 8-in-1 list and the recorded bus power are the limits here. A desk that needs more connections, more Ethernet speed than 1 GbE, or the recorded multiple display support of a dock is better served by the TS4. **People who want a device that travels** The recorded external power supply and the recorded 0.64 kg weight mean the dock stays put. A buyer who wants one accessory to work in a bag, in a cafe and at a desk is better served by the recorded bus-powered hub. **What this comparison settles** It settles the recorded power source, port count, recorded HDMI and display support, recorded Ethernet speed, recorded charging figures, recorded size and recorded card readers of both devices. It does not settle price, availability, how many displays a particular laptop will drive, or the Anker's HDMI output, because the catalogue records that as conflicting. What it does settle is whether the purchase is a travel accessory or a desk fixture. Questions: - **How many ports does the Anker 555 have?** The recorded port list is 8-in-1, which its description expands to HDMI, Ethernet, SD and microSD readers, USB-A and USB-C data ports and pass-through power delivery. - **Does the Anker 555 need a power adapter?** No. Its recorded description calls it bus-powered, so it draws what it needs from the laptop it is plugged into and travels in the same bag as the laptop. - **How many ports does the CalDigit TS4 have?** The recorded port count is 18 ports, and the recorded USB ports specification breaks them down as 3 Thunderbolt 4 at 40 Gb/s, 3 USB-C and 5 USB-A at 10 Gb/s. - **Does the CalDigit TS4 need a power supply?** Yes. The recorded power source is an external power supply, and powered dock appears in its recorded feature list. - **How fast is the Ethernet on each device?** The CalDigit TS4 records 2.5 GbE Ethernet. The Anker 555 records 1 GbE. Both are wired connections, and the difference matters when large files move across the network. - **How much power does the CalDigit TS4 send to a laptop?** Up to 98 W. That is the recorded laptop charging figure, and it is the reason the dock records an external power supply. ### CalDigit TS3 Plus vs TS4: Thunderbolt 3 Or Thunderbolt 4? URL: https://abackreviews.com/comparisons/caldigit-ts3-plus-vs-caldigit-ts4 Two CalDigit desk docks: Thunderbolt 3 at 15 ports, 87 W and 1 GbE against Thunderbolt 4 at 18 ports, 98 W and 2.5 GbE Ethernet. Two CalDigit desk docks, two Thunderbolt generations, and one decision that comes down to which laptop is on the desk. The TS3 Plus records the Thunderbolt 3 protocol, 15 ports, up to 87 W of laptop charging and 1 GbE Ethernet. The TS4 records Thunderbolt 4, 18 ports, up to 98 W of laptop charging and 2.5 GbE Ethernet. Every value here comes from the specifications recorded against each product, and each carries the manufacturer page it was read from. Neither dock was connected for this comparison, so nothing here describes how either behaves with a particular machine. ## What actually differs **Protocol.** Thunderbolt 3 against Thunderbolt 4. The TS4's recorded USB ports include 3 Thunderbolt 4 at 40 Gb/s, 3 USB-C and 5 USB-A at 10 Gb/s, where the TS3 Plus records 5 USB-A at 5 Gb/s, 1 USB-C at 10 Gb/s at the rear and 1 USB-C at 5 Gb/s at the front. **Ports and card readers.** Fifteen against eighteen. The TS3 Plus records SD 4.0 UHS-II card readers at up to 312 MB/s, and the TS4 records SD 4.0 and microSD 4.0 UHS-II, so the microSD slot is the practical difference in the card readers. **Charging.** Up to 87 W against up to 98 W. Both record an external power supply as the power source, and the TS3 Plus records a 180 W adapter where the TS4's record gives no adapter figure. The TS4 also records a two year warranty, where no warranty is recorded for the TS3 Plus. **Ethernet.** 1 GbE against 2.5 GbE. That is the difference between a gigabit network and a 2.5 gigabit one, and it only matters if the network and the laptop support it. **Displays.** The TS3 Plus records two displays at up to 4K 60 Hz each, or one display at up to 5K 60 Hz over Thunderbolt. The TS4 records up to 8K on one display on compatible Windows computers, up to 6K on macOS and dual 6K on Apple M1 Pro and M1 Max. There is a condition on the TS3 Plus's two-display figure that the manufacturer states. Apple M1 and M2 laptops support only one external display through their Thunderbolt port, while M1 Pro and M1 Max support two. On a base M1 or M2 Mac the two-display capability of the Thunderbolt 3 dock is not available, whatever the dock itself can do. **Size and weight.** The TS3 Plus records 131 by 40 by 98.44 mm and 0.47 kg. The TS4 records 141 by 42 by 113 mm and 0.64 kg. ## Who should pick which The TS3 Plus is the choice for a buyer with a Thunderbolt 3 laptop who wants 15 ports, up to 87 W of charging, a card reader and two displays, and who would rather have the smaller and lighter box at 0.47 kg. The TS4 is the choice for a buyer who needs the Thunderbolt 4 protocol, 2.5 GbE Ethernet, a microSD slot, more charging headroom or the higher recorded display resolutions, and it is the one whose recorded display figures are not limited to two 4K displays. ## What this comparison does not settle It does not settle price, because no price is recorded for either dock. It does not settle compatibility between a Thunderbolt 3 dock and a Thunderbolt 4 host, because the catalogue holds no compatibility statement of any kind. It does not settle how the 87 W and 98 W charging figures divide when the docks' own ports are drawing power, nor how the card readers perform over sustained transfers. It does not settle availability. What it does settle is the protocol, the port count, the charging figure, the Ethernet speed, the display support, the card readers and the recorded weight and dimensions on each side. Products covered: - CalDigit TS3 Plus (https://abackreviews.com/products/caldigit-ts3-plus, subject): The subject of this comparison. Its recorded Thunderbolt 3 protocol, 15 ports, up to 87 W of charging, 1 GbE Ethernet and 0.47 kg weight mark it as the earlier generation dock. - CalDigit TS4 Thunderbolt Station (https://abackreviews.com/products/caldigit-ts4, competitor): The later dock from the same manufacturer. It records Thunderbolt 4, 18 ports, up to 98 W of charging, 2.5 GbE Ethernet, a microSD slot and dual 6K on Apple M1 Pro and M1 Max. **Protocol and bandwidth: Thunderbolt 3 against Thunderbolt 4** The TS3 Plus records the protocol Thunderbolt 3 and the TS4 records Thunderbolt 4. The TS4's recorded USB ports include 3 Thunderbolt 4 at 40 Gb/s, 3 USB-C and 5 USB-A at 10 Gb/s, where the TS3 Plus records 5 USB-A at 5 Gb/s, 1 USB-C at 10 Gb/s at the rear and 1 USB-C at 5 Gb/s at the front. **Ports and card readers: 15 ports and SD against 18 ports and SD with microSD** The recorded port counts are fifteen and eighteen. The TS3 Plus records SD 4.0 UHS-II card readers at up to 312 MB/s, and the TS4 records SD 4.0 and microSD 4.0 UHS-II, so the extra card format is the practical difference inside the card readers. **Charging: up to 87 W against up to 98 W** The recorded laptop charging is up to 87 W for the TS3 Plus and up to 98 W for the TS4. Both record an external power supply as the power source, and the TS3 Plus records a 180 W adapter where the TS4's record gives no adapter figure. **Ethernet: 1 GbE against 2.5 GbE** The recorded Ethernet is 1 GbE for the TS3 Plus and 2.5 GbE for the TS4. That is the difference between a gigabit network and a 2.5 gigabit one, and it only matters where the network and the laptop support the faster link. **Displays: two 4K 60 Hz against up to 8K on Windows and dual 6K on M1 Pro and M1 Max** The TS3 Plus records two displays at up to 4K 60 Hz each, or one display at up to 5K 60 Hz over Thunderbolt. The TS4 records up to 8K on one display on compatible Windows computers, up to 6K on macOS and dual 6K on Apple M1 Pro and M1 Max. The manufacturer also states that Apple M1 and M2 laptops accept only one external display through their Thunderbolt port. **Size and weight: 0.47 kg against 0.64 kg** The TS3 Plus records 131 by 40 by 98.44 mm and 0.47 kg. The TS4 records 141 by 42 by 113 mm and 0.64 kg, so the older dock is the smaller and lighter box of the two on the recorded figures. **What the Thunderbolt 3 dock gives up** The recorded protocol is the older generation, with 1 GbE Ethernet against 2.5 GbE, up to 87 W of charging against 98 W, an SD slot without microSD, and displays capped at two 4K 60 Hz. In return it records the smaller 0.47 kg body and fifteen ports. **What the Thunderbolt 4 dock gives up** The recorded 0.64 kg weight and the larger 141 by 42 by 113 mm body are what the TS4 gives up. In return it records the newer protocol, three Thunderbolt 4 ports at 40 Gb/s, 2.5 GbE Ethernet, a microSD slot, up to 98 W of charging and a two year warranty. **People with a Thunderbolt 3 laptop who want the smaller box** The recorded fifteen ports, the recorded up to 87 W of laptop charging, the recorded SD 4.0 UHS-II card reader and the recorded 131 by 40 by 98.44 mm body at 0.47 kg match the recorded audience of a desk dock for a Thunderbolt 3 machine. **People who need the newer protocol and a faster network** The recorded Thunderbolt 4 protocol, the recorded 2.5 GbE Ethernet, the recorded microSD slot and the recorded up to 98 W of charging suit a buyer whose laptop and network are both newer than the Thunderbolt 3 generation. **People who need Thunderbolt 4 bandwidth or a 2.5 GbE network** The recorded protocol is Thunderbolt 3, the recorded Ethernet is 1 GbE and the recorded display support stops at two 4K 60 Hz displays, so a buyer who needs the newer protocol or the faster network link is looking at the other dock. **People who want the lighter, smaller desk box** At a recorded 0.64 kg and 141 by 42 by 113 mm the TS4 is the larger and heavier of the two, and the recorded price is not held for either dock, so size and weight are what a buyer on a small desk can judge. **What this comparison settles** It settles the recorded protocol, port count, laptop charging, Ethernet, display support, card readers, weight and dimensions on each side, along with the manufacturer's condition on Apple M1 and M2 laptops. It does not settle price, availability, compatibility between a Thunderbolt 3 dock and a Thunderbolt 4 host, or how the charging figures divide under load. Questions: - **Is the CalDigit TS3 Plus Thunderbolt 4?** No. Its recorded protocol is Thunderbolt 3, while the TS4 records Thunderbolt 4, and the catalogue holds no compatibility statement between the two protocols. - **How many displays can the TS3 Plus drive?** The recorded display support is two displays at up to 4K 60 Hz each, or one display at up to 5K 60 Hz over Thunderbolt, with the manufacturer's condition that Apple M1 and M2 laptops accept only one external display through the Thunderbolt port. - **Which CalDigit dock has faster Ethernet?** The TS4, at a recorded 2.5 GbE against the 1 GbE recorded for the TS3 Plus. - **Does the TS4 have a microSD slot?** Yes. The recorded card readers are SD 4.0 and microSD 4.0 UHS-II, where the TS3 Plus records SD 4.0 UHS-II at up to 312 MB/s and no microSD slot. - **How much power does each dock charge a laptop with?** Up to 87 W for the TS3 Plus and up to 98 W for the TS4, both recorded against an external power supply, with a 180 W adapter recorded for the TS3 Plus. - **Which dock is heavier?** The TS4, at a recorded 0.64 kg against the TS3 Plus's recorded 0.47 kg and dimensions of 141 by 42 by 113 mm against 131 by 40 by 98.44 mm. ### Elgato Facecam vs Logitech Brio 4K: A Discontinued 1080p Camera Or A 4K Autofocus One? URL: https://abackreviews.com/comparisons/elgato-facecam-vs-logitech-brio-4k A discontinued 1080p camera kept for reference against a 4K camera with autofocus, infrared sign-in support and a built-in microphone. The Elgato Facecam and the Logitech Brio 4K are both premium webcams, and both were sold to people who had outgrown a laptop camera. One of them is no longer sold. The Facecam's recorded product status is discontinued by the manufacturer, so it stays in this catalogue as a reference rather than as something to buy, and the decision in this comparison is now what the Brio 4K records that the Facecam does not. The recorded decisive difference is focus behaviour. The Facecam records a fixed focus prime lens and software control over exposure and field of view. The Brio records autofocus, an adjustable field of view and infrared support for platform authentication. Neither can be judged from a specification list alone, so this page sets out what is recorded and what that does and does not tell a buyer. Every value here comes from the specifications recorded against each product, with the manufacturer page it was read from. No camera was measured for this comparison, so there is no claim about image quality, autofocus behaviour in a dim room, or how either camera handles a moving subject. ## What actually differs **Product status.** The Facecam records its product status as discontinued by the manufacturer, and that note appears in its recorded feature list beside manual exposure control and the absence of a built-in microphone. The Brio records no such note and is the camera currently covered for purchase. This is the first difference, and it is a different kind of difference from the ones below. **Resolution.** The Facecam records 1080p at 60 fps. The Brio records up to 4K at 30 fps and 1080p at 60 fps. The higher ceiling sits with the Brio, and both cameras can run the same 1080p at 60 fps, which is the mode most streaming and calling software is delivered in. **Focus.** The Facecam records its lens as a fixed focus prime. The Brio records autofocus. A fixed lens suits a camera that stays in one position pointed at one seated person. Autofocus is the more forgiving arrangement when the camera moves or when more than one person is in frame. **Field of view.** Both cameras record an adjustable field of view, with the Facecam specifying adjustable in software. The Facecam records a field of view angle of 82 degrees diagonal, while the Brio records 90, 78 or 65 degrees across three presets. **Infrared support.** The Brio records infrared support as yes, and infrared authentication support appears in its recorded feature list, which is what allows Windows Hello style sign-in to use the camera. The Facecam records no infrared value at all, so it takes no part in that kind of authentication. **Built-in microphone.** The Facecam records its built-in microphone as no, and the Brio records a dual omni-directional microphone with a range of up to 1.2 m. For a camera bought to replace a laptop camera, that difference can decide the purchase on its own. **Mounting.** The Facecam records a monitor mount and a tripod thread, and a size of 58 by 80 by 48 mm without the mount. The Brio records no mounting value, so nothing can be said from the recorded data about how it attaches. ## Who should pick which If you are buying a webcam today, the Facecam is not the answer, because its recorded product status is discontinued. The Brio 4K is the camera in this comparison that is currently covered, and its recorded autofocus, its recorded infrared support and its recorded built-in microphone are the reasons to look at it. The Facecam still earns a place here because its recorded specifications explain what manual control looked like in a camera at this price, and that is the standard the Brio is measured against. Its recorded manual exposure control and software adjustable field of view are worth understanding before buying a camera that decides exposure for you. ## What this comparison does not settle It does not settle price, because no price is recorded for either camera. It does not settle image quality, low light performance, or how reliable the autofocus is, because no camera was measured and no such record exists. It settles resolution, focus, field of view, infrared support, the built-in microphone, mounting and product status, which is enough to separate a discontinued 1080p camera recorded for reference from a 4K camera with autofocus that is still sold. Products covered: - Elgato Facecam (https://abackreviews.com/products/elgato-facecam, subject): The subject of this comparison. Its recorded 1080p at 60 fps capture, fixed focus prime lens, software adjustable field of view and manual exposure control are the values the Brio is measured against, and its recorded product status is discontinued. - Logitech Brio 4K (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-brio-4k, competitor): The alternative. Its recorded up to 4K at 30 fps capture, autofocus, adjustable field of view, infrared support for platform authentication and a built-in microphone are the values it puts against the Facecam's fixed lens and recorded discontinuation. **Product status: discontinued against still sold** The Facecam records its product status as discontinued by the manufacturer, and that note sits in its recorded feature list beside manual exposure control and the absence of a built-in microphone. The Brio records no such note, so it is the camera in this comparison that is still covered for purchase. **Focus: a fixed prime lens against recorded autofocus** The Facecam records its lens as a fixed focus prime, so the focus plane does not move. The Brio records autofocus. A camera that stays in one place facing one person suits a fixed arrangement, while autofocus suits a camera that gets moved or shared. **Resolution: 1080p at 60 fps against up to 4K at 30 fps** The Facecam records 1080p at 60 fps. The Brio records up to 4K at 30 fps and 1080p at 60 fps, so the higher ceiling sits with the Brio while both can run the same 1080p mode. **Infrared support: recorded on the Brio only** The Brio records infrared support as yes, and infrared authentication support appears in its recorded feature list, which is what allows Windows Hello style sign-in to use the camera. The Facecam records no infrared value, so it takes no part in that authentication. **Built-in microphone: none recorded against a dual omni-directional pair** The Facecam records its built-in microphone as no. The Brio records a dual omni-directional built-in microphone with a range of up to 1.2 m. For a camera bought to replace a laptop camera, that difference can decide the purchase on its own. **Field of view: 82 degrees diagonal against three presets** Both cameras record an adjustable field of view, with the Facecam specifying adjustable in software. The Facecam records a field of view angle of 82 degrees diagonal, and the Brio records 90, 78 or 65 degrees across three presets. **What a fixed focus lens costs** A fixed focus prime is simple and repeatable when the camera does not move, and the recorded manual exposure control means the frame can be set once and left alone. The cost is that the recorded absence of a built-in microphone leaves audio to another device, and the recorded product status ends the purchase question entirely. **What autofocus and infrared cost** The recorded autofocus, the recorded up to 4K at 30 fps mode and the recorded infrared support are the reasons to pay more, and the recorded built-in microphone removes a second device from the desk. The cost is that the Facecam records manual exposure control and a field of view adjustable in software, which is what a user who wants to set the frame themselves would be giving up. **Readers comparing what manual control was worth** The recorded manual exposure control, the recorded software adjustable field of view and the recorded 82 degree diagonal angle are worth understanding before buying a camera that sets exposure for you, and the recorded monitor mount and tripod thread cover the two positions most setups want. **People who need 4K, autofocus or infrared sign-in** Each of the three recorded capabilities is a reason on its own: the up to 4K at 30 fps mode for capture, autofocus for a camera that moves, and recorded infrared support for Windows Hello style sign-in. The recorded built-in microphone is a fourth. **Anyone buying a webcam today** The recorded product status is discontinued by the manufacturer, so this camera is not a purchase. It is a reference record of what manual control looked like, and it should be read as one. **People who want manual exposure control** The Brio records no manual exposure feature, so a user who wants to set exposure themselves rather than let the camera decide has nothing recorded to work with. Its recorded autofocus is the more hands-off arrangement. **What this comparison settles** It settles the recorded product status, resolution, focus arrangement, field of view, infrared support, built-in microphone and mounting of both cameras, and which of them records manual exposure control. It does not settle price, image quality, low light behaviour or how reliable the autofocus is, because none of those are recorded and no camera was measured. It settles enough to separate a discontinued 1080p camera kept for reference from a 4K camera with autofocus that is still sold. Questions: - **Is the Elgato Facecam still sold?** No. Its recorded product status is discontinued by the manufacturer, and that note appears in its recorded feature list. It is kept in this catalogue as a reference rather than as a current recommendation. - **Does the Elgato Facecam autofocus?** No. The recorded lens is a fixed focus prime, so the focus plane does not change, and manual exposure control is in the recorded feature list. - **What resolution does the Logitech Brio 4K record?** Up to 4K at 30 fps and 1080p at 60 fps, alongside recorded autofocus and an adjustable field of view. - **Does the Brio 4K work with Windows Hello?** The recorded infrared support is yes, and infrared authentication support appears in the recorded feature list, which is what lets platform sign-in use the camera. - **Does the Elgato Facecam have a built-in microphone?** No. The recorded built-in microphone is no, and the recorded absence of a built-in microphone also appears in the feature list. The Brio records a dual omni-directional microphone with a range of up to 1.2 m. - **Can you adjust the field of view on both webcams?** Both record an adjustable field of view. The Facecam records it as adjustable in software with an 82 degree diagonal angle, and the Brio records 90, 78 or 65 degrees across three presets. ### Keychron Q1 vs Keychron K8 Pro URL: https://abackreviews.com/comparisons/keychron-q1-vs-k8-pro Both are hot-swappable and wireless. The Q1 is a heavier aluminium 75 percent board, while the K8 Pro is a lighter tenkeyless board with a plastic case. These two keyboards share a manufacturer, hot-swap sockets, wired and Bluetooth connectivity, and remapping support. The purchase decision comes down to three measurable differences. ## What actually differs The Q1 has an aluminium case and weighs substantially more, which makes it stable on a desk and less likely to slide. The K8 Pro uses a plastic case and is far lighter, which is easier to move but less planted. The Q1 uses a 75 percent layout, which retains the function row and arrow keys while removing the number pad. The K8 Pro is tenkeyless, so it also omits the number pad but keeps a wider spacing between clusters. Both support remapping, and both accept replacement switches without soldering. ## Which to choose Choose the Q1 if you want a heavy, stable board and prefer a compact 75 percent layout. Choose the K8 Pro if weight and price matter more than case material, or if you prefer a wider tenkeyless footprint. Products covered: - Keychron K8 Pro (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-k8-pro, competitor): Best when weight and price matter more than case material. - Keychron Q1 (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-q1, subject): Best for a heavy, stable aluminium board in a 75 percent layout. **Case material and weight** The Q1 uses an aluminium case and is much heavier, which keeps it stable. The K8 Pro uses a plastic case and is lighter. **Layout** The Q1 is 75 percent with a compressed function row. The K8 Pro is tenkeyless with a wider cluster spacing. **Choose the Q1** You want a heavy, planted board and prefer a 75 percent layout. **Choose the K8 Pro** You want something lighter and cheaper, or you prefer a tenkeyless footprint. **Aluminium case** The recorded case material is aluminium, which is the main reason the board feels planted. **Compact without a number pad** The recorded layout is 75 percent, which keeps the footprint smaller than a full board. **Heavy to move** The recorded weight is 1600 g, so it is not a board you carry between desks. **Compressed function row** A 75 percent layout puts the function keys in a second row, which some typists find slow to adapt to. **Typists who want a number pad** A 75 percent layout removes the number pad. If you enter figures regularly, that trade-off shows up quickly. **QMK and VIA support** The recorded remapping software is QMK and VIA, which is a deeper remapping layer than most boards in this price range. **Hot-swappable switches** The recorded hot-swap support is yes, so switches can be changed without soldering. **Tenkeyless footprint** The recorded layout is tenkeyless, which keeps the desk space in front of you clear. **Plastic case** The recorded case material is plastic, so it does not carry the same planted feel as an aluminium board. **Readers who want a solid desk feel** If a heavy aluminium body is the reason you want a mechanical keyboard, the lighter plastic case gives that up. ### Keychron Q1 vs Keychron Q11: One Solid Board Or A Split Pair? URL: https://abackreviews.com/comparisons/keychron-q1-vs-keychron-q11 A single-piece aluminium 75 percent board at 1,825 g against a split all-metal 75 percent board at 1,186 g with a knob, a tray mount and QMK. Two Keychron boards that share a layout class and almost nothing else. The Keychron Q1 is a single 75 percent mechanical keyboard in a full aluminium case, gasket mounted with a steel plate, weighing 1,825 g plus or minus 10 g. The Keychron Q11 is a 75 percent ANSI split mechanical keyboard with a rotary knob, an all-metal tray-mounted body weighing 1,186 g plus or minus 10 g fully assembled. Both are recorded as USB-C wired, both record a 1000 Hz polling rate, and both record double-shot PBT keycaps. Every value here comes from the specifications recorded against each product, and each carries the manufacturer page it was read from. Neither board was measured for this comparison, so nothing here describes how either one types, how it sounds or how it ages. ## What actually differs **One piece or two.** The Q1 records a 75 percent layout. The Q11 records a 75 percent ANSI split layout with a rotary knob. The Q11's recorded audience is people who type for long hours and want to angle and split the halves of a mechanical keyboard without giving up remapping, and the knob is recorded as part of the layout rather than as a separate accessory. **Mount and case.** The Q1 records a gasket mount with a steel plate in an aluminium case, and gasket mount and backlighting in its recorded features. The Q11 records a tray mount with the plate integrated into the case and an all-metal frame material. These are different constructions, not two finishes of the same one. **Mass.** The Q1 records 1,825 g plus or minus 10 g and the Q11 records 1,186 g plus or minus 10 g fully assembled. The Q11 is the lighter board by a wide margin, and it is the one recorded as two pieces. **Switches.** The Q1 records Gateron G Pro, Gateron Phantom and Keychron K Pro, all hot-swappable. The Q11 records Keychron Super red or brown, Gateron G Pro red or brown, or barebone, with hot-swappable sockets that take five pin and three pin switches. The barebone option means the board can be bought with no switches at all. **Remapping and stabilisers.** The Q11 records remapping software as QMK firmware with the Keychron Launcher web app, on macOS and Windows, and screw-in PCB stabilisers. The Q1 records no remapping software specification at all, so the catalogue can neither confirm nor deny what the Q1 offers, and it records no stabiliser specification either. **Keycaps and connection.** Both record double-shot PBT, with the Q1's not shine-through and the Q11's in a normal profile. Both record USB-C wired connectivity. The Q1's record adds that the wireless 75 percent aluminium board is sold as the Q1 Max, and the recorded feature list for both boards says there is no wireless connectivity on either. ## Who should pick which The Q1 is the choice for a buyer who wants one solid aluminium board that stays planted on a desk, who wants the recorded gasket mount with a steel plate and the recorded backlighting, and who does not mind the 1,825 g. The Q11 is the choice for a buyer who wants the halves angled, who wants the recorded rotary knob, who wants the recorded QMK remapping and the recorded screw-in stabilisers, and who would rather carry 1,186 g than 1,825 g. ## What this comparison does not settle It does not settle price, because no price is recorded for either board. It does not settle typing feel, sound or latency, because no board was measured and no such figure is recorded. It does not settle whether the Q1 can be remapped, because the catalogue holds no remapping software specification for it. And it does not settle the Q11's dimensions, which are marked as only partially verified because the page does not state whether 345 mm long and 134 mm wide describes one half or the pair. Products covered: - Keychron Q1 (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-q1, subject): The subject of this comparison. Its recorded single-piece aluminium case, gasket mount with a steel plate and 1,825 g weight mark it as the solid board in this pairing. - Keychron Q11 (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-q11, competitor): The split alternative. It records a 75 percent ANSI split layout with a rotary knob, an all-metal tray-mounted body at 1,186 g, screw-in PCB stabilisers and QMK remapping that the Q1's record does not hold. **Layout: a single 75 percent board against a split one with a knob** The Q1 records a 75 percent layout. The Q11 records a 75 percent ANSI split layout with a rotary knob, and its recorded audience is people who want to angle and split the halves. The Q11 adds the split and the knob; the Q1 adds nothing of that kind. **Mount and case: gasket with a steel plate against a tray mount** The Q1 records a gasket mount with a steel plate in an aluminium case, and gasket mount and backlighting in its feature list. The Q11 records a tray mount with the plate integrated into the case and an all-metal frame material. These are different constructions rather than different finishes. **Mass: 1,825 g against 1,186 g** The Q1 records 1,825 g plus or minus 10 g in an aluminium case. The Q11 records 1,186 g plus or minus 10 g fully assembled and is recorded as two pieces. The Q11 is the lighter board by a wide margin, which matters for carrying and for desk space. **Switches: three recorded sets against Super red or brown, G Pro or barebone** The Q1 records Gateron G Pro, Gateron Phantom and Keychron K Pro, all hot-swappable. The Q11 records Keychron Super red or brown, Gateron G Pro red or brown, or barebone, with sockets that take five pin and three pin switches, so it can also be bought with no switches at all. **Remapping and stabilisers: recorded for the Q11, not recorded for the Q1** The Q11 records remapping software as QMK firmware with the Keychron Launcher web app on macOS and Windows, and screw-in PCB stabilisers. The Q1 records no remapping software specification and no stabiliser specification, so the catalogue can neither confirm nor deny what the Q1 offers. **Connection and keycaps: USB-C wired on both** Both boards record USB-C wired connectivity and a 1000 Hz polling rate, and both record double-shot PBT keycaps, with the Q1's not shine-through and the Q11's in a normal profile. The Q1's record adds that the wireless 75 percent aluminium board is sold as the Q1 Max, and both feature lists say there is no wireless connectivity. **What the aluminium case and the gasket mount cost** The recorded 1,825 g weight, the recorded aluminium case and the recorded gasket mount with a steel plate are what keep the Q1 planted on a desk. The cost is mass, a single fixed footprint and no split, and the recorded backlighting is the one feature it holds that the Q11 does not. **What the tray-mounted split costs** The recorded split layout, the recorded rotary knob and the recorded all-metal body at 1,186 g are what the Q11 offers instead of a solid block. The cost is a tray mount with the plate integrated into the case rather than a gasket mount, a partly verified dimension, and no recorded lighting specification. **People who want one solid board that stays put** The recorded aluminium case, the recorded gasket mount with a steel plate and the recorded backlighting suit a desk that does not move, and the recorded 75 percent layout keeps the arrow cluster and the right-hand column. **People who want to split and angle their keyboard** The recorded split 75 percent ANSI layout with a rotary knob, the recorded hot-swappable sockets and the recorded QMK remapping with the Keychron Launcher web app suit someone who works for long hours and wants to change the angle, the switches or the mapping. **People who want two angled halves and a knob** The recorded layout is a single 75 percent board and no split or rotary knob is recorded for it, and at a recorded 1,825 g it is the heavier of the pair. A buyer who wants to angle two halves is looking at the other product. **People who want a gasket mount, a solid case or backlighting** The recorded mount style is a tray mount with the plate integrated into the case, no lighting specification is recorded for this board, and no remapping specification beyond the recorded QMK firmware is held for it. The gasket mount and the recorded backlighting belong to the other board. **What this comparison settles** It settles the recorded layout, the recorded case and frame material, the recorded mount style, the recorded mass, the recorded switch options, the recorded hot-swapping, the recorded keycap material, the recorded polling rate and the recorded connection. It does not settle price, typing feel, sound or latency, and it does not settle what the Q1 can be remapped to do. Questions: - **Is the Keychron Q11 a split keyboard?** Yes. Its recorded layout is a 75 percent ANSI split layout with a rotary knob, where the Q1 records a single 75 percent layout with no split recorded. - **Which Keychron board is lighter?** The Q11, at a recorded 1,186 g plus or minus 10 g fully assembled, against the Q1's recorded 1,825 g plus or minus 10 g in an aluminium case. - **Does the Keychron Q11 have a gasket mount?** No. The recorded mount style is a tray mount with the plate integrated into the case, where the Q1 records a gasket mount with a steel plate. - **Can the switches be changed on both boards?** On the record, yes. The Q1 records Gateron G Pro, Gateron Phantom and Keychron K Pro, all hot-swappable, and the Q11 records hot-swappable sockets for five pin and three pin switches with Keychron Super red or brown, Gateron G Pro red or brown, or barebone. - **Does the Keychron Q1 have Bluetooth?** No. Its recorded connectivity is USB-C wired, and the same record notes that the wireless 75 percent aluminium board is sold as the Q1 Max. The recorded feature list says there is no wireless connectivity on it. - **What remapping software does the Keychron Q11 use?** QMK firmware with the Keychron Launcher web app, on macOS and Windows. No remapping software specification is recorded for the Q1, so the catalogue cannot say what it offers. ### Keychron Q1 vs Logitech MX Keys Mini: A Mechanical Board Or A Flat Multi-Device One? URL: https://abackreviews.com/comparisons/keychron-q1-vs-logitech-mx-keys-mini A gasket-mounted mechanical board at 1,825 g against a compact scissor-switch wireless board at 506 g, compared on the recorded layout, case and mechanism. Two compact keyboards, and the difference between them is not a preference for how typing feels. It is a difference in what each one is built to do. The Keychron Q1 is a 75 percent gasket-mounted mechanical keyboard with a full aluminium case, hot-swappable switches and USB-C wired connectivity, with the wireless 75 percent aluminium board sold separately as the Q1 Max. The Logitech MX Keys Mini is a compact low-profile wireless keyboard with backlit spherical keycaps, multi-device switching and USB-C charging, and its recorded switch type is scissor keys with 1.8 mm of total travel. Every value in this page comes from the specifications recorded against each product, and each of those values carries the manufacturer page it was read from. No keyboard was measured for this comparison, so nothing here describes how a board types, how loud it is, or how a switch behaves. Where the catalogue does not record something, this page says so rather than filling the gap. ## What actually differs **Mechanism, and whether it can be changed later.** The Q1 records its switch options as Gateron G Pro, Gateron Phantom and Keychron K Pro, all hot-swappable, and hot-swappable switches appear in its recorded feature list alongside backlighting and a gasket mount. The MX Keys Mini records its switch type as scissor keys with 1.8 mm of total travel, and its recorded feature list holds multi-device switching and wireless connectivity, with no switch that could be replaced. One of these keyboards can be opened and re-switched when the preference changes. The other cannot. **Wired against wireless.** The Q1 records its connectivity as USB-C wired, and the same record notes that the wireless 75 percent aluminium board is sold as the Q1 Max. Its recorded feature list says there is no wireless connectivity on this board. The MX Keys Mini records Bluetooth and Logi Bolt connectivity, a 10 m wireless range, a battery life of up to 5 months with the backlighting off and up to 10 days with it on, a 1,500 mAh rechargeable lithium polymer battery and USB-C charging. One of these keyboards is tethered to the desk by a cable, and the other is not. **Layout.** The Q1 records a 75 percent layout, which keeps an arrow cluster and a right-hand column while dropping the function row and the number pad. The MX Keys Mini records a compact layout with a function row. Neither records a number pad, and neither board can grow one later. **Case, mount and mass.** The Q1 records aluminium as its case material, a gasket mount with a steel plate, double-shot PBT keycaps that are not shine-through, a polling rate of 1000 Hz, and a weight of 1,825 g plus or minus 10 g. The MX Keys Mini records a weight of 506 g, a figure the catalogue marks as only partially verified, and records no case material and no mount style at all. The mass difference is roughly three and a half times, and it is the clearest single reason the Q1 stays on a desk while the Mini moves with a laptop. ## Who should pick which The Q1 is the choice for a buyer who wants a substantial board that stays planted on the desk, who expects to try more than one switch type, and who accepts a fixed footprint, a weight that rules it out of a laptop bag, and a cable. Its recorded aluminium case, gasket mount and hot-swappable sockets are the reasons. The MX Keys Mini is the choice for a buyer who types on flat, quiet keys, who moves between a laptop and a desktop, and who would rather not charge a keyboard on a schedule or run a cable across the desk. Its recorded multi-device switching, its recorded 10 m range and its recorded battery figure of up to 5 months with the backlighting off address exactly that, and a shared desk where mechanical key noise would be a problem is the situation its recorded low-profile build suits. Neither board suits a buyer whose work depends on a number pad, because neither records one and neither can be extended to include one. ## What this comparison does not settle It does not settle price, because no price is recorded for either product, and it does not settle availability. It does not settle typing feel, sound or latency, because no board was measured and no such figure is recorded. It does not settle the MX Keys Mini weight precisely, because the catalogue marks that value as only partially verified. What it does settle is the mechanism, the wired and wireless arrangements, the layout, the recorded case and mount, the recorded mass and the recorded battery figures, which is enough to rule either product in or out for a large share of buyers. Products covered: - Keychron Q1 (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-q1, subject): The subject of this comparison. Its recorded 75 percent layout, aluminium case, gasket mount, hot-swappable switches and 1,825 g weight mark it as the mechanical option, where the MX Keys Mini records scissor keys and a 506 g weight. - Logitech MX Keys Mini (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-keys-mini, competitor): The low-profile alternative. Its recorded scissor switch type, compact layout with a function row, Bluetooth and Logi Bolt connectivity and 5 month battery figure with the backlighting off are the values it puts against the Q1's recorded build. **Mechanism: hot-swappable switches against scissor keys** The Q1 records switch options of Gateron G Pro, Gateron Phantom and Keychron K Pro, all hot-swappable, and hot-swappable switches appear in its recorded feature list. The MX Keys Mini records scissor keys with 1.8 mm of total travel and no replaceable switch in its recorded feature list. One board can be re-switched later, the other cannot. **Layout: 75 percent against a compact board with a function row** The Q1 records a 75 percent layout, which keeps an arrow cluster and a right-hand column while removing the function row and the number pad. The MX Keys Mini records a compact layout with a function row. The recorded layouts are close in size and different in what they give up, and neither board records a number pad. **Case, mount and mass: aluminium at 1,825 g against 506 g** The Q1 records aluminium as its case material, a gasket mount with a steel plate, double-shot PBT keycaps and a polling rate of 1000 Hz, and a weight of 1,825 g plus or minus 10 g. The MX Keys Mini records 506 g, a value the catalogue marks as only partially verified, and records no case material or mount style. **Wired against wireless** The Q1 records its connectivity as USB-C wired, and the same record notes that the wireless 75 percent aluminium board is sold as the Q1 Max, with its recorded feature list saying there is no wireless connectivity on this board. The MX Keys Mini records Bluetooth and Logi Bolt connectivity, a 10 m range, USB-C charging and a battery life of up to 5 months with the backlighting off and up to 10 days with it on. **What the aluminium case and the gasket mount cost** The recorded 1,825 g weight and the recorded aluminium case are what keep the board planted on a desk, and the recorded hot-swappable sockets are what let it be rebuilt later. The cost is mass, a fixed footprint and a wired connection, and no battery life is recorded for the Q1, so there is no run time to compare. **What the scissor-switch build costs** The recorded scissor keys with 1.8 mm of total travel, the recorded multi-device switching and the recorded battery figure of up to 5 months with the backlighting off are what make the Mini portable and quiet. The cost is that no replaceable switch is recorded for it, so the feel of the keys cannot be changed later. **People who expect to change switches** The recorded hot-swappable sockets and the three recorded switch options mean the board can follow a change of preference rather than fixing it at purchase, and the recorded aluminium case and gasket mount suit a desk that does not move and does not mind a cable. **People who type flat and switch between devices** The recorded multi-device switching, the recorded Bluetooth and Logi Bolt connectivity and the recorded 10 m range suit a setup that moves between a laptop and a desktop, and the recorded compact layout keeps a function row. **People who need a number pad, a light board or a wireless one** The recorded layout is 75 percent, so there is no number pad and no way to add one later. At a recorded 1,825 g the board is not something to carry between locations, and the recorded connectivity is USB-C wired, so a buyer who wants a wireless board is looking at the other product. **People who want to rebuild their keys** No replaceable switch is recorded for the MX Keys Mini, so there is no recorded path to changing the feel of the keys later, and the recorded compact layout does not describe a number pad. **What this comparison settles** It settles the mechanism, the recorded layout, the recorded case material and mount style, the recorded mass, the recorded wired and wireless arrangements and the recorded battery figures. It does not settle price, availability, typing feel, sound or latency, and it does not settle the MX Keys Mini weight precisely, because the catalogue marks that value as only partially verified. The choice between a rebuildable mechanical board and a flat multi-device board is left where it belongs: with the reader. Questions: - **Is the Keychron Q1 a mechanical keyboard?** Yes. Its recorded description is a 75 percent gasket-mounted mechanical keyboard with a full aluminium case, and hot-swappable switches appear in its recorded feature list, so the switches can be replaced without soldering. - **Can the switches on the Keychron Q1 be changed later?** Yes. The recorded switch options are Gateron G Pro, Gateron Phantom and Keychron K Pro, all hot-swappable, and hot-swappable switches appear in the recorded feature list. - **What switch type does the Logitech MX Keys Mini use?** Scissor keys with 1.8 mm of total travel. That is the recorded switch type, and no replaceable switch appears in the recorded feature list. - **How long does the MX Keys Mini battery last?** The recorded battery life is up to 5 months with the backlighting off and up to 10 days with it on, and the recorded charging is USB-C. - **How much does the Keychron Q1 weigh?** The recorded weight is 1,825 g plus or minus 10 g. That is the trade for a full aluminium case that stays planted on a desk, and it is why the board does not travel well. - **Is the Keychron Q1 wireless?** No. The recorded connectivity is USB-C wired, and the same record notes that the wireless 75 percent aluminium board is sold as the Q1 Max. The recorded feature list says there is no wireless connectivity on this board. ### Logitech Lift vs MX Anywhere 3S: A Vertical Grip Or A 99 g Travel Mouse? URL: https://abackreviews.com/comparisons/logitech-lift-vs-mx-anywhere-3s One changes the angle of the hand, the other shrinks the body. The recorded grip angle, weight, hand size, battery life and surface support for each mouse. Both the Logitech Lift and the Logitech MX Anywhere 3S are wireless mice from the same manufacturer, and both record Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt connectivity. Neither is a light mouse in the ordinary sense. The difference is where the weight goes. The Lift is recorded as a vertical ergonomic wireless mouse with a natural handshake grip angle, a grip angle of vertical at 57 degrees, a weight of 125 g and an intended hand size of small to medium. The MX Anywhere 3S is recorded as a compact wireless mouse intended for travel, weighing 99 g on the product page, with recorded support for glass and most surfaces. Those are two different ways of fixing an uncomfortable hand position. The Lift changes the angle the forearm sits at. The Anywhere 3S changes how little the mouse weighs and how little desk space it needs. A buyer choosing between them is choosing which discomfort they would rather have. Every value here comes from the specifications recorded against each product, with the manufacturer page it was read from. No mouse was measured for this comparison, so there is no claim about tracking behaviour on any surface, button feel, or how either mouse feels over a long session. ## What actually differs **Grip angle.** The Lift records its grip angle as vertical, 57 degrees, and vertical grip appears in its recorded feature list, so the forearm sits in a handshake position rather than flat on the desk. The MX Anywhere 3S records no grip angle at all, and its recorded description calls it a compact mouse intended for travel, so the recorded difference between the two is the shape of the hand position rather than the size of the mouse. **Intended hand size.** The Lift records its intended hand size as small to medium, and its recorded description says the same thing. The MX Anywhere 3S records no hand size, so it is not a mouse recorded for a particular grip. **Weight.** The Lift records 125 g and the MX Anywhere 3S records 99 g on the product page, while its support specification records 95 g with the battery, a point the catalogue marks as conflicting. For a mouse that moves across a large display, or that gets packed and unpacked every day, the difference is noticeable. For a mouse that stays beside one keyboard, the heavier body is the more stable one to move. **Buttons and sensor.** The Lift records 6 buttons and a sensor resolution of 1000 DPI nominal, adjustable from 400 to 4000 DPI. The MX Anywhere 3S records 6 buttons and a sensor resolution of 200 to 8,000 DPI on the product page, while the support specification records 400 to 8,000 DPI, again recorded as conflicting. The button count is the same, so the difference is in how finely the mouse can be set. **Surface support and battery.** The MX Anywhere 3S records support for glass and most surfaces, and a battery life of up to 70 days on a full charge. The Lift records no surface support value, and its recorded battery life is up to 24 months on one AA battery, which is a different arrangement rather than a longer or shorter run time. **Size.** The Lift records 108 by 70 by 71 mm. The MX Anywhere 3S records 100.5 by 65 by 34.4 mm, which is a fraction of the height and a fraction of the bulk. ## Who should pick which Choose the Lift if your hands are small to medium, if the mouse is used for long stretches, and if the wrist and forearm position is the part of the setup that bothers you. Its recorded 57 degree vertical grip, its recorded multi-device switching and its recorded 24 month battery on one AA are the reasons to accept a 125 g mouse and a tall narrow footprint. Choose the MX Anywhere 3S if the mouse moves between locations, if you work across more than one surface including glass, if the recorded 99 g matters, and you want the recorded battery figure of up to 70 days on a full charge. Its recorded compact body is what makes it a travel mouse rather than a desk mouse. The Lift is the wrong answer for someone who wants a light travel mouse, and the MX Anywhere 3S is the wrong answer for someone whose hand position is the problem, since it records no vertical grip. ## What this comparison does not settle It does not settle price, because no price is recorded for either mouse. It does not settle tracking behaviour on any surface, or how either mouse feels in the hand over a long session, because no mouse was measured. It does not settle the MX Anywhere 3S weight or sensor resolution precisely, because the catalogue records both as conflicting between the product page and the support specification. It settles grip angle, hand size, recorded weight, buttons, recorded sensor resolution, battery arrangements and recorded size, which is enough to separate a vertical ergonomic mouse from a compact travel mouse without declaring either of them better in general. Products covered: - Logitech Lift (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-lift, subject): The subject of this comparison. Its recorded 57 degree vertical grip angle, 125 g weight, small to medium intended hand size and 24 month AA battery life mark it as the mouse for people whose hand position is the problem. - Logitech MX Anywhere 3S (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-anywhere-3s, competitor): The travel alternative. Its recorded 99 g weight, recorded support for glass and most surfaces, recorded 70 day battery life and recorded compact body are the values it puts against the Lift's recorded vertical grip. **Grip angle: a recorded vertical 57 degrees against no recorded angle** The Lift records its grip angle as vertical, 57 degrees, and lists vertical grip in its recorded feature list, so the forearm sits in a handshake position rather than flat. The MX Anywhere 3S records no grip angle, and its recorded description calls it a compact mouse intended for travel, so it is a horizontal mouse. **Intended hand size: small to medium against nothing recorded** The Lift records small to medium hands, which its description repeats. The MX Anywhere 3S records no hand size, so the recorded data does not tell a buyer which hands it is shaped for. **Weight: 125 g against a conflicting 99 g and 95 g** The Lift records 125 g. The MX Anywhere 3S records 99 g on the product page and 95 g with the battery in the support specification, a point the catalogue records as conflicting. The difference is small on a desk that never moves and noticeable in a bag that is opened every day. **Sensor resolution: 400 to 4000 DPI against a conflicting 200 to 8,000 DPI** The Lift records 1000 DPI nominal, adjustable from 400 to 4000 DPI. The MX Anywhere 3S records 200 to 8,000 DPI on the product page and 400 to 8,000 DPI in the support specification, which the catalogue marks as conflicting. Both record 6 buttons, so the difference is in how finely the mouse can be set rather than in how many controls it has. **Surface support and battery: glass and 70 days against 24 months on one AA** The MX Anywhere 3S records support for glass and most surfaces and a battery life of up to 70 days on a full charge. The Lift records no surface support value and a battery life of up to 24 months on one AA battery, which is a different arrangement rather than a longer or a shorter run time. **Size: 108 by 70 by 71 mm against 100.5 by 65 by 34.4 mm** The Lift records 108 by 70 by 71 mm. The MX Anywhere 3S records 100.5 by 65 by 34.4 mm, a fraction of the height and a fraction of the bulk, which is what a vertical grip costs in desk space. **What the vertical grip costs** The recorded 57 degree angle and the recorded small to medium hand size are what make the mouse work for a smaller hand, and the recorded 125 g weight and the tall recorded footprint are what it costs. A buyer who wants a light mouse for travel is paying weight and desk space for the angle. **What a horizontal body costs** The recorded 99 g weight, the recorded compact body and the recorded support for glass and most surfaces are what make it travel well. The cost is that it records no vertical grip angle, so it does nothing about wrist and forearm position. **People whose hand position is the problem** The recorded 57 degree vertical grip and the recorded small to medium hand size are the reasons to choose it, and the recorded multi-device switching keeps it usable across a laptop and a desktop. **People who move between desks and surfaces** The recorded 99 g weight, the recorded compact body and the recorded support for glass and most surfaces cover travel, and the recorded battery life of up to 70 days on a full charge removes charging from the routine. **People who want a light travel mouse** The recorded 125 g weight and the tall recorded footprint are fixed properties rather than preferences. A buyer who packs a mouse every day has a lighter recorded option in this comparison. **People whose wrist position is the problem** The MX Anywhere 3S records no grip angle and no vertical grip, so it changes nothing about forearm position. It is the wrong tool for that specific discomfort. **What this comparison settles** It settles the recorded grip angle, intended hand size, recorded weight, buttons, recorded sensor resolution, recorded battery arrangements, recorded surface support and recorded size of both mice. It does not settle price, tracking behaviour, or how either mouse feels in the hand over a long session, and it does not settle the MX Anywhere 3S weight or sensor resolution precisely, because the catalogue records both as conflicting. It settles enough to separate a vertical ergonomic mouse from a compact travel mouse without declaring either of them better in general. Questions: - **What grip angle does the Logitech Lift use?** The recorded grip angle is vertical, 57 degrees, and vertical grip appears in the recorded feature list. - **How much does the Logitech Lift weigh?** The recorded weight is 125 g. That makes it the heavier of the two mice on this page, and the recorded vertical body is the reason a buyer accepts that figure. - **How much does the MX Anywhere 3S weigh?** The catalogue records 99 g on the product page and 95 g with the battery in the support specification, and marks that as a conflict. Either figure is lighter than the recorded 125 g of the Logitech Lift. - **Can the MX Anywhere 3S work on glass?** Yes. The recorded surface support states that it works on glass and most surfaces. No surface support value is recorded for the Lift. - **How long does each mouse battery last?** The MX Anywhere 3S records up to 70 days on a full charge. The Lift records up to 24 months on one AA battery. These are different arrangements rather than a longer or shorter run time. - **Is the Logitech Lift for small hands?** The recorded intended hand size is small to medium, and the recorded 57 degree vertical grip is what the shape is built around. ### MX Master 3S vs Logitech Lift URL: https://abackreviews.com/comparisons/mx-master-3s-vs-lift Same software and connectivity family, different ergonomics. The MX Master 3S is larger and horizontal, the Lift is lighter and vertical. Both mice come from the same manufacturer and use the same wireless ecosystem and configuration software, so the meaningful differences are physical. ## What actually differs The MX Master 3S is a horizontal, sculpted mouse weighing around 141 grams and aimed at medium to large hands. It provides a thumb rest and a secondary thumb wheel. The Lift is a vertical mouse weighing around 125 grams, with a grip angle designed to keep the forearm in a handshake position, and it is sized for smaller hands. The MX Master 3S has more buttons and a scroll wheel that switches between free-spin and ratcheted modes. The Lift has a simpler button layout. Both support multi-device pairing and both rely on the same configuration software for advanced features. ## Which to choose Choose the MX Master 3S if you want a palm-filling shape, a secondary thumb wheel and more configurable controls, and you have medium to large hands. Choose the Lift if you want a vertical grip to keep the wrist straighter, you prefer a lighter mouse, or your hands are smaller. Products covered: - Logitech Lift (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-lift, competitor): Best for a vertical grip, lighter weight and smaller hands. - Logitech MX Master 3S (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-master-3s, subject): Best for palm support and more configurable controls with medium to large hands. **Shape and grip** The MX Master 3S is horizontal and sculpted with a thumb rest. The Lift is vertical with a designed grip angle. **Weight and hand size** The MX Master 3S is heavier and sized for larger hands. The Lift is lighter and sized for smaller hands. **Controls** The MX Master 3S adds a secondary thumb wheel and more configurable buttons. **Choose the MX Master 3S** You want palm support, a thumb wheel and more controls, with medium to large hands. **Choose the Lift** You want a vertical grip, lighter weight, or your hands are smaller. **Software dependency is the same** Both rely on the same vendor software for advanced configuration, so switching does not remove that dependency. **Seven configurable buttons** The recorded button count is 7, which is more direct control than the Lift offers. **High-resolution sensor** The recorded sensor resolution is 8000 DPI, which gives room for very high pointer speeds. **Long stated battery life** The manufacturer states up to 70 days on a full charge. We have not measured it ourselves. **Heaviest of the two** The recorded weight is 141 g, against 125 g for the Lift. **Not a vertical grip** The shape is horizontal and sculpted for medium to large hands, so it does not reduce forearm rotation. **Small hands** The MX Master 3S is recorded for medium to large hands. A smaller hand is better served by the Logitech Lift. **Lighter weight** The recorded weight is 125 g, which is 16 g lighter than the MX Master 3S. **Vertical grip angle** The recorded grip angle is 57 degrees, which rotates the forearm into a more neutral handshake position. **Sized for smaller hands** The recorded intended hand size is small to medium. **Vertical feel takes practice** A vertical shape changes the angle of the wrist, and some users need a few weeks to adapt to it. **Fewer recorded controls** No button count is recorded for the Lift in our data, and the MX Master 3S records 7. **Larger hands** The Lift is recorded for small to medium hands. A larger hand is better served by the sculpted horizontal shape of the MX Master 3S. ### Logitech MX Master 3S vs MX Anywhere 3S: The Sculpted Desk Mouse Or The 99 g Travel One? URL: https://abackreviews.com/comparisons/mx-master-3s-vs-mx-anywhere-3s The same wireless platform and the same 70 day battery figure, a different body. The recorded weight, buttons, sensor and surface support for each mouse. The Logitech MX Master 3S and the Logitech MX Anywhere 3S share more than a name. Both record Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt connectivity, both record a battery life of up to 70 days on a full charge, both record a 10 m wireless range, and both descriptions record an electromagnetic scroll wheel. What separates them is the body: the Master 3S is recorded at 141 g as an ergonomic wireless mouse with a sculpted shape for medium to large hands, while the MX Anywhere 3S is recorded at 99 g on the product page as a compact wireless mouse intended for travel. So the comparison is not really about wireless standards, because the recorded wireless figures are identical. It is about how much mouse a person wants to move, and where. Every value here comes from the specifications recorded against each product, with the manufacturer page it was read from. No mouse was measured for this comparison, so there is no claim about tracking behaviour, scroll feel, or build quality beyond what is recorded. ## What actually differs **Weight.** The Master 3S records 141 g and the MX Anywhere 3S records 99 g on the product page, while its support specification records 95 g with the battery, a point the catalogue marks as conflicting. That is the single number that decides most purchases, because a mouse that travels gets picked up and moved constantly, while a mouse that stays on one desk does not. **Shape and hand size.** The Master 3S is recorded as an ergonomic wireless mouse with a sculpted shape, and its description places it with users who have medium to large hands. The MX Anywhere 3S is recorded as a compact wireless mouse intended for travel, with no hand size recorded. A sculpted palm-filling body and a compact body are two different answers to the same question. **Buttons.** The Master 3S records 7 buttons, and the MX Anywhere 3S records 6. The recorded feature list also puts multi-device switching and quiet switches on the Master 3S, while the Anywhere 3S records an electromagnetic scroll wheel and multi-device switching. More buttons means more direct control and more to configure. **Sensor resolution.** The Master 3S records 8,000 DPI. The MX Anywhere 3S records 200 to 8,000 DPI on the product page, while the support specification records 400 to 8,000 DPI, which the catalogue marks as conflicting. The two are closer than the weight figures suggest, and the recorded difference between them is one of labelling rather than capability. **Surface support.** The MX Anywhere 3S records support for glass and most surfaces. The Master 3S records no surface support value. **Size.** The Master 3S records 124.9 by 84.3 by 51 mm. The MX Anywhere 3S records 100.5 by 65 by 34.4 mm. ## Who should pick which Choose the MX Master 3S if the mouse belongs to one desk, if your hands are medium to large, and if you want the recorded 7 buttons, the recorded 8,000 DPI sensor and the recorded quiet switches in a sculpted body that supports the palm. It is the choice for a fixed workstation. Choose the MX Anywhere 3S if the mouse goes in a bag and comes out on a train, on a hotel desk or on glass, and if the recorded 99 g and a compact body are what you need. Its recorded support for glass and most surfaces is the specific reason it suits surfaces the Master 3S makes no recorded claim about. ## What this comparison does not settle It does not settle price, because no price is recorded for either mouse. It does not settle which one tracks better or feels better built, because no sensor figure beyond the recorded ones is available and no mouse was measured. It does not settle the MX Anywhere 3S weight or sensor resolution precisely, because the catalogue records both as conflicting between the product page and the support specification. It settles weight, shape, buttons, recorded sensor resolution, surface support, size and the shared connectivity and battery figures, which is enough to separate a fixed desk mouse from a travel mouse while acknowledging that the wireless side of the decision is already made either way. Products covered: - Logitech MX Anywhere 3S (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-anywhere-3s, competitor): The travel alternative. Its recorded 99 g weight, compact body, support for glass and most surfaces and 70 day battery life are the values it puts against the Master 3S's recorded sculpted shape. - Logitech MX Master 3S (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-master-3s, subject): The subject of this comparison. Its recorded 141 g weight, sculpted shape for medium to large hands, 7 buttons, 8,000 DPI sensor resolution and quiet switches mark it as the fixed desk mouse. **Weight: 141 g against a conflicting 99 g and 95 g** The Master 3S records 141 g and the MX Anywhere 3S records 99 g on the product page and 95 g with the battery in the support specification, which the catalogue marks as conflicting. A mouse that travels is picked up and moved all day, while a mouse that stays on one desk is not, so the same difference means different things to the two buyers. **Shape: a sculpted body for medium to large hands against a compact travel body** The Master 3S is recorded as an ergonomic wireless mouse with a sculpted shape, and its description places it with users who have medium to large hands. The MX Anywhere 3S is recorded as a compact wireless mouse intended for travel, with no hand size recorded. **Buttons: 7 against 6** The Master 3S records 7 buttons and the MX Anywhere 3S records 6. The recorded feature lists also differ: multi-device switching and quiet switches on the Master 3S, an electromagnetic scroll wheel and multi-device switching on the Anywhere 3S. **Sensor resolution: 8,000 DPI against a conflicting 200 to 8,000 DPI** The Master 3S records 8,000 DPI. The MX Anywhere 3S records 200 to 8,000 DPI on the product page and 400 to 8,000 DPI in the support specification, which the catalogue marks as conflicting. The two are closer than the weight figures suggest, and the recorded difference is one of labelling rather than capability. **Surface support: glass and most surfaces on the MX Anywhere 3S only** The MX Anywhere 3S records support for glass and most surfaces. The Master 3S records no surface support value, so a buyer working on glass has one recorded option here and one unrecorded one. **Shared figures: the same connectivity and the same battery life** Both record Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt, a battery life of up to 70 days on a full charge, and a wireless range of 10 m, and both descriptions record an electromagnetic scroll wheel. The recorded size is where they part: 124.9 by 84.3 by 51 mm against 100.5 by 65 by 34.4 mm. **What the sculpted body costs** The recorded 141 g, the 7 recorded buttons and the recorded 8,000 DPI sensor are what a fixed desk earns you, along with the recorded quiet switches. The cost is that a mouse this size is a poor travel item, and the recorded data makes no claim about the surfaces it works on. **What a compact body costs** The recorded 99 g weight and the recorded support for glass and most surfaces are what travel costs nothing against. What it gives up is the recorded 7 buttons, the recorded 8,000 DPI sensor and the sculpted palm support that comes with them. **People at one fixed desk with medium to large hands** The recorded sculpted shape, the 7 recorded buttons, the recorded 8,000 DPI sensor and the recorded quiet switches are the reasons to choose it, and the recorded 70 day battery life removes charging from the routine. **People who work away from a desk** The recorded 99 g weight, the recorded compact body and the recorded support for glass and most surfaces make it the mouse that works in a bag, on a train table and on a glass counter. **People who travel with their mouse** At a recorded 141 g, and with no recorded surface support, this mouse makes more sense on a desk than in a bag. **People who want a palm-filling shape and extra controls** The MX Anywhere 3S records 6 buttons and a conflicting sensor resolution, so there is less recorded about extra controls and precision on this mouse, and the compact body gives up the palm support of the larger one. **What this comparison settles** It settles the recorded weight, shape, buttons, recorded sensor resolution, recorded surface support, recorded size and the shared connectivity and battery figures of both mice. It does not settle price, availability, build quality, or how either mouse feels over a long session, because none of those are recorded and no mouse was measured, and it does not settle the MX Anywhere 3S weight or sensor resolution precisely, because the catalogue records both as conflicting. It settles enough to separate a fixed desk mouse from a travel mouse, and it makes clear that the wireless side of the decision is already made either way. Questions: - **How much does the MX Master 3S weigh?** The recorded weight is 141 g, against 99 g for the MX Anywhere 3S on its product page. - **How many buttons does the MX Master 3S have?** The recorded button count is 7, and quiet switches appear in its recorded feature list. The MX Anywhere 3S records 6 buttons. - **What is the sensor resolution on the MX Master 3S?** The recorded sensor resolution is 8,000 DPI. The MX Anywhere 3S records 200 to 8,000 DPI on the product page and 400 to 8,000 DPI in the support specification, which the catalogue marks as conflicting. - **Does the MX Anywhere 3S work on glass?** Yes. The recorded surface support states that it works on glass and most surfaces. No surface support value is recorded for the MX Master 3S. - **Do the two mice have the same battery life?** Yes, as recorded. Both state a battery life of up to 70 days on a full charge, and both record Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt connectivity. - **Which of these mice is the travel option?** The recorded data points to the MX Anywhere 3S, with a recorded weight of 99 g, a recorded compact body and recorded support for glass and most surfaces, while the MX Master 3S records 141 g and a sculpted shape for medium to large hands. ### Samsung T7 vs T7 Shield: The Ruggedised Drive Against The Plain One URL: https://abackreviews.com/comparisons/samsung-t7-vs-t7-shield Two Samsung portable SSDs with the same recorded interface, speeds and capacities, separated by a 3 m drop rating, an IP 65 water rating and their weight. The Samsung T7 and the Samsung T7 Shield are recorded as the same drive in two bodies. Both record the USB 3.2 Gen 2 interface at 10 Gbps, a read speed of up to 1,050 MB/sec, a write speed of up to 1,000 MB/sec, capacities of 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB, AES 256-bit hardware encryption and a three year limited warranty. The differences the catalogue records are the drop rating, the water rating and the size and weight of the case. Every value here comes from the specifications recorded against each product, and each of those carries the manufacturer page it was read from. No drive was handled for this comparison, so nothing here claims a measured transfer rate, a durability result or a price. ## What actually differs **Drop rating.** The T7 Shield records a drop resistance of up to 3 m. The plain T7 records a shock resistance of up to 2 m. That is the core of the comparison, and it is a distance rather than a description. **Water rating.** The T7 Shield records a water resistance of IP 65. The plain T7 records no water resistance figure at all. The two drop values sit under different specification keys in the catalogue, because the manufacturer pages label them differently, so the comparison reads two separate entries rather than one shared row. **Weight and size.** The T7 Shield records 98 g and dimensions of 59 by 88 by 13 mm. The plain T7 records dimensions of 85 by 57 by 8 mm, which is the flatter and narrower object, and a recorded weight of 72 g on the datasheet and 2.0 oz on the product page. That weight entry is marked as conflicting in the catalogue, so the gap between the two drives is close to 26 g without being an exact figure. **What does not differ.** The interface, the two speed figures, the three capacities, the encryption and the warranty are recorded identically for both. The speed figures are recorded as up to values for each drive, and neither records a sustained rate. ## Who should pick which The T7 Shield is the choice for a drive that goes into a tool bag, a van, a field kit or a pocket on a trip, because the recorded IP 65 water rating and the recorded 3 m drop rating are the reason it exists. The plain T7 is the choice for a drive that lives in a laptop bag between a desk and a sofa, where the recorded 85 by 57 by 8 mm body is smaller in every dimension and the recorded weight is lower. ## What this comparison does not settle It does not settle price, because no price is recorded for either drive. It does not settle sustained performance, because both speed figures are peaks and no sustained rate is recorded for either. It does not settle the exact weight gap, because the T7's weight entry is marked as conflicting. It does not settle what the IP 65 code covers in practice, since no immersion time or seal detail is recorded for the Shield. It does not settle availability. What it does settle is that the two drives share the recorded speed, capacity, encryption and warranty, and that the Shield's recorded protection ratings and extra weight are the whole of the difference between them. Products covered: - Samsung T7 Portable SSD (https://abackreviews.com/products/samsung-t7-portable-ssd, subject): The subject of this comparison. Its recorded 2 m drop resistance, 85 by 57 by 8 mm body and conflicting 72 g weight entry are the plain end of the range the Shield is measured against. - Samsung T7 Shield (https://abackreviews.com/products/samsung-t7-shield, competitor): The ruggedised version of the same drive. It records an IP 65 water rating, a 3 m drop resistance and 98 g at 59 by 88 by 13 mm, with the same interface, speeds, capacities and encryption. **Interface and speed: the same on the record** Both drives record the USB 3.2 Gen 2 interface at 10 Gbps, a read speed of up to 1,050 MB/sec and a write speed of up to 1,000 MB/sec. The Shield adds no recorded bandwidth, and both sets of figures are peak rather than sustained rates. **Drop rating: up to 3 m against up to 2 m** The T7 Shield records a drop resistance of up to 3 m and the plain T7 records a drop resistance of up to 2 m. The two values sit under different specification keys because the manufacturer pages label them differently, so the comparison reads two separate entries. **Water resistance: an IP 65 rating against no recorded figure** The T7 Shield records a water resistance of IP 65. No water resistance is recorded for the plain T7, and the catalogue records no immersion time or seal detail for the Shield either, so the rating is a code rather than a procedure. **Weight and size: 98 g against a conflicting 72 g** The Shield records 98 g and 59 by 88 by 13 mm. The T7 records 85 by 57 by 8 mm and a weight of 72 g on the datasheet and 2.0 oz on the product page, a value the catalogue marks as conflicting between the two manufacturer pages. **Capacities, encryption and warranty: identical entries** Both drives record capacities of 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB, AES 256-bit hardware encryption and a three year limited warranty. Nothing in these entries separates the two products, which is why the comparison turns on protection and size alone. **What the plain T7 gives up** The recorded 2 m drop rating and the absence of any recorded water rating are what the plain T7 gives up against the Shield. In return it records the smaller 85 by 57 by 8 mm body, the lower recorded weight and the same interface, speeds, capacities, encryption and warranty. **What the T7 Shield gives up** The recorded 98 g weight and the larger 59 by 88 by 13 mm body are what the Shield gives up. In return it records an IP 65 water resistance rating and a drop resistance of up to 3 m, with no recorded loss of speed, capacity, encryption or warranty. **People who want the smaller drive in the bag** The recorded 85 by 57 by 8 mm dimensions and the lower recorded weight suit a drive that lives in a laptop bag between a desk and a sofa, and the recorded interface, speeds and capacities are the same as the Shield's. **People who carry drives where drops and water are likely** The recorded IP 65 water resistance rating and the recorded 3 m drop resistance are the reason the Shield exists, and the recorded AES 256-bit hardware encryption and three year warranty come with it unchanged. **People who need the water rating or the longer drop rating** The recorded drop resistance is up to 2 m and no water resistance rating is recorded for this drive, so a buyer whose drive gets wet or is dropped from height is looking at the other product. **People who want the lightest, smallest drive** At a recorded 98 g and 59 by 88 by 13 mm the Shield is the larger and heavier object, and it records the same interface, peak speeds and capacities as the plain T7, so on a desk the extra weight buys nothing. **What this comparison settles** It settles the recorded interface, the two peak speed figures, the recorded capacities, the recorded encryption, the recorded warranty, the recorded drop rating and the recorded water rating on one side, and the recorded weight and dimensions on both. It does not settle price, sustained performance, availability or what the IP 65 code covers in practice. Questions: - **Is the T7 Shield faster than the Samsung T7?** No, not on the record. Both drives record USB 3.2 Gen 2 at 10 Gbps, a read speed of up to 1,050 MB/sec and a write speed of up to 1,000 MB/sec, and both sets of figures are peaks rather than sustained rates. - **Which Samsung portable SSD is more rugged?** The T7 Shield. It records an IP 65 water resistance rating and a drop resistance of up to 3 m, while the plain T7 records a drop resistance of up to 2 m and no water resistance rating. - **How much heavier is the T7 Shield?** The Shield records 98 g. The plain T7 records 72 g on the datasheet and 2.0 oz on the product page, and the catalogue marks that entry as conflicting, so the gap is close to 26 g without being exact. - **Do the T7 and the T7 Shield hold the same amount of data?** Yes. Both drives record capacities of 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB. - **Do both drives have hardware encryption?** Yes. Both record AES 256-bit hardware encryption, and hardware encryption appears in the recorded feature list for each drive. - **Which of the two is smaller?** The plain T7 records dimensions of 85 by 57 by 8 mm against the Shield's 59 by 88 by 13 mm, so the T7 is the flatter and narrower object while the Shield is slightly taller. ### Shure MV7 vs Blue Yeti: A Dynamic Cardioid Or A Condenser With Selectable Patterns? URL: https://abackreviews.com/comparisons/shure-mv7-vs-blue-yeti A dynamic cardioid microphone with USB and XLR against a USB condenser with four selectable pickup patterns, compared on the recorded element and outputs. The Shure MV7 and the Blue Yeti both plug into a computer over USB, both record built-in headphone monitoring, and both are bought by people making voice recordings at a desk. They are built on different principles. The MV7 is a hybrid USB and XLR dynamic microphone with cardioid pickup and a recorded gain range of 0 to +36 dB. The Yeti is a USB condenser microphone with switchable pickup patterns and an integrated stand. The decisive recorded difference is the element type. A dynamic element and a condenser element do not collect sound the same way, and that single specification shapes which room each microphone belongs in. The second difference is output: one records a path to a hardware interface later, the other does not. Every value here comes from the specifications recorded against each product, with the manufacturer page it was read from. No microphone was measured for this comparison, so there is no claim about noise floor, gain before the interface, or how either one handles a particular room. ## What actually differs **Element type.** The MV7 records its element type as dynamic. The Yeti records condenser. The practical consequence is room sensitivity: a condenser is the more sensitive of the two and records more of the space around the voice, while a dynamic is the more forgiving of the two when the room is untreated and reflections are the problem. **Pickup pattern.** The MV7 records its pickup pattern as cardioid, unidirectional. The Yeti records cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo, and switchable pickup patterns appear in its recorded feature list. Cardioid is the pattern the two share. The extra three are what the Yeti offers and the MV7 does not, and they matter for a room where more than one source needs capturing, or where the room itself is part of the recording. **Connection.** The MV7 records USB and XLR, with XLR output in its recorded feature list. The Yeti records USB only. The XLR connection is what keeps the option of moving to an audio interface open later, and it is the practical reason the MV7 suits someone who expects their setup to grow. **Frequency response and sample rate.** The MV7 records 50 Hz to 16 kHz at 24-bit with 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz, 16-bit at the same rates. The Yeti records 20 Hz to 20 kHz at 48 kHz, 16-bit. The Yeti covers more of the low end and the MV7 records a deeper bit depth. **Headphone monitoring and headroom.** Both record headphone monitoring as yes, built-in. The MV7 records a gain range of 0 to +36 dB, and the Yeti records a maximum sound pressure of 120 dB. These are the specifications that tell a user how much headroom the signal has, and they are recorded on different products for different reasons. **Physical size.** The MV7 records 153 by 164 by 90 mm and a weight of 0.55 kg. The Yeti records 12 by 12.5 by 29.5 cm extended in the stand, and a weight of 0.55 kg for the microphone with 1 kg for the stand. The MV7 also records a Micro-B USB connection requiring USB Audio Class 2.0. ## Who should pick which Choose the MV7 if the recording room is not treated, if you want a microphone that will not pick up the room as much as the voice, or if you might later want a hardware interface. The recorded dynamic element and the recorded USB and XLR connections cover both reasons. Choose the Yeti if you record in a quiet room and want to change how the microphone listens from one project to the next, or if a single USB microphone that can do cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo is worth more to you than any of the MV7's other qualities. The recorded integrated stand also means one fewer accessory on the desk. ## What this comparison does not settle It does not settle price, because no price is recorded for either microphone. It does not settle self noise, sound quality in a specific room, or which microphone handles a given voice better, because no microphone was measured and no such record exists. It settles element type, pickup pattern, connection, monitoring, frequency response and sample rate, which is enough to separate a forgiving dynamic microphone with a path to an interface from a flexible condenser that stays on USB. Products covered: - Blue Yeti (https://abackreviews.com/products/blue-yeti, competitor): The alternative. Its recorded condenser element, four selectable pickup patterns, USB only connection, 120 dB maximum sound pressure and integrated stand are the values it puts against the MV7's single cardioid pattern. - Shure MV7 (https://abackreviews.com/products/shure-mv7, subject): The subject of this comparison. Its recorded dynamic element, cardioid unidirectional pickup, USB and XLR connection, 0 to +36 dB gain range and 0.55 kg weight mark it as the forgiving microphone with a path to an interface. **Element type: a dynamic element against a condenser element** The MV7 records its element type as dynamic and the Yeti records condenser. A condenser is the more sensitive of the two and records more of the room around the voice, while a dynamic is the more forgiving of the two when the space is untreated and reflections are the problem. **Pickup pattern: cardioid against four selectable patterns** The MV7 records cardioid, unidirectional. The Yeti records cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo, and lists switchable pickup patterns in its recorded feature list. Cardioid is what the two share; the extra three are what the Yeti offers and the MV7 does not. **Connection: USB and XLR against USB only** The MV7 records USB and XLR, with XLR output in its recorded feature list, which keeps the option of a hardware interface open later. The Yeti records USB only, and its recorded description makes no mention of a second output. **Frequency response and sample rate: 50 Hz to 16 kHz at 24-bit against 20 Hz to 20 kHz at 16-bit** The MV7 records 50 Hz to 16 kHz and 24-bit at 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz, 16-bit at the same rates. The Yeti records 20 Hz to 20 kHz and 48 kHz, 16-bit. One covers more of the low end, the other records a deeper bit depth. **Headphone monitoring and signal headroom** Both record headphone monitoring as yes, built-in, so monitoring does not separate them. The MV7 records a gain range of 0 to +36 dB, and the Yeti records a maximum sound pressure of 120 dB. These are the figures that tell a user how much headroom the signal has. **Physical size: a 0.55 kg microphone against a microphone and a 1 kg stand** The MV7 records 153 by 164 by 90 mm and a weight of 0.55 kg, and its recorded USB connection is Micro-B USB requiring USB Audio Class 2.0. The Yeti records 12 by 12.5 by 29.5 cm extended in the stand, with a weight of 0.55 kg for the microphone and 1 kg for the stand. **What a single pattern costs** The recorded cardioid unidirectional pattern is what makes the dynamic element usable in an untreated room, and the recorded USB and XLR connections leave the option of an interface open. The cost is that there is no recorded way to change the pickup pattern for a different project. **What USB only costs** The recorded four selectable patterns and the recorded integrated stand make the Yeti flexible in a way the MV7 is not, in a quiet room. The cost is the recorded USB only connection, which ends the upgrade path to a hardware interface. **People in untreated rooms, or planning an interface** The recorded dynamic element is the more forgiving of the two in a room that has not been treated, and the recorded USB and XLR connections serve someone who expects to move to an interface later. **People in quiet rooms who change pattern** The recorded four selectable pickup patterns and the recorded integrated stand suit a quiet room and a rotating set of projects, and a single USB cable is the whole setup. **People who need to change pickup pattern** The recorded pickup pattern is cardioid, unidirectional, with no second pattern recorded. A buyer who wants to capture a room, two speakers or a stereo source has to look at the other microphone. **People who want an interface later** The recorded USB only connection ends the path to a hardware interface, and a recorded condenser element collects more of the room, which is a drawback in an untreated space. **What this comparison settles** It settles the recorded element type, pickup pattern, connection, headphone monitoring, frequency response, sample rate, gain range and physical size of both microphones. It does not settle price, self noise, sound quality in any particular room, or which microphone suits a given voice, because none of those are recorded and no microphone was measured. It settles enough to separate a forgiving dynamic microphone with a path to an interface from a flexible condenser that stays on USB. Questions: - **Is the Shure MV7 a dynamic or a condenser microphone?** The recorded element type is dynamic, and the recorded pickup pattern is cardioid, unidirectional. It also records a gain range of 0 to +36 dB. - **What pickup patterns does the Blue Yeti offer?** The recorded patterns are cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo, and switchable pickup patterns appear in its recorded feature list. - **Can the Shure MV7 connect to an audio interface?** The recorded connection is USB and XLR, and XLR output is in the recorded feature list, so the option of a hardware interface later is recorded. - **Does the Blue Yeti have an XLR output?** No XLR output is recorded. The recorded connection is USB only, and the recorded description covers a USB condenser microphone with switchable pickup patterns and an integrated stand. - **Do both microphones have headphone monitoring?** Yes. Both record headphone monitoring as yes, built-in, so monitoring does not separate them. - **Which microphone records the wider frequency response?** The Blue Yeti records 20 Hz to 20 kHz against 50 Hz to 16 kHz for the Shure MV7. The MV7 records a deeper sample rate of 24-bit at 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz against 48 kHz, 16-bit for the Yeti. ## Best-of guides ### Best Ergonomic Mice For Long Sessions, Picked By Use Case URL: https://abackreviews.com/best/best-ergonomic-mice-for-long-sessions A mouse that suits a long session depends on hand size, grip angle and weight. Here is which of the three recorded mice answers which situation. Ergonomic mice are usually compared on comfort, which is the one thing a specification sheet cannot settle. The recorded data for the three mice in this catalogue can settle a different set of questions: which hand a mouse is built for, what angle it holds the wrist at, how heavy it is, and where it has to work. This shortlist puts each mouse against the criterion it satisfies rather than scoring them on one scale, and the order is a reading order rather than a quality ranking. Five criteria are used: intended hand size, grip angle, recorded weight, recorded controls and sensor, and the surfaces and devices the mouse has to serve. ## The MX Master 3S, placed for larger hands The MX Master 3S is recorded for medium to large hands, weighs 141 g and records 7 buttons with an 8000 DPI sensor. Its recorded description calls it an ergonomic wireless mouse with a high-resolution sensor, quiet switches, an electromagnetic scroll wheel and multi-device pairing, and quiet switches appear in its recorded feature list. It also records up to 70 days of battery on a full charge. That combination suits a long session at a fixed desk for someone whose hand needs supporting. A mouse shaped for a large hand fills the palm rather than forcing a stretch, and the recorded button count means the extra controls are there when you want them. ## The Logitech Lift, placed for smaller hands The Lift records its intended hand size as small to medium, a vertical grip angle of 57 degrees and a weight of 125 g. It is the only one of the three that changes the angle of the grip rather than the size of the body, and that is the decision that matters most when a hand is small. Multi-device switching appears in its recorded feature list. A 57 degree angle also changes the wrist position, which is the point of a vertical mouse and also its cost. The recorded description does not promise that the change is instant to adapt to. ## The MX Anywhere 3S, placed for travel The MX Anywhere 3S records the lowest weight of the three at 99 g, records that it works on glass and most surfaces, and records up to 70 days of battery on a full charge. Those recorded values are what make it the travel option: a mouse that travels well is a mouse you can use on a different surface each day. Be clear about what is not there. The recorded feature list for this mouse is empty, no intended hand size is recorded, and no button count or sensor resolution is recorded. It earns a place on portability, not on a documented ergonomic claim, and a buyer choosing for long sessions at a fixed desk has less to work with here than with the other two. ## Where the trade-offs sit Weight is the clearest trade in the group, and it runs in one direction. The MX Master 3S at 141 g is the heaviest, the Lift at 125 g is 16 g lighter, and the MX Anywhere 3S at 99 g is 42 g lighter than the MX Master 3S. If you move the cursor across a large display all day, the heaviest mouse is the one that asks the most of your arm. Grip is the other trade, and it does not resolve on weight. The MX Master 3S is a sculpted horizontal shape, which supports the hand but does not rotate the forearm. The Lift rotates the forearm into a more neutral position but gives up the horizontal support a long desk session can rely on, and no button count is recorded for the Lift, so the control side of that comparison is thinner than the weights make it look. ## What this catalogue cannot settle There is no recorded grip measurement in millimetres, no comfort or fatigue rating, no battery figure for the Lift and no price for any of the three. A specification list can tell you which mouse is built for your hand size and how heavy it is. It cannot tell you whether a grip feels good after an afternoon, so treat the order on this page as a set of decisions rather than a verdict. Products covered: - Logitech Lift (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-lift, recommended): The recorded intended hand size is small to medium and the recorded grip angle is 57 degrees, so it is the only one of the three built around a smaller hand and a different wrist angle. - Logitech MX Anywhere 3S (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-anywhere-3s, recommended): The recorded weight of 99 g is the lowest of the three, and the recorded surface support states that it works on glass and most surfaces, which is what makes it the portable option. - Logitech MX Master 3S (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-master-3s, recommended): It is the only mouse here recorded for medium to large hands, and it records 7 buttons, an 8000 DPI sensor, quiet switches and a sculpted shape, which is what suits a long session at a fixed desk. **The criteria this shortlist uses** Five criteria decide the order. Intended hand size, which is the recorded statement about which hands a mouse is built for. Grip angle, which records whether the mouse is held horizontally or vertically and at what angle. Recorded weight, which is the first thing to check when a session runs long. Recorded controls and sensor, which come from the recorded button count and sensor resolution. And the surfaces and devices the mouse has to serve, which come from the recorded surface support, connectivity and battery life. Each product below is placed against the criterion it satisfies, not against the other two on a single score. **Best for large hands: the Logitech MX Master 3S** The recorded intended user is someone with medium to large hands, and the recorded weight is 141 g with 7 buttons and an 8000 DPI sensor. The recorded description calls it a sculpted ergonomic shape with quiet switches and an electromagnetic scroll wheel. Those recorded values are what place it first for a hand that needs supporting over a long session. **What the MX Master 3S asks you to give up** At a recorded 141 g it is the heaviest of the three, and it is a horizontal sculpted shape, so it supports the hand without rotating the forearm. It also records 7 buttons, the only button count recorded on this shortlist, so the extra controls are real and they are one more thing to learn on the first day. **Best for smaller hands: the Logitech Lift** The recorded intended hand size is small to medium, the recorded grip angle is a vertical 57 degrees and the recorded weight is 125 g. It is the only one of the three that changes the angle of the grip rather than the size of the body, which is the decision that matters most when a hand is small. **What the Lift asks you to give up** A 57 degree vertical grip changes the angle of the wrist, and the recorded description does not promise that the change is instant to adapt to. No button count and no sensor resolution are recorded for the Lift, so the control side of this comparison is thinner than the weight figures make it look. **Best for travel: the Logitech MX Anywhere 3S** The recorded weight of 99 g is the lowest of the three, the recorded surface support states that it works on glass and most surfaces, and the recorded battery life is up to 70 days on a full charge. Those recorded values are the reason it is placed here, and no ergonomic claim is recorded for it. **What the MX Anywhere 3S asks you to give up** The recorded feature list for this mouse is empty, so nothing is claimed for it beyond weight, surface support, connectivity and battery life. Its recorded description calls it a compact wireless mouse, and compactness is the point of it and also its limit for a long session where the palm needs somewhere to rest. **How to read the order** The order is not a quality ranking. The three mice solve different problems, and someone with large hands at a fixed desk and someone who carries a mouse between airports are not in the same market. Each entry is placed for the criterion named in its selection reason, and two of the three would be the wrong choice for the situation the third one wins. Questions: - **Which of these mice is the right one for large hands?** The Logitech MX Master 3S. Its recorded intended user has medium to large hands, and its recorded description calls it a sculpted shape with quiet switches and 7 configurable buttons. The Lift is recorded for small to medium hands, and no hand size is recorded for the MX Anywhere 3S. - **Is a vertical mouse better for long sessions?** It depends on the hand and on whether the change is welcome. The Lift records a vertical grip angle of 57 degrees and an intended hand size of small to medium. A vertical mouse changes the wrist angle, so the adaptation is part of the purchase rather than an afterthought. - **How heavy is the MX Master 3S?** The recorded weight is 141 g. The Lift records 125 g and the MX Anywhere 3S records 99 g, so the MX Master 3S is the heaviest of the three and the MX Anywhere 3S the lightest. The recorded weights are the clearest single trade on this shortlist. - **Which of these mice works on a glass desk?** The MX Anywhere 3S. Its recorded surface support states that it works on glass and most surfaces. No surface support is recorded for the MX Master 3S or the Lift, so that claim rests on the one mouse where the manufacturer states it. - **Do these mice switch between more than one computer?** All three record Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt connectivity. Multi-device switching is in the recorded feature list for the MX Master 3S and the Lift, while the recorded feature list for the MX Anywhere 3S is empty, so its multi-device behaviour is not documented here. - **How long does the battery last on the MX Master 3S?** The manufacturer states up to 70 days on a full charge. That figure depends on usage and we have not measured it ourselves. The MX Anywhere 3S records the same stated figure, and no battery figure at all is recorded for the Lift. ### Best Laptop Stands: A Folding Sit-Stand And A Fixed Riser URL: https://abackreviews.com/best/best-laptop-stands Two recorded stands: the MOFT Z, which folds flat to 1.3 cm and tilts three ways, and the mStand, a fixed 150 mm aluminium block. There are two laptop stands in this catalogue, and they are not two versions of the same thing. The Rain Design mStand is a fixed-height aluminium riser that requires an external keyboard. The MOFT Z 5-in-1 Sit-Stand Desk is a folding sit-stand that tilts through three angles, raises a laptop to ten inches and folds flat to half an inch. This is a shortlist of two, and it is presented as two rather than as a ranking, because the recorded data separates these stands by job rather than by quality. One is for a desk with a separate keyboard. The other is for a laptop that moves between sitting and standing, or between desks. ## The criteria this shortlist uses Four recorded values decide the order. Whether you still type on the laptop keyboard, taken from the recorded keyboard access. Whether the height changes, taken from the recorded adjustable value and the recorded heights. What happens when you leave the desk, taken from the recorded folded thickness and the recorded weight. And what the stand is made of, taken from the recorded material and the recorded load capacity. Each stand below is placed against the criterion it satisfies. No rank here claims that one stand is better for everyone. ## Best for typing on the laptop: the MOFT Z The MOFT Z records a folded thickness of 1.3 cm, half an inch, and folds flat appears in its recorded feature list. It records a height of 25 cm, 10 inches, standing, with 12 cm at 25 degrees, 19.4 cm at 45 and 25 cm at 60, and adjustable as yes, three tilt angles and a standing height. The recorded weight is 960 g, 33.7 oz, and the recorded material is vegan leather, fibreglass, magnets and metal sheets, with a recorded load capacity of up to 22 lb and recorded laptop support for laptops up to 16 inches, and it also works with tablets. Its recorded keyboard access is that it works as a riser with an external keyboard, which describes the raised position, the one where the screen is high and the laptop keyboard is out of reach. The recorded description also says the desk works as a lap desk and a riser, and the product is named as a five in one desk, so the lower arrangements are ones where the machine's own keyboard stays in use. That is the difference that matters here: a fixed riser asks for a separate keyboard, and this folding sit-stand does not. ## Best for a fixed desk: the Rain Design mStand The mStand records a height of 150 mm, 5.9 inches, and records adjustable as no. The recorded material is aluminium, with aluminium body in its recorded feature list. The recorded width and depth are 253 by 190 mm, 10 by 7.5 inches, and the recorded weight is 1.46 kg, 3 pounds. Its recorded laptop support is that it fits all MacBooks and most notebooks, and its recorded audience is users who use an external keyboard and want a stable fixed-height stand. There is little missing from that record. One height, one material, one position on the desk, and no folded thickness because it does not fold. A 1.46 kg block of aluminium that stays put is a different proposition from a 960 g folding stand that goes into a bag, and for a desk that never changes, the fixed riser is the simpler arrangement. ## The trade between them The mStand is a fixed riser that needs an external keyboard, and it never changes height. The MOFT Z is a folding sit-stand that works with the laptop keyboard in the lower of its positions, tilts through three recorded angles from 12 cm to 25 cm, and folds flat to 1.3 cm. The mStand is 500 g heavier and never leaves the desk. The MOFT Z is 960 g, and it is the only stand here that can be packed. Neither is cheaper on the record, because no price is recorded for either of them. ## What this shortlist cannot settle The recorded data does not settle how either stand feels or how stable either is. There is no recorded stability figure, no recorded wobble measurement, no recorded friction value and no recorded sense of how a keyboard feels on top of either one. The load capacity of up to 22 lb is recorded for the MOFT Z, and no load capacity is recorded for the mStand, but a load figure is not a measurement of steadiness. Buy the one that matches your keyboard arrangement, and check the manufacturer's own detail for the part this page cannot read for you. ## Note on this category This category holds only these two stands. It is the smallest category in the catalogue, and this shortlist is the complete set of it rather than a selection from a larger pool. If a third stand is added to the catalogue, this page should be rewritten rather than extended, and the selection criteria above should be applied to it rather than bolted on. Products covered: - MOFT Z 5-in-1 Sit-Stand Desk (https://abackreviews.com/products/moft-z-5-in-1-sit-stand-desk, recommended): It folds flat to 1.3 cm, raises a laptop to 25 cm through three tilt angles and weighs 960 g, where the mStand is a fixed 150 mm block that never changes height. - Rain Design mStand (https://abackreviews.com/products/rain-design-mstand, recommended): It is a fixed 150 mm block of aluminium at 1.46 kg that requires an external keyboard, where the MOFT Z folds flat to 1.3 cm and tilts through three angles. **The criteria this shortlist uses** Four recorded values decide the order. Whether you still type on the laptop keyboard, taken from the recorded keyboard access. Whether the height changes, taken from the recorded adjustable value and the recorded heights. What happens when you leave the desk, taken from the recorded folded thickness and the recorded weight. And what the stand is made of, taken from the recorded material and the recorded load capacity. **Best for typing on the laptop: the MOFT Z** It records a folded thickness of 1.3 cm, half an inch, a weight of 960 g, 33.7 oz, and a height of 25 cm, 10 inches, standing, with 12 cm at 25 degrees, 19.4 cm at 45 and 25 cm at 60. Adjustable is recorded as yes, three tilt angles and a standing height, and keyboard access is recorded as working as a riser with an external keyboard. **Best for a fixed desk: the Rain Design mStand** It records a fixed height of 150 mm, 5.9 inches, aluminium as its material with aluminium body in its recorded feature list, a weight of 1.46 kg, 3 pounds, and laptop support as fitting all MacBooks and most notebooks. Adjustable is recorded as no, and keyboard access is recorded as requiring an external keyboard. **This category holds only these two stands** The laptop stand category is the smallest in the catalogue, and these two products are the complete set of it rather than a selection from a larger pool. The Rain Design mStand is the fixed riser that requires an external keyboard, and the MOFT Z is the folding sit-stand that raises to 25 cm through three angles and folds flat to 1.3 cm. Questions: - **Which laptop stand folds flat?** The MOFT Z. It records a folded thickness of 1.3 cm, half an inch, and folds flat appears in its recorded feature list. The mStand records no folded thickness, because it is a fixed block of aluminium. - **Do I need an external keyboard for a laptop stand?** With the Rain Design mStand, yes. Its recorded keyboard access is that it requires an external keyboard. The MOFT Z records keyboard access as working as a riser with an external keyboard, and its lower arrangements keep the machine's own keyboard in reach. - **What is the difference between the MOFT Z and the Rain Design mStand?** The MOFT Z folds flat to 1.3 cm, raises a laptop to 25 cm through three tilt angles and weighs 960 g. The mStand is a fixed 150 mm block of aluminium at 1.46 kg that never changes height. - **Which laptop stand is adjustable?** The MOFT Z. Its recorded adjustable value is yes, three tilt angles and a standing height, with recorded heights of 12 cm, 19.4 cm and 25 cm. The mStand records adjustable as no, and one fixed height of 150 mm. - **How tall is the Rain Design mStand?** The recorded height is 150 mm, 5.9 inches, and it is fixed. The recorded width and depth are 253 by 190 mm, 10 by 7.5 inches, and the recorded weight is 1.46 kg, 3 pounds. - **How many laptop stands are in this category?** Two, and they are the whole category as the catalogue currently records it. The Rain Design mStand is a fixed riser that needs an external keyboard, and the MOFT Z is a folding sit-stand with three tilt angles. ### Best Mechanical Keyboards For Programming, Picked By Use Case URL: https://abackreviews.com/best/best-mechanical-keyboards-for-programming Which mechanical keyboard suits programming depends on whether you plan to remap keys, want a clear desk, or work in a shared room. Programming keyboards get ranked against each other constantly, and the ranking is usually presented as if one board is right for everyone. The recorded data for the three boards covered here does not support a single winner, because each one answers a different question. What it does support is a shortlist where every entry has a named criterion behind it. This shortlist uses five criteria: whether the switches can be replaced without soldering, how deeply the board can be remapped in software, how much desk space the layout takes, whether the board works wired and wirelessly, and what the case is made of and how heavy it is. Each pick below is placed against the criterion it satisfies. The order of the list is a reading order, not a quality score, and nothing here was measured on a desk. ## The Keychron Q1, placed for modification The Q1 is first because it is the recorded option for a programmer who expects to change the board's switches later. Hot-swappable switches appear in its recorded feature list, so the switch sockets can be opened and the switches replaced without soldering. Its recorded layout is 75 percent, which keeps a right-hand column and the arrow keys while giving up the number pad. The recorded case material is aluminium and the recorded weight is 1,825 g. The mass is the same fact seen twice. It is what keeps the board planted on a desk, and it is what makes it the heaviest of the three and the least suited to a bag. ## The Keychron K8 Pro, placed for remapping The K8 Pro is second for the remapping it records. Its recorded remapping software is QMK and VIA, and no remapping software is recorded for either of the other two boards in this shortlist, so on this single criterion it is the only one of the three with an answer. Its recorded hot-swappable switches are recorded as yes, and its recorded layout is tenkeyless, so it clears the desk space a full-size board would occupy while keeping a dedicated function row. The trade is the case. The recorded description places the plastic body at a lower price than a full aluminium board, and a lower mass is also a lighter board to move between two places. ## The Logitech MX Keys Mini, placed for a shared office The third entry needs a caveat, because it is not a mechanical board. The recorded description calls it a compact low-profile wireless keyboard with backlit spherical keycaps, and no mechanical switch specification is recorded for it. Its recorded layout is a compact form with a function row, its recorded connectivity is Bluetooth and Logi Bolt, and multi-device switching appears in its recorded feature list. It is on this list because a noise measurement is recorded for none of the three boards, so any claim about quietness rests on structure rather than on a measurement. If your objection to mechanical keyboards is noise, the board whose recorded specifications describe no mechanical switch is the one to look at. That is a structural argument, and this page does not dress it up as a sound measurement. ## Where the trade-offs sit The trade-offs are about layout and mass rather than about features. Both record hot-swappable switches and a layout without a number pad, so either one means giving up number entry permanently. They differ on connectivity: the K8 Pro records USB-C wired and Bluetooth, while the Q1 as currently listed is wired. The Q1 gives up a dedicated function row as well, because 75 percent compresses it, while the K8 Pro keeps one. The MX Keys Mini records a battery life of up to 5 months with the backlighting off and USB-C charging, and records no weight at all, so its portability is described in the catalogue rather than quantified. Its multi-device switching is a real convenience for someone working across two machines, and it is not a substitute for the remapping the two mechanical boards record. ## What this catalogue cannot settle There is no recorded switch travel, sound level, latency figure, polling rate or price for any of these three boards. That means this shortlist cannot rank them on typing quality, and it cannot tell you what any of them cost. It can tell you which layout you are buying, whether the switches can be replaced without a soldering iron, what the remapping software is, and how the board is built. For a programming keyboard, those are the decisions that change what you can do with the board later. Products covered: - Keychron K8 Pro (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-k8-pro, recommended): The recorded layout is tenkeyless and the recorded remapping software is QMK and VIA, so the board clears desk space and records the deepest remapping layer of the three on this list. - Keychron Q1 (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-q1, recommended): Hot-swappable switches are in the recorded feature list and the recorded layout is 75 percent, so the switches can be replaced and the layout remapped without soldering while the board keeps a compact footprint. - Logitech MX Keys Mini (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-keys-mini, recommended): The recorded description describes a compact low-profile board with no mechanical switch specification attached to it, which is why it is the shared-office option when noise is the concern. **The criteria this shortlist uses** Five criteria decide the order. Whether the switches can be replaced without soldering, measured by the recorded hot-swappable switch support. How deeply the board can be remapped in software, measured by the recorded remapping software. How much desk the layout takes, measured by the recorded layout. Whether the board works wired and wirelessly, measured by the recorded connectivity. And what the board is built from and how heavy it is, measured by the recorded case material and recorded weight. Each product below is placed against the criterion it satisfies, not against the other two on a single score. **Best for modification: the Keychron Q1** The recorded feature list for the Q1 includes hot-swappable switches, so a programmer who expects to try switch types can replace them without a soldering iron. The recorded layout is 75 percent, which keeps the arrow keys and right-hand column while removing the number pad, and the recorded case material is aluminium at a recorded weight of 1,825 g. Those four recorded values are what place it at the top of this shortlist for modification. **What the Q1 asks you to give up** The aluminium case and the recorded 1,825 g weight are one fact seen from two sides. The mass keeps the board stable on a desk and makes it the heaviest of the three. The recorded 75 percent layout also removes the number pad, and a board without one cannot be extended to add one later. **Best tenkeyless: the Keychron K8 Pro** The recorded remapping software is QMK and VIA, and no remapping software is recorded for either of the other two boards here, so on this criterion it is the only one of the three with a recorded answer. The recorded layout is tenkeyless and the recorded hot-swappable switches are recorded as yes, which clears the desk without giving up the ability to change the switches. **What the K8 Pro asks you to give up** The recorded case material is plastic, so it does not carry the mass and planted feel of the Q1's aluminium case. The tenkeyless layout removes the number pad but keeps a dedicated function row, which is the opposite trade to the Q1's compressed 75 percent layout. **Best for quiet offices: the Logitech MX Keys Mini** The recorded description calls it a compact low-profile wireless keyboard with backlit spherical keycaps, and no mechanical switch specification is recorded for it. No noise measurement is recorded for any of the three boards, so this position rests on the structure of the board rather than on a measured sound level. **What the MX Keys Mini asks you to give up** Multi-device switching and a recorded battery life of up to 5 months with the backlighting off are conveniences rather than a substitute for the remapping the two mechanical boards record. The recorded charging is USB-C and no weight is recorded, so its portability is described in the catalogue rather than quantified. **How to read the order** The order is a reading order, not a quality score. A programmer who plans to change switches wants the first entry, a programmer who wants to remap in software wants the second, and a programmer in a shared room who does not want mechanical switches at all wants the third. Two of these three boards would be the wrong choice for the situation the third one wins. Questions: - **Which of these keyboards is easiest to remap for programming?** The Keychron K8 Pro. Its recorded remapping software is QMK and VIA, and no remapping software is recorded for the Keychron Q1 or the Logitech MX Keys Mini. If you want to change key behaviour in software rather than by changing hardware, that is the board to look at. - **Can I change the switches on the Keychron Q1 without soldering?** Yes. Hot-swappable switches are in the Q1's recorded feature list, which means the switch sockets can be opened and the switches replaced without a soldering iron. That is the single feature that turns a mechanical keyboard from a fixed purchase into one you can change later. - **Do any of these three keyboards have a number pad?** None of them. The Q1 records a 75 percent layout, the K8 Pro records tenkeyless, and the MX Keys Mini records a compact layout with a function row. A keyboard without a number pad cannot be extended to add one, so anyone entering figures all day needs a different board. - **Is the Logitech MX Keys Mini a mechanical keyboard?** The recorded description calls it a compact low-profile wireless keyboard with backlit spherical keycaps, and no mechanical switch specification is recorded for it. It appears on this shortlist as the low-profile option rather than as a mechanical board, and no noise measurement is recorded for it or for either of the others. - **Does the Logitech MX Keys Mini switch between computers?** Yes. Multi-device switching is in its recorded feature list, and its recorded connectivity is Bluetooth and Logi Bolt. The recorded battery life is up to 5 months with the backlighting off, and the recorded charging method is USB-C. - **How heavy is the Keychron Q1 compared with the other boards?** The recorded weight for the Q1 is 1,825 g, which is what keeps an aluminium case planted on a desk. No weight is recorded for the MX Keys Mini, and the K8 Pro's recorded description places its plastic case at a lower price than a full aluminium board rather than giving a figure, so the three cannot be compared on weight alone. ### Best Portable SSDs For Photos And Video, Picked By Capacity And Ruggedness URL: https://abackreviews.com/best/best-portable-ssds-for-photos-and-video Both drives record the same interface, the same peak speeds and the same 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB capacities. Ruggedness is what separates them. Two portable SSDs sit in the storage category of this catalogue, and they are close enough relatives that a shortlist of them comes down to a single question: what the body has to survive. A shortlist usually spreads its picks across different strengths and there is no room to do that here. The Samsung T7 and the Samsung T7 Shield record the same interface, the same two speed figures, the same three capacities, the same encryption and the same warranty. The differences the catalogue records are the drop rating, the water rating, and the size and weight of the case, so each pick is placed against the one criterion that separates the two. Every value here comes from the specifications recorded against each drive, and each of those carries the manufacturer page it was read from. No drive was handled for this page, so nothing below describes a transfer rate in practice, a durability result or a price. ## What the two drives share Both record the USB 3.2 Gen 2 interface at 10 Gbps, a read speed of up to 1,050 MB/sec, a write speed of up to 1,000 MB/sec, capacities of 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB, AES 256-bit hardware encryption and a three year limited warranty. Hardware encryption is in the recorded feature list for both drives. That shared record shapes a photo and video workflow in a specific way. The recorded capacity range is 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB for each drive, so the capacity choice is about how long you want to carry before you offload, and not a calculation this catalogue can make, because the bitrate of your own footage is not recorded here. Whichever capacity you settle on, the recorded ceiling of the connection is the same on both drives. They are not competing on how fast they are. They are competing on what happens to them when they are dropped, splashed or left in a vehicle. The two speed figures need a qualification. Both are recorded as up to values, and neither drive records a sustained write figure. Copying a shoot is a sustained write, so this catalogue cannot tell you how long a batch of footage takes to move across the link. ## What the Shield adds The Samsung T7 Shield records a water resistance of IP 65 and a drop resistance of up to 3 m. The plain T7 records a drop resistance of up to 2 m and no water resistance figure at all. Those two entries are the whole reason the ruggedised version exists. IP 65 is a code rather than a promise of submersion. The record adds no immersion time, no seal or cap specification and no statement about the drive after it has been in water. What the catalogue holds is the rating the manufacturer states. The Shield also records the operating systems it supports: Windows 7 or later, macOS 10.10 or later and Android Lollipop or later. The plain T7 records no operating system list in this catalogue, and its connector is recorded as USB Type-C while the Shield's connector is not recorded. ## What you give up by paying more The Shield is recorded at 98 g and 59 by 88 by 13 mm. The plain T7 records 85 by 57 by 8 mm, the smaller and flatter object, and a weight that sits below 98 g on both of its recorded figures, though the catalogue marks that entry as conflicting. None of that is a serious cost for a drive that lives on a desk. It is a cost for a drive that travels, and it is paid in grams and in pocket space rather than in lost features, because the interface, the two speed figures, the capacities, the encryption and the warranty are recorded identically for both. Price is not recorded for either drive, so the extra cost of the ruggedised body cannot be put in numbers here. That gap is the buyer's to close at the point of purchase. ## What the record does not settle No price and no availability figure is recorded for either drive. No sustained write figure is recorded, and both speed figures are peaks. The IP 65 rating carries no recorded immersion time. The plain T7's weight is marked conflicting in the catalogue. The Shield's connector and operating system list differ in what is recorded from the plain T7's, which is a gap in the record rather than a difference in the drives. The catalogue holds only two portable SSDs in this category, which is not enough for a wide ranked list. These two are placed against the criteria the record supports. ## Which one to take If the drive travels to a site, a vehicle or anywhere with water or a drop in its future, the recorded IP 65 and 3 m ratings make the Shield the pick, and it keeps every recorded specification the plain T7 has. If the drive lives beside a laptop or in a padded pocket, the plain T7's recorded 2 m drop rating, smaller body and lower recorded weight are the ones that matter. Both records point at the same interface and the same peak speeds, so this is a choice about the body and about what the extra protection is worth to you, not about performance. Products covered: - Samsung T7 Portable SSD (https://abackreviews.com/products/samsung-t7-portable-ssd, recommended): It records a drop resistance of up to 2 m and the smaller 85 by 57 by 8 mm body with a recorded weight below the Shield's 98 g, and it keeps the same USB 3.2 Gen 2 interface, the same peak read and write speeds and the same 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB capacities. - Samsung T7 Shield (https://abackreviews.com/products/samsung-t7-shield, recommended): It records an IP 65 water resistance rating and a drop resistance of up to 3 m at a recorded 98 g, the strongest recorded protection on this shortlist, while keeping the same interface, speeds, capacities and encryption as the plain T7. **The criteria this shortlist uses** Five criteria decide the order. The recorded drop resistance, which is the distance the manufacturer states the drive survives. The recorded water resistance, which the plain T7 does not have at all. The recorded weight and dimensions, which decide what carrying the drive costs. The recorded capacities, which decide how long a shoot can stay on the drive before it is offloaded. And the recorded interface and the two speed figures, read together with what the record does not settle about them. Each drive below is placed against the criterion it satisfies, not against the other on a single score. **Best for rough handling: the Samsung T7 Shield** The recorded water resistance is IP 65 and the recorded drop resistance is up to 3 m, against a recorded 2 m drop rating and no water rating on the plain T7. It is the only drive on this shortlist with a water rating recorded against it, and the protection arrives with the same USB 3.2 Gen 2 interface, the same two peak speed figures, the same 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB capacities and the same AES 256-bit hardware encryption as the drive it is based on. **What the T7 Shield asks you to give up** A recorded 98 g at 59 by 88 by 13 mm, which makes it the larger and heavier object of the two, and a price difference that the catalogue does not record. On a desk the extra mass buys nothing, because the interface, the speed figures, the capacities, the encryption and the warranty are recorded identically for both drives. **Best for the lighter bag: the Samsung T7** The recorded drop resistance is up to 2 m and the recorded dimensions are 85 by 57 by 8 mm, the smaller and flatter body of the two, with a recorded weight that sits below the Shield's 98 g on both of the figures the catalogue holds for it. The recorded interface, read speed, write speed, capacities, encryption and warranty are the same as the Shield's, so this position rests on portability and not on any recorded performance difference. **What the T7 asks you to give up** The recorded 2 m drop rating, which is a metre less than the Shield's recorded 3 m, and the absence of any recorded water resistance figure. That is the cost of the smaller body. The Shield's recorded IP 65 rating and recorded 3 m drop rating are the two entries a buyer whose drive gets wet or falls from height should look at first. **How to read the order** The order is a reading order, not a quality score. A photographer who shoots on location and needs the drive to survive the site wants the first entry. A photographer who moves files between a desk and a laptop and wants the smaller object wants the second. Two entries is a short shortlist, and the catalogue holds no third portable SSD to widen it. **What this shortlist does not settle** No price, no availability figure and no sustained write figure is recorded for either drive. Both speed figures are peaks, the IP 65 code carries no recorded immersion time, and the plain T7's weight entry is marked as conflicting in the catalogue. Everything on this page is a specification, not a measured result. Questions: - **Which of these portable SSDs is rated for water?** The Samsung T7 Shield. Its recorded water resistance is IP 65. The plain Samsung T7 records no water resistance figure at all in this catalogue, so it is the only drive of the two with a water rating recorded against it. - **How far can each of these drives be dropped?** The T7 Shield records a drop resistance of up to 3 m and the plain T7 records a drop resistance of up to 2 m. Both are the distances the manufacturer states, and neither is a figure taken from a test performed here. - **Are these two drives the same speed?** On the record, yes. Both record the USB 3.2 Gen 2 interface at 10 Gbps, a read speed of up to 1,050 MB/sec and a write speed of up to 1,000 MB/sec. Both sets of figures are peaks, and neither drive records a sustained write rate. - **Which of these drives is lighter to carry?** The plain Samsung T7. The Shield records 98 g, while the T7 records 72 g on the datasheet and 2.0 oz on the product page, an entry the catalogue marks as conflicting, and both of those figures sit below the Shield's. - **What capacities do these portable SSDs come in?** Both drives record the same three capacities: 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB. How much footage that holds depends on the bitrate of the material, which this catalogue does not record, so the capacity choice is about how long you want to carry before you offload. - **Do both of these drives have hardware encryption?** Yes. Both record AES 256-bit hardware encryption, and hardware encryption appears in the recorded feature list for each drive. Both also record the same three year limited warranty. ### Best USB-C hubs for MacBook URL: https://abackreviews.com/best/best-usb-c-hubs-for-macbook Three options: a portable bus-powered hub for occasional expansion, and two powered Thunderbolt docks for a permanent desk. This shortlist answers a specific question: how do you expand a laptop that has too few ports. The answer depends on whether you need a portable hub or a permanent desk dock, so both are represented. ## Selection criteria - **Bandwidth:** whether the product provides Thunderbolt bandwidth or shares USB bandwidth across ports. - **Power delivery:** how much wattage reaches the laptop after the hub or dock draws its own power. - **Port mix:** whether the ports you actually need exist, and whether they can be used at the same time. - **Power source:** bus powered for portability, or externally powered for a fixed desk. - **Display support:** how many displays the product can drive and at what resolution. - **Portability:** whether the product is realistically something you carry. ## How to read this list Prices, firmware and port behaviour change. Treat everything here as a starting point for your own research, and confirm the current specification on the manufacturer page before buying. Products covered: - Anker 555 USB-C Hub (https://abackreviews.com/products/anker-555-usb-c-hub, recommended): Best portable option. Bus powered, covers the essential ports, and travels easily. Accepts shared bandwidth and limited laptop charging. - CalDigit TS3 Plus (https://abackreviews.com/products/caldigit-ts3-plus, recommended): The cheaper powered dock. A Thunderbolt 3 generation dock with fifteen ports, up to 87 W of charging and dual 4K output, for a desk where Thunderbolt 4 bandwidth is not needed. - CalDigit TS4 Thunderbolt Station (https://abackreviews.com/products/caldigit-ts4, recommended): Best for a permanent desk. Powered Thunderbolt dock with more bandwidth, more ports and high-wattage laptop charging, at a higher cost and no portability. **Bandwidth** Whether the product provides Thunderbolt bandwidth or shares USB bandwidth across its ports. **Power delivery** How much wattage reaches the laptop after the hub draws its own power and the power used by attached devices. **Port mix** Whether the ports you need exist and can be used at the same time. **Power source** Bus powered for portability, externally powered for a fixed desk. **Display support** How many displays the product drives, and at which resolution and refresh rate. **The dock for a desk that does not need Thunderbolt 4** The TS3 Plus records Thunderbolt 3, fifteen ports, up to 87 W of laptop charging and two displays at up to 4K 60 Hz. It takes a Thunderbolt 3 or Thunderbolt 4 port, so it works with a current laptop. It sits below the TS4 on bandwidth and charging, and the manufacturer states that Apple M1 and M2 laptops support only one external display through it. **Two different jobs** The portable hub and the desk dock are not competitors. They solve the same problem in different situations, which is why both appear rather than one being ranked above the other. Questions: - **Do I need Thunderbolt or is USB enough?** It depends on what you connect. If you need one display, a card reader and a few peripherals, a bus-powered USB hub is adequate. If you need two displays, fast storage and high-wattage charging at once, Thunderbolt is the practical option. - **Why does my laptop charge slowly through a hub?** A hub consumes some of the delivered power for itself and for attached devices. The wattage the laptop receives is lower than the input rating, so a high-wattage charger may still leave the laptop charging slowly under load. ### Best USB Microphones For Streaming, Picked By Element And Pattern URL: https://abackreviews.com/best/best-usb-microphones-for-streaming The microphone choice is mostly an element choice. A dynamic microphone forgives an untreated room, while a condenser gives more options in a quiet one. Most USB microphone advice starts with the brand, and the recorded data here says the decision starts earlier, with the element type. A condenser microphone and a dynamic microphone behave differently in a room, and that difference comes before the microphone is connected to anything. The two USB microphones in this catalogue sit on opposite sides of that line, so this shortlist places each one against the criterion it satisfies. The criteria used are the recorded element type, the recorded pickup patterns, the recorded connection path, and whether the microphone has built-in headphone monitoring. The order is a reading order rather than a quality ranking, and the reason for that is given below. ## The Shure MV7, placed for a room you have not treated The Shure MV7 records a dynamic element type and a cardioid pickup pattern described as unidirectional. A dynamic element is less sensitive to the room around it than a condenser, so it is the microphone of the two to reach for when the space has not been treated. That is an interpretation of the recorded element type rather than a measurement, because no sensitivity figure is recorded for either microphone. Its recorded connection is USB and XLR, and XLR output appears in its recorded feature list. That is what leaves the option of moving to an audio interface later without buying a different microphone, and it is why it takes the first position in a list that is otherwise about a single USB cable. ## The Blue Yeti, placed for the most flexible patterns The Blue Yeti records a condenser element and four selectable pickup patterns: cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo. Switchable pickup patterns appear in its recorded feature list, and its recorded connection is USB, with headphone monitoring recorded as built in. It is second because the recorded pattern list is the only specification in this catalogue that lets one microphone change what it listens to. A microphone that can be pointed at a single voice and a microphone that can also be pointed at a room, at two sources or at a stereo pair are not doing the same job. ## Where the trade-offs sit The trade-offs run in both directions. The Yeti's condenser element captures more of the room, which is why its recorded intended user is someone recording in a quiet room, and the MV7's single cardioid pattern is its recorded limit. The Yeti's recorded connection is USB only, so the upgrade path to an interface that the MV7 offers is not open to it. Headphone monitoring does not separate them. Both record built-in headphone monitoring, so neither needs a separate monitoring path to hear yourself while recording, and neither can be distinguished from the other on that basis. ## What this catalogue cannot settle The catalogue records no sensitivity, no self-noise figure, no frequency response, no gain range and no price for either microphone, and it records no measurement of how either one handles a noisy room. Those are the figures that would settle a choice made purely on specifications. What the catalogue does settle is the shape of the choice: a dynamic element that forgives an untreated room, or a condenser with switchable patterns in a quiet one. If you record in an untreated room, the order on this page holds. If you record in a room you have treated, it does not, and the pattern list becomes the more useful criterion. Products covered: - Blue Yeti (https://abackreviews.com/products/blue-yeti, recommended): It is the only microphone here recording four selectable pickup patterns, cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo, and switchable pickup patterns are in its recorded feature list. - Shure MV7 (https://abackreviews.com/products/shure-mv7, recommended): Its recorded element type is dynamic, which is less sensitive to the room than the recorded condenser element of the other microphone, and the recorded USB and XLR connection leaves a path to an interface later. **The criteria this shortlist uses** Four criteria decide the order. The recorded element type, which decides how much of the room the microphone picks up along with the voice. The recorded pickup patterns, which decide which directions it listens in. The recorded connection path, which decides whether the microphone can move to a different setup later. And built-in headphone monitoring, which decides whether you can hear yourself while recording. Each product below is placed against the criterion it satisfies, and the order does not claim that one microphone is better in general. **Best for untreated rooms: the Shure MV7** The recorded element type is dynamic and the recorded pickup pattern is cardioid, described as unidirectional. A dynamic element is less sensitive to room reflections than a condenser, which is why this is the microphone to reach for when the space has not been treated. The recorded connection is also USB and XLR, so it can move to an audio interface later. **What the MV7 asks you to give up** A single cardioid pattern is the recorded limit, and a dynamic element needs more gain than a condenser to reach the same level. The catalogue records no sensitivity figure, so the amount of gain needed is not something we can quantify here. The XLR option answers a later problem rather than today's. **Most flexible patterns: the Blue Yeti** The recorded element type is condenser and the recorded pickup patterns are cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo, with switchable pickup patterns in the recorded feature list. That pattern list is the only recorded specification here that lets one microphone change what it listens to. **What the Blue Yeti asks you to give up** A condenser element captures more of the room, which is why the recorded intended user specifies a quiet room. The recorded connection is USB only, so the upgrade path to an audio interface that the MV7 offers is not open here. The integrated stand is recorded as part of the product rather than as an accessory. **How to read the order** The two microphones are separated by one recorded specification and one design decision. A room you have not treated is harder to record in than a room you have, so the microphone that forgives it leads. In a treated room the order would not hold, and the pattern list would become the deciding criterion instead. Questions: - **What is the difference between a condenser and a dynamic microphone?** The element type decides how sensitive the microphone is to sound in the room as well as to the voice. The Blue Yeti records a condenser element and the Shure MV7 records a dynamic element. A dynamic element captures less of the room, which matters in a space you have not treated. - **Which microphone is better for a room with echo?** The Shure MV7, because its recorded element type is dynamic. A dynamic element is less sensitive to room reflections than a condenser, so it suits a space that has not been treated. No noise or sensitivity measurement is recorded for either microphone, so this is a reading of the element type rather than a measurement. - **Can the Blue Yeti change its pickup pattern?** Yes. Its recorded pickup patterns are cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo, and switchable pickup patterns are in the recorded feature list. The Shure MV7 records cardioid only, described as unidirectional. - **Can I use the Shure MV7 with an audio interface?** Yes. The MV7 records its connection as USB and XLR, and XLR output appears in its recorded feature list, so it can move to an interface later without changing microphone. The Blue Yeti records a USB connection only. - **Do both of these microphones have headphone monitoring?** Yes. Headphone monitoring is recorded as built in for both the Shure MV7 and the Blue Yeti, so neither needs a separate monitoring path to hear yourself while recording. That criterion does not separate the two. - **Which of these microphones can record in stereo?** The Blue Yeti. Stereo is one of its four recorded pickup patterns, alongside cardioid, bidirectional and omnidirectional. The Shure MV7 records a single cardioid pattern described as unidirectional. ### Best Webcams For Video Calls, Picked By Resolution And Control URL: https://abackreviews.com/best/best-webcams-for-video-calls A 4K camera, a current 1080p camera and a discontinued one, each picked for a named criterion. A webcam shortlist usually collapses into a single winner, and the recorded data for the two cameras in this catalogue does not support that. One records 4K capture, autofocus and infrared support. The other records a 1080p image and manual control over exposure. Both are defensible choices for video calls, and they are defensible for different reasons. Four criteria are used here: the highest resolution and frame rate the camera records, how the camera focuses, how much of the image the user can set by hand, and how the camera is fixed to the desk and whether it can support system sign-in. ## The Logitech Brio 4K, placed for 4K The Brio 4K records up to 4K at 30 fps and 1080p at 60 fps, records autofocus, records an adjustable field of view and records infrared support as yes. Its recorded description links that infrared support to Windows Hello style platform authentication, which is a specific job the other camera on this list does not record. Its recorded intended user is someone who needs 4K capture or platform authentication and is willing to pay for it. The catalogue records no price, so that part of the decision has to be made at the point of purchase rather than from this page. ## The Elgato Facecam, placed for manual control The Elgato Facecam records 1080p at 60 fps, a fixed focus prime lens and a field of view adjustable in software, and manual exposure control appears in its recorded feature list. Its recorded intended user wants manual control over a 1080p camera for streaming and calls, and the recorded mounting is a monitor mount and a tripod thread. For a stream or a call where you want to set the image once and leave it alone, that set of recorded specifications is the reason it is here. ## Where the trade-offs sit The trade-off is resolution against control, and it is not a straight line. The Brio 4K records the higher ceiling, but manual exposure control is not among its recorded features, so on this criterion it has less recorded going for it than the camera with the lower ceiling. The Facecam records the software control and the fixed focus, and a fixed focus means the camera is not adjusting itself to a subject who moves toward it. Which matters more depends on where the camera is and whether the subject moves. Autofocus and infrared are not the same trade at all. The Brio 4K records autofocus and infrared support, and the Facecam records neither, so the Facecam is the simpler camera by those two measures and the Brio is the more capable one. ## What this catalogue cannot settle No image quality judgement can be made from a resolution line. The catalogue does not record a lens aperture for either camera, a low light figure, a microphone specification, a price, or what the fixed focus prime on the Facecam does at the edge of the frame. It records what each camera is, not how the picture looks. If your decision depends on how a camera behaves in a dim room or how it handles a bright window behind you, that decision needs a source this catalogue does not currently hold. Products covered: - Elgato Facecam (https://abackreviews.com/products/elgato-facecam, recommended): A fixed focus 1080p camera with manual software control. The manufacturer has discontinued it, so it is listed for reference rather than as something to buy. - Logitech Brio 4K (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-brio-4k, recommended): It is the only camera here recorded above 1080p, with up to 4K at 30 fps and 1080p at 60 fps, plus recorded autofocus and recorded infrared support for platform sign-in. - Logitech C920s PRO HD Webcam (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-c920s-pro-hd-webcam, recommended): The current fixed 1080p camera we cover. It records 1080p at 30 fps, a 78 degree field of view, autofocus with a glass lens, a stereo microphone and a physical privacy shutter. **The criteria this shortlist uses** Four criteria decide the order. Capture resolution and frame rate, taken from the recorded resolution. Focus behaviour, taken from the recorded autofocus and lens specifications. Manual control, taken from the recorded exposure and field of view specifications. And mounting and sign-in, taken from the recorded mounting specification and the recorded infrared support. Each product below is placed against the criterion it satisfies, and the order does not claim that one camera is better in general. **Best for 4K: the Logitech Brio 4K** The recorded resolution is up to 4K at 30 fps and 1080p at 60 fps, the recorded focus is autofocus, the recorded field of view is adjustable and the recorded infrared support is yes. It is the only camera of the two that records 4K capture, and that infrared support is the specification behind Windows Hello style authentication. **What the Brio 4K asks you to give up** Its recorded advantage is resolution and infrared support, and the recorded cost is that manual exposure control is not among its recorded features. Autofocus is recorded, and whether a self-focusing camera suits a fixed setup or a subject who moves is a judgement the specification alone cannot settle. **Best for calls: the Logitech C920s** The C920s records 1080p at 30 fps, a 78 degree diagonal field of view, autofocus with a glass lens, a stereo microphone with a range up to 1 m and a physical privacy shutter. It is the only one of the three whose shutter you can close without unplugging it. It stops at 1080p at 30 fps, where the Brio records 4K at 30 fps and 1080p at 60 fps. **What the C920s asks you to give up** The recorded frame rate is 30 fps at every resolution, so a fast movement is held at a lower frame rate than the Brio records. The recorded field of view is a fixed 78 degrees, where the Brio records three presets. The page does not state a USB version, only a USB-A port, and it does not state whether software is required, so neither is claimed here. **Best manual control: the Elgato Facecam** The recorded feature list includes manual exposure control, and the recorded field of view is adjustable in software. The recorded resolution is 1080p at 60 fps and the recorded lens is a fixed focus prime. For a setup you configure once and then leave alone, that combination of recorded values is the reason it takes the second position. **What the Facecam asks you to give up** The recorded ceiling is 1080p at 60 fps, and the recorded lens is a fixed focus prime, so a subject who moves toward the camera sits outside what the specification covers. The recorded software control is a benefit only if you use it, and it asks for setup time that a simpler camera would not. **How to read the order** Two entries and two different jobs. The 4K option leads for a buyer who needs 4K capture or platform authentication, and the 1080p option leads for a buyer who wants to set the image manually. Neither is a general winner, and the recorded specifications do not support one. **One of these cameras has been discontinued** The Elgato Facecam product page states that the camera has been discontinued. It stays on the site because the recorded specifications are still the honest reference for a fixed focus 1080p camera, but it is not a current recommendation and it should not be bought new. Questions: - **Which webcam records in 4K?** The Logitech Brio 4K. Its recorded resolution is up to 4K at 30 fps, and 1080p at 60 fps. The Elgato Facecam records 1080p at 60 fps, so it is the only camera here with a recorded 4K option. - **Does the Brio 4K support Windows Hello sign-in?** The Brio 4K records infrared support as yes, and the recorded description links that to Windows Hello style platform authentication. The Elgato Facecam has no infrared support recorded, so this catalogue cannot say whether it works for that purpose. - **Which webcam gives more manual control?** The Elgato Facecam. Manual exposure control is in its recorded feature list and its field of view is recorded as adjustable in software. The Brio 4K records an adjustable field of view, but manual exposure control is not among its recorded features. - **Does the Elgato Facecam autofocus?** No autofocus is recorded for it. The recorded lens is a fixed focus prime, which is a design decision for a fixed setup rather than a gap in the data. The Brio 4K by contrast records autofocus. - **How do I mount these webcams?** The Elgato Facecam records a monitor mount and a tripod thread, which are two different ways to fix a camera to a desk. No mounting specification is recorded for the Brio 4K, so check the manufacturer before you plan the placement. - **Can these webcams be used for streaming as well as calls?** Both are recorded for streaming and calls. The Elgato Facecam's recorded intended user wants manual control over a 1080p camera for streaming and calls, while the Brio 4K records infrared authentication support, which matters for signing in rather than for the stream itself. ## Buying guides ### How To Choose A Laptop Stand: The Decisions Before The Product URL: https://abackreviews.com/guides/how-to-choose-a-laptop-stand The decisions behind a laptop stand, with the fixed-height Rain Design mStand used as the worked example. It is the only stand this catalogue covers. A laptop stand is one of the simplest purchases in this catalogue and one of the easiest to get wrong, because the decision that matters is made before you look at any product. Decide what the stand has to let you do, and only then decide what shape it should be. One stand is currently covered here: the Rain Design mStand. It is used throughout as the worked example because its recorded specifications describe one clear approach, the fixed-height approach. No other laptop stand has recorded data in this catalogue, so this page teaches the decisions rather than presenting a comparison of one product as a shortlist. ## The first decision: will you still type on the machine? This is the decision that rules stands in or out. A stand raises the screen, and a raised screen moves the keyboard out of comfortable reach unless you have somewhere else to put your hands. The Rain Design mStand records keyboard access as requiring an external keyboard. That single recorded line is what separates a stand for a desk with a separate keyboard from a stand for a laptop you type on, and it should be checked before any other specification, because it can end the search on its own. If you are still typing on the laptop, a raised screen is the wrong idea and the stand should not be bought yet. ## The second decision: does the height ever change? The next question is whether the height is fixed. A fixed height suits a desk that never changes: one chair, one desk, one laptop. A height that changes suits a shared desk, a laptop that moves between a home desk and a work desk, or a user who alternates between sitting upright and reclined. The mStand records its height as a fixed height and records adjustable as no. That is a deliberate design rather than a missing specification, and it is also the main thing a buyer might want to pay to avoid. The catalogue records the height as fixed but does not record a figure in millimetres, so check the manufacturer's own specification for the elevation before you order, and check the angle as well, because a fixed height that does not suit your eye level will not be fixed by the stand itself. ## The third decision: material, mass and the air under the machine The last decisions are about the object itself. The recorded material for the mStand is aluminium, and aluminium body is in its recorded feature list, which is what gives a stand its stiffness and its mass. The mStand records a weight of 1.46 kg, so it is the heavier of the two stands in this catalogue and the less portable of them. The recorded description of the mStand states that it raises the screen and improves airflow under the chassis. That is the practical argument for putting a laptop on a stand at all: the space under the machine is what lets heat move away from it. If your laptop runs hot on the desk, that gap is the point, and a stand chosen only for screen height will not address it. ## What this catalogue does not settle The catalogue holds one laptop stand, so this guide teaches the decisions rather than ranking products. It records a fixed height without a measurement, records aluminium without a mass, and records that an external keyboard is required. It does not record price, stability under load, which laptop sizes fit, or the surface finish. Those are questions for the manufacturer's own documentation, and they are also the reason to research this category further before treating one stand as a settled answer. Products covered: - Rain Design mStand (https://abackreviews.com/products/rain-design-mstand, recommended): Attached as the single recorded example of a fixed-height aluminium stand that requires an external keyboard, not as a comparison between stands. **Can you still type on the machine?** The stand has to fit the way you work, and the way you work is decided by whether your hands stay on the laptop keyboard. The Rain Design mStand records keyboard access as requiring an external keyboard, so it suits a desk with a separate keyboard and it does not suit a laptop you type on. Check this first, because it can end the search before any other specification is read. **Does the height ever change?** A desk that never changes can use a fixed height, and a desk that changes between home and work, or between sitting upright and reclined, cannot. The mStand records its height as a fixed height and records adjustable as no. The catalogue records no height in millimetres and no adjustment range for any stand, so the measurement has to come from the manufacturer rather than from a comparison. **Material, mass and the space under the machine** A stand has to be rigid enough to hold a laptop without wobbling, and light enough to move when you clear the desk. The recorded material for the mStand is aluminium, with aluminium body in its recorded feature list, and its recorded description states that it raises the screen and improves airflow under the chassis. No stability figure is recorded for it, so how it holds a heavy machine under a typing load is not something the data can answer. Questions: - **Do I need an external keyboard if I use a laptop stand?** If the stand raises the screen, then yes for most people. The Rain Design mStand records keyboard access as requiring an external keyboard, so it is a stand for typing on a separate keyboard rather than a stand for typing on the laptop itself. - **Can the Rain Design mStand be adjusted to different heights?** No. The recorded height is a fixed height and the recorded adjustable value is no. If your desk, chair or laptop position varies from day to day, a fixed stand removes the option of changing the height to match. - **How tall does the Rain Design mStand hold a laptop?** The catalogue records the height as 150 mm, or 5.9 inches, and records that it is fixed rather than adjustable. Check the manufacturer's own specification before you order, because a fixed height cannot be corrected later. - **What is the Rain Design mStand made of?** Aluminium. The recorded material is aluminium and aluminium body appears in the recorded feature list, which is the material behind the rigidity of a stand. The mStand records a weight of 1.46 kg, so this catalogue can compare its portability with the folding stand, and it is the heavier of the two. - **Does raising a laptop improve the airflow under it?** The recorded description of the Rain Design mStand states that it raises the screen and improves airflow under the chassis. The space beneath a raised chassis is what allows heat to move away, which is the practical reason to raise a laptop at all rather than only to move the screen. - **How many laptop stands are compared on this page?** One. The Rain Design mStand is the only laptop stand in this catalogue, so this guide teaches the decisions and uses that one stand as the worked example. We would rather publish one product's worth of guidance than present a shortlist we have no recorded data to support. ### How to choose a mechanical keyboard URL: https://abackreviews.com/guides/how-to-choose-a-mechanical-keyboard A category guide that explains what each keyboard decision actually costs you, without recommending a specific product. A mechanical keyboard is a set of trade-offs. This guide explains what each decision costs you, so you can evaluate any product rather than copying someone else list. ## Switches Linear switches move smoothly with no tactile bump. Tactile switches have a bump you can feel at the actuation point. Clicky switches add an audible click on top of the bump. Low-profile switches reduce travel and height. The practical question is not which is better but which is appropriate for your environment. Clicky switches in a shared office are a social decision as much as a technical one. ## Layout Full size includes a number pad. Tenkeyless removes it. A 75 percent layout removes the number pad and tightens the function row and arrow keys into a compact footprint. A 65 percent layout also compresses the arrow keys into the main cluster. If you enter numbers frequently, removing the number pad costs you real time. Decide this before you fall in love with a smaller board. ## Connectivity Wired is simplest and has no battery to manage. Bluetooth is convenient for switching between machines but can add latency. A 2.4 GHz dongle usually offers lower latency than Bluetooth while remaining wireless. If you use more than one computer, check how many devices the board can pair with and how the switch works. ## Hot swap and keycaps Hot-swap sockets let you change switches without soldering, which is the single most useful upgrade path on a first mechanical keyboard. Keycap material and profile change feel and sound, and keycaps are replaceable, so treat them as a lower-stakes decision. ## Software Remapping and macro support vary widely. Some boards use open firmware with a browser-based configurator, others require a vendor application, and some expect an account. If you plan to remap keys, confirm the tool works on your operating system before buying. ## Ergonomics Keyboard height and angle affect wrist position. A board with a tall case may benefit from a wrist rest. None of this substitutes for an appropriate desk and chair setup, and a keyboard alone will not correct a poor workstation. Products covered: - Keychron Q1 (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-q1, recommended): Included as an example of an aluminium, hot-swappable board. Not a ranking. Questions: - **Should I choose a smaller layout?** Only if you rarely use a number pad. Removing it saves desk space but costs time for anyone entering numbers regularly. - **Is hot swap worth it?** If you are unsure which switch you like, yes. Hot-swap sockets let you change switches without soldering, which turns a risky first purchase into a reversible one. ### How To Choose A Portable SSD: Capacity, Interface And Portability URL: https://abackreviews.com/guides/how-to-choose-a-portable-ssd The decisions behind a portable SSD, with the Samsung T7 as the worked example. It is the only drive this catalogue currently covers. A portable SSD looks like a simple purchase on paper, because the specification is short: an interface, a set of capacities, a weight and a claim about encryption. The decisions that matter are hidden inside those four lines, and one of them cannot be answered from this catalogue at all. One drive is currently covered here: the Samsung T7. It is used throughout as the worked example because its recorded specifications describe one clear approach. No other portable SSD has recorded data in this catalogue, so this page teaches the decisions and uses one drive to illustrate them, rather than presenting a comparison of one product as a shortlist. ## The first decision: capacity Capacity is the decision people get wrong in both directions. Too little means deleting footage or carrying a second drive. Too much means paying for space you never use and carrying something heavier than you need. The T7 records three capacities: 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB. That range is worth thinking about as a set of holding periods rather than as a number. A 1 TB drive is a working drive for one project. A 2 TB or 4 TB drive holds a season of work. A 4 TB drive is an archive that stays at home rather than one that travels. Which of those describes you is the decision, and it is not a technical one. ## The second decision: the interface, and what the catalogue does not record The second decision is the interface, and it has two halves. The first is whether the port matches the computer you will plug into. The T7 records its interface as USB 3.2 Gen 2. The physical connector is not recorded, so check the port on your computer rather than assuming one, because a USB-C socket and a USB-A socket are not the same thing. The second half is throughput, and here the catalogue runs out. The recorded sequential figures are up to 1,050 MB/sec read and up to 1,000 MB/sec write. The interface generation is recorded, which tells you the ceiling of the connection, but not what this drive achieves within it. Any guide that quotes a transfer rate for a drive whose speed figure is not recorded is quoting the manufacturer rather than the data, so if speed is your deciding factor, the manufacturer's own specification is the source you need. ## The third decision: portability and encryption Portability is the third decision, and it is the one with the clearest recorded number. The T7 records a weight of 72 g on the datasheet and 2.0 oz on the product page, and its recorded description calls it a pocket-sized external SSD with a metal body. That is a drive designed to be carried, and the recorded weight is the evidence for it. Encryption is the fourth. The T7 records hardware encryption support and lists hardware encryption in its recorded feature list. The catalogue does not record the encryption standard, how the key is managed, or whether the encryption can be switched off, so if the contents matter, read the manufacturer's documentation before you rely on it. Hardware encryption that you cannot operate correctly is worse than none, because it looks like protection. ## What this catalogue does not settle The catalogue holds one portable SSD, so this guide teaches the decisions rather than ranking products. It records capacities, an interface generation, a weight and a claim about encryption. It does not record sustained transfer speed, a physical connector type, a durability rating, a warranty or a price. Those remain open, and they are the reason to research this category further rather than to treat one drive as a settled answer. Products covered: - Samsung T7 Portable SSD (https://abackreviews.com/products/samsung-t7-portable-ssd, recommended): Attached as the single recorded example of a portable SSD, covering the recorded capacities, interface generation, weight and encryption support, not as a comparison. **Capacity** The first decision is how much you need to carry, expressed as a holding period rather than a number. The T7 records three capacities: 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB. Too little means deleting work or carrying a second drive, too much means paying for space you never use. Capacity is the one decision here that can be made entirely from recorded figures. **Interface and the speed question** The second decision is the interface. The T7 records USB 3.2 Gen 2, and the physical connector is not recorded, so the port on your computer has to be checked rather than assumed. Throughput is the gap in this catalogue: no read or write speed figure is recorded for this drive, so the interface generation is the ceiling of the connection and not a measurement of the drive. **Portability and encryption** The third decision covers what it is like to carry and what happens to the data. The T7 records a weight of 72 g on the datasheet and 2.0 oz on the product page, and its recorded description calls it a pocket-sized external SSD with a metal body, and it records hardware encryption support with hardware encryption in its recorded feature list. No durability rating and no encryption standard are recorded, so both need checking with the manufacturer. Questions: - **How fast is the Samsung T7?** The recorded interface is USB 3.2 Gen 2, and that is as far as this catalogue goes. The recorded sequential figures are up to 1,050 MB/sec read and up to 1,000 MB/sec write. Those are peak sequential numbers, so this guide does not treat them as a sustained rate. If speed is your deciding factor, the manufacturer's own specification is the source you need. - **What capacities does the Samsung T7 come in?** Four recorded capacities: 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB. The choice is about how much you carry and for how long rather than about speed, since no speed figure is recorded for the drive. - **Is the Samsung T7 encrypted?** Yes. Hardware encryption support is recorded and hardware encryption appears in the recorded feature list. The catalogue does not record the encryption standard or how the key is managed, so check the manufacturer's documentation before you rely on it for anything you cannot replace. - **How much does the Samsung T7 weigh?** The recorded weight is 72 g on the datasheet. Together with the recorded description of it as a pocket-sized external SSD with a metal body, that is what makes it a drive you carry rather than one that stays on the desk. - **What connector does the Samsung T7 use?** The recorded interface is USB 3.2 Gen 2. The physical connector is not recorded here, so check the port on the computer you plan to use rather than assuming a USB-C socket. - **How many portable SSDs are compared on this page?** One. The Samsung T7 is the only portable SSD in this catalogue, so this guide teaches the decisions and uses that drive as the worked example. We would rather publish one product's worth of guidance than pad a comparison with drives we have no recorded data for. ### How To Choose A USB Microphone: Element, Pattern And Connection URL: https://abackreviews.com/guides/how-to-choose-a-usb-microphone The element type decides how a microphone behaves in a room, so it comes first. The recorded Blue Yeti and Shure MV7 are used as worked examples. A USB microphone is easier to buy than it looks, because the decision that matters most is made in the first line of the specification sheet and most listings bury it. The element type decides how the microphone treats the room, and the room is the part of recording that people cannot control. The two microphones in this catalogue are used here as worked examples. The Blue Yeti records a condenser element with four selectable pickup patterns. The Shure MV7 records a dynamic element with a single cardioid pattern and a USB and XLR connection. They are not ranked, and the decision order below is the point of the page. ## The first decision: condenser or dynamic Start here, because it constrains everything else. A condenser element is more sensitive, which means it captures the room as well as the voice. That is what you want in a treated studio or a quiet closet, and it is what makes a condenser microphone the wrong choice in an untreated room. A dynamic element is less sensitive, so it forgives reflections and background noise. Both statements are readings of the recorded element type, and no sensitivity or self-noise figure is recorded for either microphone. The Yeti records its element type as condenser, and its recorded intended user is someone who records in a quiet room. The MV7 records its element type as dynamic, and its recorded intended user is someone who wants a forgiving microphone. Those two recorded lines are the whole first decision, and they are worth reading before any pattern or connection is considered. ## The second decision: pickup pattern A pickup pattern decides which directions the microphone listens to. A cardioid pattern listens mostly to the front. A bidirectional pattern listens front and back. An omnidirectional pattern listens all round. A stereo pattern listens across the front as two separate channels. The Yeti records all four of those: cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo, and switchable pickup patterns are in its recorded feature list. The MV7 records cardioid only, described as unidirectional. If you record one voice in one place, cardioid is enough and the extra patterns are options you may never use. If you plan to record two performers, a room, or a stereo source, the pattern list decides the purchase, and a single cardioid microphone cannot be reconfigured for it later. ## The third decision: the connection path and monitoring The last decisions are practical. How does the microphone reach the computer, and can you move to a better setup later? The Yeti records a USB connection. The MV7 records USB and XLR, and XLR output appears in its recorded feature list, so it can be moved to an audio interface later without changing microphone. That is a path rather than a benefit today, and it matters if you expect to outgrow a USB microphone and want to keep the same one. Monitoring is the part people forget. Both record headphone monitoring as built in, so neither needs a separate monitoring path to hear yourself while recording, and neither can be separated from the other on that basis. If you are choosing between these two, monitoring will not decide it. ## What this catalogue does not settle There is no recorded sensitivity, self-noise figure, frequency response, gain range or price for either microphone, and there is no measurement of how either one handles a noisy room. Those are the numbers that would settle a decision made on specifications alone. What the recorded data does settle is the shape of the choice. A condenser with switchable patterns in a quiet room, or a dynamic that forgives an untreated one. Choose the element type first and the rest of the list gets much shorter. Products covered: - Blue Yeti (https://abackreviews.com/products/blue-yeti, recommended): Attached as the recorded example of a USB condenser microphone with four selectable pickup patterns, not as a ranked recommendation. - Shure MV7 (https://abackreviews.com/products/shure-mv7, recommended): Attached as the recorded example of a dynamic microphone with cardioid pickup and both USB and XLR recorded connections, not as a ranked recommendation. **Element type: condenser or dynamic** The first decision is the element type, because it decides how much of the room the microphone captures along with the voice. The Blue Yeti records a condenser element and its recorded intended user specifies a quiet room. The Shure MV7 records a dynamic element and its recorded intended user wants a forgiving microphone. No sensitivity figure is recorded for either, so this decision is made from the element type and the room you record in. **Pickup pattern** The second decision is which directions the microphone listens in, and whether it can be changed later. The Blue Yeti records cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo patterns, with switchable pickup patterns in its recorded feature list. The Shure MV7 records cardioid only, described as unidirectional. One voice in one place needs nothing more than cardioid, and two performers or a stereo source needs a microphone that can be pointed differently. **Connection path and monitoring** The third decision covers how the microphone reaches the computer and whether you can hear yourself. The Yeti records a USB connection, and the MV7 records USB and XLR, with XLR output in its recorded feature list, which leaves a path to an audio interface later. Both record headphone monitoring as built in, so monitoring does not separate them. Questions: - **Should I buy a condenser or a dynamic USB microphone?** It depends on the room. A condenser element is more sensitive and captures the room along with the voice, so it suits a quiet or treated space. A dynamic element is less sensitive and forgives reflections. The Blue Yeti records a condenser element and the Shure MV7 records a dynamic element, and neither records a sensitivity figure. - **What is a cardioid pickup pattern?** A pattern that listens mostly to the front of the microphone and rejects sound from behind it, which is the usual choice for a single voice. The Shure MV7 records a cardioid pattern described as unidirectional, and cardioid is one of the four patterns the Blue Yeti records alongside bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo. - **Do I need a USB microphone with an XLR output?** Only if you expect to move to an audio interface later and want to keep the same microphone. The Shure MV7 records USB and XLR connections and lists XLR output in its recorded feature list. The Blue Yeti records USB only, so that path is not open to it. - **Can I hear myself while recording with these microphones?** Yes. Headphone monitoring is recorded as built in for both the Blue Yeti and the Shure MV7, so neither needs a separate monitoring path to hear yourself while recording. This is one of the few points on which the two recorded specifications are identical. - **Which microphone is better for recording in an untreated room?** The Shure MV7. Its recorded element type is dynamic, and a dynamic element is less sensitive to reflections and background noise than a condenser. No measurement of either microphone in a noisy room is recorded, so this is a reading of the element type rather than a measured result. - **Which microphone can record two performers at once?** The Blue Yeti. Its recorded pickup patterns are cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo, and switchable pickup patterns are in its recorded feature list. The Shure MV7 records cardioid only, so it cannot be reconfigured to face two sources separately. ### How To Choose A Webcam: Resolution, Focus And Control URL: https://abackreviews.com/guides/how-to-choose-a-webcam A webcam is chosen on resolution, focus, control and mounting. The recorded Brio 4K and Elgato Facecam are used here as worked examples, not as a ranking. A webcam is bought for one of three jobs, and the specifications that matter follow directly from the job. Video calls need a stable, well framed image. Streaming needs control, because the camera keeps running while you set up. Signing in to a laptop needs a camera the computer can talk to. The order of the decisions below follows that. The two cameras in this catalogue are used as worked examples. The Logitech Brio 4K records 4K capture, autofocus and infrared support. The Elgato Facecam records 1080p at 60 fps, manual exposure control and software adjustment of the field of view. Neither is placed above the other, because the recorded data separates them by job rather than by quality. ## The first decision: resolution and frame rate Decide the resolution your calls and streams actually run at, not the highest number on the box. A 4K recording downscaled into a call window is not a better call, and it is a more demanding camera to work with. The Brio 4K records up to 4K at 30 fps and 1080p at 60 fps. The Elgato Facecam records 1080p at 60 fps. That difference matters for recording, for a large window on a big display and for cutting a video afterwards. It does not change the quality of a standard video call shown at the same window size, so if all you do is take calls, the resolution argument is smaller than it looks. ## The second decision: focus Next decide whether the camera focuses by itself. Autofocus handles a subject who moves, and it is a recorded feature of the Brio 4K. A fixed focus does not, and the Elgato Facecam records a fixed focus prime lens, which is a design decision for a fixed setup rather than a gap in the data. The trap here is that fixed focus and autofocus are not two points on one scale. A camera that refocuses mid-shot can be more disruptive than one that holds still, and the catalogue records no measurement of either behaviour. What it does record is which mechanism each camera uses, and that is enough to stop you buying a self-focusing camera for a desk where nothing ever moves. ## The third decision: control, mounting and sign-in The last set of decisions is what you do with the image, how the camera is attached, and whether the computer can use it to sign in. Manual control is recorded for one camera and not the other. The Elgato Facecam records manual exposure control and a field of view adjustable in software. The Brio 4K records an adjustable field of view, but manual exposure control is not among its recorded features. If you intend to set the exposure and the framing yourself and then leave them alone, that recorded difference is the deciding factor. Mounting is the other practical question. The Elgato Facecam records a monitor mount and a tripod thread, which are two different ways to fix a camera to a desk. No mounting specification is recorded for the Brio 4K, so check the manufacturer before you plan the placement. Sign-in is a separate capability. The Brio 4K records infrared support, and its recorded description connects that to Windows Hello style platform authentication. The Elgato Facecam has no infrared support recorded, so this catalogue cannot say whether it works for that purpose. ## What this catalogue does not settle No picture quality judgement can be made from a resolution line. The catalogue records no lens aperture, no low light performance, no built-in microphone specification, no price and no field of view angle for either camera, and it cannot tell you how a camera handles a bright window behind you. It records what each camera is. Deciding how it will look needs a source this catalogue does not hold yet, and it is the gap to close before this category can be compared properly. Products covered: - Elgato Facecam (https://abackreviews.com/products/elgato-facecam, recommended): Attached as the recorded example of a 1080p camera with manual exposure control, software adjustable field of view and a monitor mount, not as a ranked recommendation. - Logitech Brio 4K (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-brio-4k, recommended): Attached as the recorded example of a camera recording up to 4K at 30 fps with autofocus and infrared support, not as a ranked recommendation. **Resolution and frame rate** The first decision is the resolution and frame rate your calls and streams actually use, rather than the highest figure the camera supports. The Brio 4K records up to 4K at 30 fps and 1080p at 60 fps, and the Elgato Facecam records 1080p at 60 fps. The gap between them is meaningful for recording and for editing, and largely irrelevant for a call shown at a normal window size. **Focus behaviour** The second decision is whether the camera focuses by itself. The Brio 4K records autofocus, and the Elgato Facecam records a fixed focus prime lens. Both are recorded choices rather than missing data, and the catalogue records no measurement of either behaviour, so the decision has to be made from what your setup does rather than from a figure. **Manual control, mounting and sign-in** The third decision covers the three things that are recorded but not obvious: how much of the image you set yourself, how the camera is fixed to the desk, and whether the computer can use it to authenticate. The Elgato Facecam records manual exposure control, a field of view adjustable in software, a monitor mount and a tripod thread. The Brio 4K records an adjustable field of view and infrared support for platform sign-in. Questions: - **Do I need a 4K webcam for video calls?** Usually not for the call itself. The Brio 4K records up to 4K at 30 fps and 1080p at 60 fps, and a call shown at a normal window size does not use the extra resolution. The 4K ceiling matters for recording and editing, and the recorded autofocus is the other reason to look at that camera. - **Is a fixed focus lens a problem for a webcam?** It depends on whether anything in the frame moves. The Elgato Facecam records a fixed focus prime lens, which suits a desk where the user stays in one position. The Brio 4K records autofocus instead, which handles a subject who moves. No focus accuracy or speed figure is recorded for either camera. - **Which webcam lets me adjust the exposure myself?** The Elgato Facecam. Manual exposure control is in its recorded feature list and its field of view is recorded as adjustable in software, at a recorded 1080p at 60 fps. The Brio 4K records an adjustable field of view, but manual exposure control is not among its recorded features. - **Can a webcam be used for Windows Hello sign-in?** The Logitech Brio 4K records infrared support as yes, and its recorded description links that to Windows Hello style platform authentication. No infrared support is recorded for the Elgato Facecam, so this catalogue cannot confirm whether it works for that purpose. - **How should I mount a webcam?** It depends on where the camera has to sit. The Elgato Facecam records a monitor mount and a tripod thread, which cover the two most common arrangements. No mounting specification is recorded for the Brio 4K, so check the manufacturer before you plan the placement of your camera. - **Do these webcams include a microphone?** The catalogue records no microphone specification for either camera, so this page cannot tell you what, if anything, is built in. If the audio matters to you, treat that as an open question to check with the manufacturer, or plan to record voice separately. ### How To Choose An Ergonomic Mouse: The Decisions In Order URL: https://abackreviews.com/guides/how-to-choose-an-ergonomic-mouse Choosing an ergonomic mouse is a sequence of decisions, not a spec sheet. Here is the order to make them, with the recorded mice used as worked examples. Most mouse buying advice starts with the shape of the mouse, which is the wrong end of the problem. Shape only matters once you know what is uncomfortable. A better order is to decide what the mouse has to do, then what your hand can sustain, then what you can live with on the desk, and only then which model fits the answers. This guide follows that order. The three mice in the catalogue are used as worked examples of each decision, not as a ranking, and the catalogue does not record enough about any of them to tell you how a shape feels after an afternoon. ## The first decision: the grip Decide whether you want a horizontal mouse or a vertical one, because this is the decision that changes how your arm sits and the hardest one to undo. A horizontal mouse is held with the palm down and the forearm flat. A vertical mouse holds the hand in a handshake angle, which is why the Logitech Lift records a grip angle of 57 degrees and lists a vertical grip in its recorded feature list. The Lift's recorded description calls it a vertical ergonomic mouse designed for smaller hands, with a natural handshake grip angle. If you have never used a vertical mouse, the change in wrist angle is both the point and the cost. You are buying a different posture, not just a different shape, and the recorded description does not promise that the change is instant to adapt to. ## The second decision: size and weight Once the grip is settled, match the size of the mouse to your hand. The catalogue records this explicitly for two of the three mice. The MX Master 3S is recorded for medium to large hands, and the Lift for small to medium hands. No intended hand size is recorded for the MX Anywhere 3S, which is one of the reasons its entry is thinner than the other two. Weight follows from size, and it decides how the mouse feels at the end of a long session. The recorded weights are 141 g for the MX Master 3S, 125 g for the Lift and 99 g for the MX Anywhere 3S. The heaviest of the three is the one that fills a large hand, and the lightest is the one that travels. Nobody records a grip measurement in millimetres for these mice, so weight is the only size figure you can compare directly. ## The third decision: controls, surfaces and devices The last group of decisions is practical. How many buttons do you need, and what can you configure? The MX Master 3S records 7 buttons and an 8000 DPI sensor, and no button count or sensor resolution is recorded for the other two, so on this point the catalogue only documents one of the three in detail. Where does the mouse have to work? The MX Anywhere 3S records that it works on glass and most surfaces, and no surface support is recorded for the other two. If you work on a glass desk or move between surfaces, that recorded line is the only one you have. How many devices do you switch between? All three record Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt connectivity. Multi-device switching appears in the recorded feature list for the MX Master 3S and the Lift, while the recorded feature list for the MX Anywhere 3S is empty, so its multi-device behaviour is not documented here. Battery life is recorded as up to 70 days on a full charge for the MX Master 3S and the MX Anywhere 3S, and no battery figure is recorded for the Lift. ## What this catalogue does not settle There is no recorded grip size in millimetres, no comfort or fatigue rating and no price for any of these mice. Nothing here tells you whether a shape feels good after four hours, and that is the question a buyer actually has. What the recorded data can do is remove the wrong choices. A small hand should not buy a mouse recorded for medium to large hands, and a buyer who wants a vertical grip should not settle for a horizontal shape and hope. Two of the three mice here also appear on the comparison between the MX Master 3S and the Lift, and the MX Master 3S has its own review and an alternatives page. This guide is the longer version of the same question, with the decision order spelled out. Products covered: - Logitech Lift (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-lift, recommended): Attached as the recorded example of a vertical mouse with a 57 degree grip angle recorded for small to medium hands, not as a ranked recommendation. - Logitech MX Anywhere 3S (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-anywhere-3s, recommended): Attached as the recorded example of a compact mouse that works on glass and most surfaces, not as a ranked recommendation. - Logitech MX Master 3S (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-master-3s, recommended): Attached as the recorded example of a sculpted horizontal mouse recorded for medium to large hands, not as a ranked recommendation. **Grip and angle** The first decision is whether the mouse is held horizontally or vertically, because that changes the position of the wrist and the forearm more than any other choice. The recorded grip angle for the Logitech Lift is 57 degrees, and vertical grip is in its recorded feature list. The MX Master 3S is recorded as a sculpted horizontal shape, and no grip angle is recorded for it or for the MX Anywhere 3S. Settle this before you look at anything else, because it rules out more options than size does. **Size and weight** The second decision is whether the mouse is sized for your hand, and how heavy it is. The MX Master 3S is recorded for medium to large hands and weighs 141 g, the Lift is recorded for small to medium hands and weighs 125 g, and the MX Anywhere 3S weighs 99 g with no intended hand size recorded. A mouse that is too large forces the hand to stretch, and a mouse that is too heavy asks more of the arm over a long session. **Controls, surfaces and devices** The third decision is the practical one: how many buttons you need, what surfaces the mouse has to work on, and how many devices it has to serve. The MX Master 3S records 7 buttons and an 8000 DPI sensor, the MX Anywhere 3S records support for glass and most surfaces, and all three record Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt connectivity. Where a figure is not recorded for a product, this guide says so rather than inferring it. Questions: - **How do I know which grip angle I need?** Start with what is uncomfortable now. If your wrist bends inward as you use the mouse, a horizontal shape is the problem and a vertical angle such as the Lift's recorded 57 degrees is the direction to look in. If your hand tires from moving the mouse a long way, the recorded weight of 141 g, 125 g and 99 g is the figure to compare first. - **Does hand size matter when buying an ergonomic mouse?** It is one of the most consequential recorded values. The MX Master 3S is recorded for medium to large hands and the Lift for small to medium hands, and no intended hand size is recorded for the MX Anywhere 3S. A mouse sized for a larger hand will force a smaller hand to stretch to reach the buttons. - **How much should I care about mouse weight for long sessions?** It is worth comparing, because the three recorded weights are 141 g for the MX Master 3S, 125 g for the Lift and 99 g for the MX Anywhere 3S. A heavier mouse moves more easily but asks more of your arm, and no grip size in millimetres is recorded for any of them to make the comparison more precise. - **Is a vertical mouse harder to get used to?** It changes the angle of your wrist, so the adaptation is part of the purchase. The Lift's recorded description calls it a vertical ergonomic mouse with a natural handshake grip angle and a recorded grip angle of 57 degrees, but it does not promise that the new posture feels familiar immediately. - **What recorded specification matters if I work on a glass desk?** Surface support. The MX Anywhere 3S records that it works on glass and most surfaces, and no surface support is recorded for the MX Master 3S or the Lift. That is the only recorded statement about surfaces in this catalogue, so it is worth checking with the manufacturer for the other two. - **Can I use the same mouse with more than one computer?** All three record Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt connectivity, and multi-device switching appears in the recorded feature list for the MX Master 3S and the Lift. The recorded feature list for the MX Anywhere 3S is empty, so its multi-device behaviour is not documented in this catalogue. ### USB-C hub buying guide URL: https://abackreviews.com/guides/usb-c-hub-buying-guide Explains why port counts mislead, how power delivery is reduced by dock draw, and when Thunderbolt is worth the price. A hub is a bandwidth and power budget. This guide explains how that budget works so you can predict whether a product will do what its port list suggests. ## Bandwidth is shared USB ports on a hub share the bandwidth of the single upstream connection to your laptop. A hub can offer many ports while only some of them achieve full speed at the same time. Thunderbolt carries considerably more bandwidth and can support displays and fast storage simultaneously. ## Power delivery is not the number on the box A hub rated for a high input wattage does not pass all of it to the laptop. The hub consumes some for its own operation and any attached devices. The number that matters is the wattage the laptop receives, and even that depends on what else is plugged in. ## Display support Display output depends on the standard being used and the port count. Some hubs drive one display at a high resolution and refresh rate, others drive two at reduced rates. Check the specific combination you need, and check whether your laptop supports the same combination over a single cable. ## Bus powered or externally powered Bus-powered hubs draw their power from the laptop, which is convenient but limits what they can run and may not charge the laptop. Externally powered docks charge the laptop and can run more devices, but they need a socket and are less portable. ## Ethernet If you dock a laptop permanently, wired Ethernet is often the most valuable port on the device. Check whether it is 1 GbE or 2.5 GbE if your network supports it. ## Practical checklist - Decide whether you need portability or a fixed desk setup. - Add up the devices you will connect at the same time. - Confirm the display combination you need, at the resolution and refresh rate you want. - Look for the wattage the laptop receives, not the input rating. - Confirm the hub works with your laptop model, since behaviour varies by platform and firmware. Products covered: - CalDigit TS4 Thunderbolt Station (https://abackreviews.com/products/caldigit-ts4, recommended): Included as an example of an externally powered Thunderbolt dock. Not a ranking. ## Alternatives ### Alternatives to the Anker 555 USB-C Hub URL: https://abackreviews.com/alternatives/anker-555-usb-c-hub-alternatives The Anker 555 is a recorded bus powered 8 in 1 hub with 1 GbE and up to 85 W of input pass through. The Anker 555 is recorded as an 8 in 1 bus powered USB-C hub providing HDMI, Ethernet, SD and microSD readers, USB-A and USB-C data ports and pass through charging. Its recorded HDMI output is up to 4K at 30 Hz, its recorded Ethernet is 1 GbE, and its recorded power delivery pass through is up to 85 W of input, with the laptop charging wattage depending on hub draw. One product in our catalogue is a recorded alternative, and it differs in every structural way. ## The recorded reasons to look elsewhere **Port count.** The Anker 555 is recorded as 8 in 1. The recorded alternative has 18 ports. **Ethernet.** The recorded Ethernet for the Anker 555 is 1 GbE. The recorded alternative is 2.5 GbE. **Laptop charging.** The recorded pass through for the Anker 555 is up to 85 W of input, and the record is explicit that the laptop charging wattage depends on hub draw. The recorded alternative is up to 98 W. **Displays.** The Anker 555 records a single HDMI output. The recorded alternative lists multiple display support as a feature. ## The CalDigit TS4, a powered Thunderbolt 4 dock The TS4 is recorded as a Thunderbolt 4 dock with a large port selection, high wattage laptop charging and support for multiple displays. Its recorded port count is 18, its recorded laptop charging is up to 98 W, its recorded Ethernet is 2.5 GbE, and its recorded power source is an external power supply. The differences follow from one decision. The TS4 is externally powered, which is what allows it to charge a laptop at up to 98 W and to carry a larger port selection, and it is what makes it a desk product. The Anker 555 draws its power from the laptop, which is what makes it portable and what caps the wattage reaching the laptop. The recorded protocol differs as well. The TS4 is recorded as Thunderbolt 4, while the Anker 555 is recorded as a USB-C hub whose ports share the connection to the computer. ## What the records do not settle The Anker 555 records an HDMI output of up to 4K at 30 Hz. The TS4 records multiple display support but no resolution or refresh rate, so the display side of this comparison can only be stated as one against many rather than one against a specific mode. No price is recorded for either product, and the two products have different physical requirements rather than different points on a shared scale. Every value here carries the state it was recorded in: read from the manufacturer's own documentation and not yet checked against a specific product page. Products covered: - Anker 555 USB-C Hub (https://abackreviews.com/products/anker-555-usb-c-hub, subject): The subject of this page. Its recorded bus power, 8 in 1 port list, 1 GbE Ethernet and single HDMI output define what the alternative is measured against. - CalDigit TS4 Thunderbolt Station (https://abackreviews.com/products/caldigit-ts4, alternative): Recorded as a Thunderbolt 4 dock with 18 ports, 2.5 GbE Ethernet, up to 98 W of laptop charging and an external power supply, so it trades portability for bandwidth and port count. **Bus power and portability** The Anker 555 is recorded as bus powered, so it draws from the laptop and can travel with the machine. The recorded alternative needs an external power supply, which fixes it to a desk. **Port count and Ethernet speed** The recorded port count is 8 in 1 against 18 ports, and the recorded Ethernet is 1 GbE against 2.5 GbE. Those are the two figures that separate the products on the record. **Charging, display output and protocol** The Anker 555 records up to 85 W of input with laptop charging depending on hub draw, one HDMI output at up to 4K and 30 Hz, and a shared USB-C port list. The TS4 records up to 98 W of laptop charging, multiple display support and Thunderbolt 4. **What the records do not settle** The TS4 records multiple display support with no resolution or refresh rate, and neither product records a price. Every value carries the state it was recorded in and has not been checked against a specific product page. Questions: - **How many ports does the Anker 555 have?** The recorded port count is 8 in 1, covering HDMI, Ethernet, SD and microSD readers, USB-A and USB-C data ports and pass through charging. - **Does the Anker 555 need its own power supply?** No. It is recorded as bus powered, so it takes power from the laptop. Its recorded pass through is up to 85 W of input, with the laptop charging wattage depending on hub draw. - **Which of these hubs records support for multiple displays?** The CalDigit TS4. Its recorded features include multiple display support and its recorded protocol is Thunderbolt 4, while the Anker 555 records a single HDMI output. - **What Ethernet speed does each hub record?** The Anker 555 records 1 GbE and the CalDigit TS4 records 2.5 GbE. Neither record carries a price, so the speed figures cannot be turned into a value judgement. ### Alternatives to the Blue Yeti URL: https://abackreviews.com/alternatives/blue-yeti-alternatives The Yeti is a recorded USB condenser with four switchable pickup patterns and built in headphone monitoring. The Blue Yeti is recorded as a USB condenser microphone with switchable pickup patterns and an integrated stand. Its recorded element type is condenser, its recorded pickup patterns are cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo, its recorded connection is USB, and its recorded headphone monitoring is built in. Its recorded audience is people who record in a quiet room and want selectable pickup patterns from a single USB microphone. One product in our catalogue is a recorded alternative. ## The recorded reasons to look elsewhere **One fixed pattern.** The Yeti records four pickup patterns. The alternative records cardioid and cardioid only, so the switchable pattern feature disappears. **The connection.** The Yeti's recorded connection is USB. The alternative records USB and XLR, which adds a path to a different setup rather than removing one. **The integrated stand.** The Yeti records an integrated stand. No mounting detail is recorded for the alternative, so what supports it on a desk or on an arm is not described in our data. ## The Shure MV7, a dynamic microphone with a second output The MV7 is recorded as a hybrid USB and XLR dynamic microphone with cardioid pickup and built in headphone monitoring. Its recorded element type is dynamic, its recorded pickup pattern is cardioid, unidirectional, its recorded connection is USB and XLR, and its recorded headphone monitoring is built in. Two recorded differences define the choice. The first is the element: a condenser with four switchable patterns against a dynamic with one fixed cardioid pattern. The second is the output: the MV7 records an XLR connection alongside USB, and its recorded audience note says it is for people who want a forgiving dynamic microphone and the option to move to an audio interface later. That is a path the Yeti's USB only record does not describe. The thing that does not change is monitoring. Both records list built in headphone monitoring, so neither product obliges you to buy a separate monitoring solution. ## What the records do not settle Our records contain no measurement of how either microphone behaves in a given room, no sensitivity figure and no noise figure, so we cannot rank them on sound quality or on how they handle an untreated space. The Yeti's recorded audience note assumes a quiet room in the first place. No price is recorded for either microphone, and no sample rate, bit depth or gain detail is recorded for either. Every value here carries the state it was recorded in: read from the manufacturer's own documentation and not yet checked against a specific product page. Products covered: - Blue Yeti (https://abackreviews.com/products/blue-yeti, subject): The subject of this page. Its recorded condenser element, four switchable pickup patterns and USB only connection define what the alternative is measured against. - Shure MV7 (https://abackreviews.com/products/shure-mv7, alternative): Recorded as a dynamic element with cardioid pickup only, a USB and XLR connection and built in headphone monitoring, so it trades switchable patterns for a second output. **One fixed pickup pattern** The Yeti records four pickup patterns, cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo. The alternative records cardioid only, so the ability to change how the microphone listens disappears. **USB only** The recorded connection for the Yeti is USB. The alternative records USB and XLR, which is the recorded path into a hardware setup later on. **Element type and outputs** The Yeti is recorded as a condenser with an integrated stand and USB only. The MV7 is recorded as a dynamic with an XLR output in its recorded features, and no mounting detail is recorded for it. **What the records do not settle** No sensitivity, noise figure, room behaviour measurement, sample rate, bit depth, gain detail or price is recorded for either microphone, so the comparison stops at the recorded specifications. Every value carries the state it was recorded in. Questions: - **What pickup patterns does the Blue Yeti have?** Four are recorded: cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo. The Shure MV7 records cardioid only. - **Does the Blue Yeti need an audio interface?** No interface is recorded for it. The recorded connection is USB and headphone monitoring is recorded as built in. - **Does the Shure MV7 record an XLR output?** Yes. The recorded connection is USB and XLR, and an XLR output appears in the recorded feature list, which is the route to a hardware setup later. - **Which of the two microphones records built in headphone monitoring?** Both do. Headphone monitoring is recorded as yes, built in for the Blue Yeti and for the Shure MV7, so monitoring is not a reason to choose one over the other. ### Alternatives to the CalDigit TS3 Plus URL: https://abackreviews.com/alternatives/caldigit-ts3-plus-alternatives Two recorded alternatives to the TS3 Plus: the Thunderbolt 4 TS4 at 18 ports and 98 W, and the bus powered Anker 555, which needs no socket. The CalDigit TS3 Plus is recorded as a powered Thunderbolt 3 dock with fifteen ports, up to 87 W of laptop charging and support for two displays at up to 4K 60 Hz each. Two products in this catalogue overlap with it, and they overlap in different classes: one is a later dock from the same manufacturer, the other is a portable hub that needs no power of its own. ## What the TS3 Plus records The recorded protocol is Thunderbolt 3, the recorded port count is fifteen, the recorded laptop charging is up to 87 W and the recorded Ethernet is 1 GbE. The recorded power source is an external power supply, a 180 W adapter. The recorded display support is two displays at up to 4K 60 Hz each, or one display at up to 5K 60 Hz over Thunderbolt, and the recorded card readers are SD 4.0 UHS-II at up to 312 MB/s. The recorded USB ports are 5 USB-A at 5 Gb/s, 1 USB-C at 10 Gb/s at the rear and 1 USB-C at 5 Gb/s at the front. The recorded weight is 0.47 kg and the recorded dimensions are 131 by 40 by 98.44 mm, with macOS 10.12 or later and Windows 10 or later recorded as the supported operating systems. ## What changes with the CalDigit TS4 The TS4 is the same product type with newer internals. Its recorded protocol is Thunderbolt 4 against the TS3 Plus's Thunderbolt 3, its recorded port count is eighteen against fifteen, its recorded laptop charging is up to 98 W against 87 W, and its recorded Ethernet is 2.5 GbE against 1 GbE. Its recorded display support is up to 8K on one display on compatible Windows computers and up to 6K on macOS, with dual 6K on Apple M1 Pro and M1 Max, where the TS3 Plus records two displays at up to 4K 60 Hz each. Its recorded card readers add microSD, with SD 4.0 and microSD 4.0 UHS-II against the TS3 Plus's SD 4.0 UHS-II alone. Its recorded USB ports include 3 Thunderbolt 4 at 40 Gb/s, 3 USB-C and 5 USB-A at 10 Gb/s, and its recorded weight is 0.64 kg with dimensions of 141 by 42 by 113 mm. It also records a two year warranty, where no warranty is recorded for the TS3 Plus. ## What changes with the Anker 555 The Anker 555 is a different class of device rather than a rival dock. It is recorded as an 8 in 1 bus powered USB-C hub with HDMI, Ethernet, SD and microSD readers, USB-A and USB-C data ports and pass-through power delivery, at 125 g and 121 by 55 by 15.3 mm. What it gives up is Thunderbolt. The recorded power source is bus powered rather than an external supply, so it needs no socket and travels in the bag. The recorded Ethernet is 1 GbE, the same as the TS3 Plus, and the recorded card readers are SD and microSD UHS-I. Its recorded display support is one HDMI port, with no display carried over the USB-C ports, and the recorded HDMI output is up to 4K at 30 Hz where the product page lists 4K at 60 Hz. The recorded pass-through is up to 85 W of input, and the record states that the laptop charging wattage depends on the hub draw. ## What the record does not settle No price is recorded for any of the three products. The Anker's HDMI output is a conflicting figure, with two manufacturer pages giving different refresh rates, and the catalogue publishes that disagreement rather than choosing one. The catalogue holds no compatibility statement between the TS3 Plus and a Thunderbolt 4 host. One condition belongs on any discussion of the TS3 Plus's two-display support. The manufacturer states that Apple M1 and M2 laptops support only one external display through their Thunderbolt port, while M1 Pro and M1 Max support two. Products covered: - Anker 555 USB-C Hub (https://abackreviews.com/products/anker-555-usb-c-hub, alternative): The recorded portable alternative in the same category, an 8 in 1 bus powered hub at 125 g with one HDMI output and no Thunderbolt link, which trades the dock's fixed desk role for something that travels. - CalDigit TS3 Plus (https://abackreviews.com/products/caldigit-ts3-plus, subject): The subject of this page. Its recorded Thunderbolt 3 protocol, 15 ports, up to 87 W of charging, 1 GbE Ethernet and 180 W power adapter define what the alternatives are measured against. - CalDigit TS4 Thunderbolt Station (https://abackreviews.com/products/caldigit-ts4, alternative): The same dock type on a newer protocol, recording Thunderbolt 4, 18 ports, up to 98 W of charging, 2.5 GbE Ethernet and dual 6K on Apple M1 Pro and M1 Max against the TS3 Plus's dual 4K 60 Hz. **The CalDigit TS4: the same dock on a newer protocol** The TS4 records Thunderbolt 4, 18 ports, up to 98 W of laptop charging, 2.5 GbE Ethernet and up to 6K on macOS with dual 6K on Apple M1 Pro and M1 Max, against the TS3 Plus's Thunderbolt 3, 15 ports, 87 W, 1 GbE and two displays at up to 4K 60 Hz each. It is also recorded heavier at 0.64 kg. **The Anker 555: a portable hub instead of a desk dock** The Anker 555 is recorded as a bus powered 8 in 1 hub with one HDMI output at up to 4K and 30 Hz, SD and microSD readers and 1 GbE Ethernet, at 125 g with no external power supply. It trades the TS3 Plus's Thunderbolt 3 link, 15 ports, 87 W of charging and two-display support for something that travels. **The TS3 Plus itself: what the alternatives are measured against** The TS3 Plus records Thunderbolt 3, 15 ports, up to 87 W of laptop charging, 1 GbE Ethernet, dual 4K 60 Hz display support, an SD 4.0 UHS-II card reader and an external power supply with a 180 W adapter, at 0.47 kg. **What decides between them** Whether the dock has to be a fixed desk unit with Thunderbolt bandwidth and two displays, which points to the TS4, or a box that travels and takes its power from the laptop, which points to the Anker 555. The TS3 Plus sits between the two classes, and the recorded protocol decides whether it is the right Thunderbolt generation for the laptop in front of you. **What the record does not settle** No price is recorded for any of the three products, the Anker 555's HDMI output is a conflicting figure between two manufacturer pages, and the catalogue holds no compatibility statement between a Thunderbolt 3 dock and a Thunderbolt 4 host. Questions: - **What are the alternatives to the CalDigit TS3 Plus?** Two recorded products: the CalDigit TS4, a Thunderbolt 4 dock with 18 ports, up to 98 W of charging and 2.5 GbE Ethernet, and the Anker 555, a bus powered 8 in 1 hub at 125 g that needs no power adapter. - **Is the CalDigit TS4 a Thunderbolt 4 dock?** Yes. Its recorded protocol is Thunderbolt 4, against the Thunderbolt 3 recorded for the TS3 Plus, and it records 18 ports against 15 and up to 98 W of laptop charging against 87 W. - **Does the Anker 555 need a power adapter?** No. Its recorded power source is bus powered, so it draws from the laptop. The recorded pass-through is up to 85 W of input, and the record states that the laptop charging wattage depends on the hub draw. - **Can the Anker 555 drive two displays?** Not on the record. Its recorded display support is one HDMI port, and the manufacturer states that the hub carries no display over the USB-C ports, where the TS3 Plus records two displays at up to 4K 60 Hz each. - **Does the TS3 Plus have a microSD slot?** No. The recorded card readers are SD 4.0 UHS-II at up to 312 MB/s, where the TS4 records SD 4.0 and microSD 4.0 UHS-II. - **How much does the TS3 Plus weigh?** The recorded weight is 0.47 kg, against the 0.64 kg recorded for the TS4 and the 125 g recorded for the Anker 555. ### Alternatives to the CalDigit TS4 URL: https://abackreviews.com/alternatives/caldigit-ts4-alternatives The TS4 is a recorded Thunderbolt 4 dock with 18 ports, 2.5 GbE and up to 98 W of laptop charging that needs a power supply. The CalDigit TS4 is recorded as a Thunderbolt 4 dock with a large port selection, high wattage laptop charging and support for multiple displays. Its recorded specifications are 18 ports, up to 98 W of laptop charging, 2.5 GbE Ethernet and an external power supply as the power source. Its recorded features are wired Ethernet, multiple display support and being a powered dock. One product in our catalogue is a recorded alternative, and it is a different class of device. ## The recorded reasons to look elsewhere **The power supply.** The TS4's recorded power source is an external power supply. It needs a socket, which means it stays where it is plugged in. A bus powered alternative does not. **Port count.** Eighteen ports is a lot of ports for a desk, and it is more than most people connect at once. **Travel.** The TS4's recorded audience is a single desk dock for a laptop, and no travel use appears in its recorded features. ## The Anker 555, a bus powered hub that travels with the laptop The Anker 555 is recorded as an 8 in 1 bus powered USB-C hub providing HDMI, Ethernet, SD and microSD readers, USB-A and USB-C data ports and pass through charging. Its recorded HDMI output is up to 4K at 30 Hz, its recorded Ethernet is 1 GbE, and its recorded power delivery pass through is up to 85 W of input, with laptop charging wattage depending on hub draw. The differences are structural. The Anker 555 draws power from the laptop, so it needs no socket and can be packed with the machine. It carries 8 ports rather than 18, 1 GbE rather than 2.5 GbE, and up to 85 W of input pass through rather than the TS4's up to 98 W of laptop charging. The Anker 555 records a single HDMI output while the TS4 records multiple display support. The one category of ports the Anker 555 does not give up is the one that matters most in a shared setup. Its recorded features include an SD card reader and wired Ethernet, so a card reader and a network connection are still available. ## What the records do not settle The TS4 records multiple display support but no resolution, refresh rate or number of displays, so the display comparison can only be made as one against many. The Anker 555's recorded pass through is an input figure, and its record states that laptop charging wattage depends on hub draw, so the wattage a laptop actually receives through it is not a fixed number. No price is recorded for either product. Every value here carries the state it was recorded in: read from the manufacturer's own documentation and not yet checked against a specific product page. Products covered: - Anker 555 USB-C Hub (https://abackreviews.com/products/anker-555-usb-c-hub, alternative): Recorded as a bus powered 8 in 1 hub with 1 GbE Ethernet, an SD card reader and up to 85 W of input pass through, so it trades dock power and port count for portability. - CalDigit TS4 Thunderbolt Station (https://abackreviews.com/products/caldigit-ts4, subject): The subject of this page. Its recorded Thunderbolt 4 protocol, 18 ports, 2.5 GbE Ethernet and external power supply define what the alternative is measured against. **The external power supply** The recorded power source is an external power supply, so the dock needs a socket and stays where it is plugged in. That is the recorded reason a portable hub exists as an alternative to it. **Port count and travel** The recorded port count is 18 and the recorded audience is a single desk dock for a laptop. No travel use appears in its recorded features, so a buyer who moves between locations is looking at a different product. **Bus power against dock power** The Anker 555 is recorded as bus powered with up to 85 W of input pass through and laptop charging wattage depending on hub draw. The TS4 is recorded as externally powered with up to 98 W of laptop charging and 18 ports against 8. **What the records do not settle** The TS4 records multiple display support with no resolution or refresh rate, the Anker 555's pass through is an input figure rather than a charging figure, and neither product records a price. Every value carries the state it was recorded in. Questions: - **Does the CalDigit TS4 need a power supply?** Yes. The recorded power source is an external power supply, and being a powered dock is in the recorded feature list. - **How much does the CalDigit TS4 charge a laptop?** The recorded laptop charging figure is up to 98 W, which is what makes the external power supply necessary rather than optional. - **Is the Anker 555 the same as a bus powered alternative to a dock?** Yes, that is how it is recorded: an 8 in 1 bus powered USB-C hub with HDMI, Ethernet, SD and microSD readers, USB-A and USB-C data ports and pass through charging, and it needs no socket. - **Does the Anker 555 support multiple displays?** No multiple display support is recorded for it. Its recorded port list contains one HDMI output, at up to 4K and 30 Hz. ### Alternatives to the Elgato Facecam URL: https://abackreviews.com/alternatives/elgato-facecam-alternatives The Facecam is a recorded 1080p 60 fps camera with a fixed focus prime lens and software adjustable field of view. The Elgato Facecam is recorded as a 1080p webcam at 60 fps with a fixed focus prime lens, software control over exposure and field of view, and monitor mount and tripod thread mounting. Its recorded features include manual exposure control, and its recorded audience is people who want manual control over a 1080p camera for streaming and calls. One product in our catalogue is a recorded alternative. ## The recorded reasons to look elsewhere **Resolution.** The Facecam is recorded as 1080p at 60 fps. The recorded alternative records up to 4K at 30 fps alongside 1080p at 60 fps. **Focus.** The Facecam's recorded lens is a fixed focus prime. The recorded alternative records autofocus. **Authentication.** No infrared support is recorded for the Facecam. The recorded alternative records infrared support, and its recorded audience note names Windows Hello style authentication. ## The Logitech Brio 4K, for 4K capture and platform authentication The Brio 4K is recorded as a 4K webcam with autofocus, an adjustable field of view and infrared support for platform authentication. Its recorded specifications are up to 4K at 30 fps and 1080p at 60 fps, autofocus, an adjustable field of view and infrared support of yes. Two differences follow directly from the records. The first is capture resolution: the Brio 4K records a 4K mode at 30 fps that the Facecam's 1080p record does not include, while both products record 1080p at 60 fps. The second is focus. A fixed focus prime lens and autofocus are different approaches to keeping a subject sharp, and the Brio 4K's record states that its focus is automatic. There is a third difference worth naming. The Facecam's recorded field of view is adjustable in software, and its recorded features include manual exposure control. The Brio 4K records an adjustable field of view without recording the same manual exposure specification, so the software dependency runs in the other direction for that one control. ## What the records do not settle The Facecam's record says its field of view is adjustable in software, and the Brio 4K's record does not specify how its field of view is adjusted. Neither product records a price, and the Brio 4K's record does not describe a mounting arrangement. Our records also contain no image quality measurement or lighting guidance for either camera, so neither can be ranked on picture. Every value here carries the state it was recorded in: read from the manufacturer's own documentation and not yet checked against a specific product page. One thing to know before you read further: Elgato's own product page states that the Facecam has been discontinued. It is recorded here because its specifications are still a useful reference, not because it is something to buy today. Products covered: - Elgato Facecam (https://abackreviews.com/products/elgato-facecam, subject): The subject of this page. Its recorded 1080p at 60 fps capture, fixed focus prime lens and software adjustable field of view define what the alternative is measured against. - Logitech Brio 4K (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-brio-4k, alternative): Recorded with up to 4K at 30 fps, autofocus, an adjustable field of view and infrared support for platform authentication, so it trades the fixed focus lens and 1080p ceiling for resolution. **Resolution ceiling** The Facecam is recorded as 1080p at 60 fps. The recorded alternative records up to 4K at 30 fps as well as 1080p at 60 fps, so 4K capture is the specification the subject cannot offer. **Focus and infrared** The recorded lens is a fixed focus prime and no infrared support is recorded. The alternative records autofocus and infrared support, with its recorded audience note naming Windows Hello style authentication. **Where the software dependency sits** The Facecam's recorded field of view is adjustable in software and manual exposure control is a recorded feature. The Brio 4K records an adjustable field of view with no manual exposure specification, so the dependency runs in the opposite direction for that control. **What the records do not settle** The Brio 4K's record does not state how its field of view is adjusted or how it mounts, and neither product records a price or any image quality measurement. Every value carries the state it was recorded in. **The Elgato Facecam has been discontinued** The Elgato Facecam product page states that the camera has been discontinued. It stays on the site because the recorded specifications are still the honest reference for a fixed focus 1080p camera, but it is not a current recommendation and it should not be bought new. Questions: - **What resolution does the Elgato Facecam record?** 1080p at 60 fps. That is the only resolution in the recorded specifications for this camera. - **Does the Elgato Facecam have autofocus?** No autofocus is recorded. The recorded lens is a fixed focus prime, which is a different mechanism and does not need software to stay in focus. - **Which of these webcams records infrared support?** The Logitech Brio 4K, where infrared support is recorded as yes and the recorded audience note names Windows Hello style authentication. - **Does the Logitech Brio 4K record manual exposure control?** No manual exposure specification is recorded for it. Manual exposure control is a recorded feature of the Elgato Facecam, and the Facecam's field of view is the one recorded as adjustable in software. ### Alternatives to the Keychron K8 Pro URL: https://abackreviews.com/alternatives/keychron-k8-pro-alternatives The K8 Pro is a plastic tenkeyless mechanical board with QMK and VIA remapping. The Keychron K8 Pro is recorded as a tenkeyless mechanical keyboard with a plastic case, hot-swappable sockets, USB-C wired and Bluetooth connectivity, and QMK and VIA as its remapping software. It sits between the heavier aluminium boards and the low profile wireless keyboards in our catalogue, and two products sit close enough to it to be worth comparing. ## The recorded reasons to look elsewhere **Case material.** The case is recorded as plastic. If a heavy, planted board is the reason you want a mechanical keyboard, a plastic case gives that up, and no weight figure is recorded for the K8 Pro to put a number on it. **Footprint.** Tenkeyless keeps a full function row and drops the number pad, which is a different footprint from the compact boards in this category. The recorded audience note for the K8 Pro describes a wireless mechanical keyboard with software remapping at a lower price than a full aluminium board, which is a statement about cost rather than about size. **Power.** The recorded connectivity for the K8 Pro is USB-C wired and Bluetooth. No battery life figure is recorded for it, unlike the compact Logitech keyboard in this comparison. ## The Keychron Q1, for an aluminium case and a 75 percent layout The Q1 is recorded as a 75 percent mechanical keyboard with a full aluminium case, hot-swappable switches, backlighting and USB-C connectivity, at a recorded weight of 1,825 g. The differences are case material, footprint and weight. You gain an aluminium body and a recorded backlight, and you take on a board that is 75 percent rather than tenkeyless, so the function keys move to a second row and the number pad is gone. The Q1's records do not list a remapping software, so the QMK and VIA layer that is the K8 Pro's recorded advantage is not something we can carry across. ## The Logitech MX Keys Mini, for a flat board and a recorded battery figure The MX Keys Mini is recorded as a compact low profile wireless keyboard with backlit spherical keycaps, multi device switching and USB-C charging. Its recorded connectivity is Bluetooth and Logi Bolt, and its recorded battery life is up to 5 months with backlighting off. This is a different category of keyboard rather than a different model of the same one. Our records describe the K8 Pro as a mechanical board with hot-swappable sockets and the MX Keys Mini as a low profile keyboard, with no hot-swappable switches recorded for the Mini and no remapping software recorded for it. What it adds is a recorded battery figure and recorded multi device switching. ## What the records do not settle No weight is recorded for the K8 Pro, so neither alternative can be compared with it on weight. No battery figure is recorded for the K8 Pro either, and no price is recorded for any of the three. Every value here carries the state it was recorded in: read from the manufacturer's own documentation and not yet checked against a specific product page. Products covered: - Keychron K8 Pro (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-k8-pro, subject): The subject of this page. Its recorded tenkeyless layout, plastic case and QMK and VIA remapping define what each alternative is measured against. - Keychron Q1 (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-q1, alternative): Recorded as a 75 percent board with a full aluminium case, a recorded weight of 1,825 g and backlighting, so it trades the K8 Pro's remapping layer and plastic case for a heavier aluminium body. - Logitech MX Keys Mini (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-keys-mini, alternative): Recorded as a compact low profile keyboard with multi device switching and a battery life of up to 5 months with backlighting off, so it trades a mechanical board with remapping for a flat wireless one. **Case material** The case is recorded as plastic, and no weight is recorded for the K8 Pro. A buyer who wants the planted feel of a heavy aluminium body has to look at a different product, because the record here cannot be read as light or heavy. **Footprint and power** Tenkeyless keeps a full function row and drops the number pad, and no battery life figure is recorded for the K8 Pro. Both of those push a buyer toward a different product rather than toward a different revision. **The Q1 in aluminium, 75 percent** The Q1 is recorded with a full aluminium case, a recorded weight of 1,825 g, backlighting and a 75 percent layout, and no remapping software. The gain is case material and a recorded backlight; the cost is the footprint and the loss of the QMK and VIA layer. **The MX Keys Mini as a flat wireless board** The Mini is recorded as a compact low profile keyboard with Bluetooth and Logi Bolt connectivity, USB-C charging, multi device switching and a battery life of up to 5 months with backlighting off. The gain is recorded power management, the cost is the mechanical feel and the remapping layer. **What the records do not settle** No weight, battery figure or price is recorded for the K8 Pro, so the comparisons on this page run on the specifications that exist rather than on a shared scale. Every value carries the state it was recorded in and has not been checked against a specific product page. Questions: - **Does the Keychron K8 Pro support remapping?** Yes. The recorded remapping software is QMK and VIA, and that specification is the clearest recorded difference between this board and the aluminium Keychron Q1. - **Is the Keychron K8 Pro heavier than the Keychron Q1?** No weight is recorded for the K8 Pro, so that cannot be answered from the data we hold. The Q1's recorded weight is 1,825 g, and the K8 Pro's case is recorded as plastic rather than aluminium. - **Which of these keyboards has a recorded battery life?** The Logitech MX Keys Mini, recorded as up to 5 months with backlighting off. No battery figure is recorded for the K8 Pro or for the Q1. - **Does the Keychron Q1 have a number pad?** No. The Q1 is recorded as 75 percent and the K8 Pro as tenkeyless, so neither board includes one, and neither can be extended with one later. ### Alternatives to the Keychron Q1 URL: https://abackreviews.com/alternatives/keychron-q1-alternatives The Q1 is a heavy aluminium 75 percent mechanical board. The Keychron Q1 is a 75 percent mechanical keyboard with a full aluminium case, hot-swappable switch sockets, USB-C connectivity and a recorded weight of 1,825 g. Two products in our catalogue sit close enough to it to be worth weighing up as replacements, and both take the board in a different direction rather than competing with it feature for feature. ## Why you might look away from the Q1 **The weight.** The recorded weight is 1,825 g and the recorded case material is aluminium. That combination is what keeps the board planted on a desk. It is also what makes it a desk product rather than a board you move between locations. **The layout.** The recorded layout is 75 percent, which drops the number pad and moves the function keys into a second row. A buyer who works in a spreadsheet every day has to solve that elsewhere. **The absence of recorded remapping software.** The Q1's recorded specifications list hot-swappable switches and backlighting, and they do not list a remapping layer. If a configurable layout is the point of the purchase, that gap matters. ## The Keychron K8 Pro, for a lighter body and a remapping layer The K8 Pro is recorded as a tenkeyless mechanical keyboard with a plastic case, USB-C wired and Bluetooth connectivity, hot-swappable sockets and QMK and VIA as the remapping software. The differences from the Q1 run in two directions at once. You gain the recorded remapping layer and you lose the aluminium. The case is recorded as plastic rather than aluminium, and no weight is recorded for the K8 Pro, so we cannot state how much lighter it is. What we can say is that a plastic case is not the same thing as an aluminium one, and the recorded weight of the Q1 remains 1,825 g. The footprint also changes. A tenkeyless layout keeps a full function row and drops the number pad, which is a different footprint from the 75 percent Q1 and a different arrangement of the same number of keys. ## The Logitech MX Keys Mini, for a flat board that switches between devices The MX Keys Mini is recorded as a compact low-profile wireless keyboard with backlit spherical keycaps, multi-device switching and USB-C charging. Its recorded connectivity is Bluetooth and Logi Bolt, and its recorded battery life is up to 5 months with backlighting off. The difference here is the typing mechanism rather than the layout. Our records describe the Q1 as a mechanical board with hot-swappable switches and the MX Keys Mini as a low-profile keyboard, and no hot-swappable switches are recorded for the Mini. That is the trade: you give up a mechanical board you can rebuild and gain a flat board with recorded multi-device switching. ## What the records do not settle Neither alternative records a number pad, and no weight is recorded for either of them, so there is no figure that could be compared directly with the Q1's 1,825 g. No price is recorded for any of the three. Every specification on this page carries the state it was recorded in. Each value came from the manufacturer's own documentation and has not been checked against a specific product page, so treat each figure as recorded rather than as a verified measurement. Products covered: - Keychron K8 Pro (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-k8-pro, alternative): Recorded as a tenkeyless board with a plastic case, hot-swappable sockets and QMK and VIA remapping, so it trades the Q1's aluminium body and 75 percent layout for a remapping layer. - Keychron Q1 (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-q1, subject): The subject of this page. Its recorded 75 percent layout, aluminium case and 1,825 g weight are what each alternative is measured against. - Logitech MX Keys Mini (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-keys-mini, alternative): Recorded as a compact low-profile keyboard with multi-device switching and a battery figure of up to 5 months with backlighting off, so it trades a rebuildable mechanical board for a flat one. **Weight** The recorded weight is 1,825 g and the recorded case material is aluminium. That is what keeps the board planted on a desk, and it is what makes the board a fixed desk product rather than something you carry between locations. **Layout** The recorded layout is 75 percent, which drops the number pad and moves the function keys into a second row. A board without a number pad cannot grow one later, so the layout choice is permanent. **No recorded remapping layer** The recorded specifications list hot-swappable switches, backlighting and wireless connectivity, and no remapping software. A buyer whose purchase depends on a configurable layout has to look at a board that records one. **Case material and remapping against the K8 Pro** The K8 Pro is recorded with a plastic case rather than an aluminium one, and with QMK and VIA as the remapping software. No weight is recorded for the K8 Pro, so the two boards cannot be compared on weight, only on what each record states. **Typing mechanism against the MX Keys Mini** The Mini is recorded as a low-profile wireless keyboard with backlit spherical keycaps, Bluetooth and Logi Bolt connectivity, multi-device switching and a battery life of up to 5 months with backlighting off. No hot-swappable switches are recorded for it. **What the records do not settle** No weight is recorded for the K8 Pro or the MX Keys Mini, no price is recorded for any of the three, and every value here carries the state it was recorded in: read from the manufacturer's own documentation and not yet checked against a specific product page. Questions: - **Is the Keychron K8 Pro lighter than the Q1?** No weight is recorded for the K8 Pro, so that cannot be answered from the data we hold. The Q1's recorded weight is 1,825 g, and the K8 Pro's case is recorded as plastic rather than aluminium. - **Which of these alternatives records remapping software?** The Keychron K8 Pro, where the recorded remapping software is QMK and VIA. The Q1's recorded specifications contain no remapping entry, and no remapping software is recorded for the MX Keys Mini. - **Does the Logitech MX Keys Mini use mechanical switches?** Our records describe the MX Keys Mini as a compact low-profile wireless keyboard with backlit spherical keycaps. No hot-swappable switches are recorded for it, and no switch type is recorded either, so it cannot be treated as a mechanical board on this data. - **Do the Keychron Q1 and K8 Pro have a number pad?** No. The Q1 is recorded as 75 percent and the K8 Pro as tenkeyless, so neither board includes one, and neither can be extended with one later. ### Alternatives to the Keychron Q11 URL: https://abackreviews.com/alternatives/keychron-q11-alternatives Two recorded alternatives to the split Q11: the aluminium Keychron Q1 at 1,825 g and the wireless Keychron K8 Pro with a 4,000 mAh battery. The Keychron Q11 is recorded as a 75 percent ANSI split mechanical keyboard with an all-metal tray-mounted body, a rotary knob, hot-swappable sockets and QMK remapping over USB-C. Two products in this catalogue overlap with it, and they overlap in specific ways: one keeps the layout class and loses the split, the other keeps the remapping and adds a wireless radio. There is nothing else recorded in the keyboard category that could be named here, and anything outside that category would need an overlap the record does not support. ## What the Q11 records The recorded layout is a 75 percent ANSI split layout with a rotary knob. The recorded frame material is all-metal, the recorded mount style is a tray mount with the plate integrated into the case, and the recorded weight is 1,186 g plus or minus 10 g fully assembled. The recorded connectivity is USB-C wired, and the recorded feature list says there is no wireless connectivity. The recorded switch options are Keychron Super red or brown, Gateron G Pro red or brown, or barebone, with hot-swappable sockets that take five pin and three pin switches. The recorded remapping software is QMK firmware with the Keychron Launcher web app, on macOS and Windows. The recorded polling rate is 1000 Hz, the recorded keycap material is double-shot PBT in a normal profile, and the recorded stabilisers are screw-in PCB. ## What changes with the Keychron Q1 The Q1 shares the layout class and the wired connection and gives up the split. Its recorded layout is 75 percent, its recorded connectivity is USB-C wired, and its recorded polling rate is 1000 Hz, the same as the Q11's. The recorded keycap material is double-shot PBT that is not shine-through, where the Q11 records a normal profile. The structural choices are where they part company. The Q1 records a gasket mount with a steel plate in an aluminium case at 1,825 g plus or minus 10 g, against the Q11's tray mount with the plate integrated into the case at 1,186 g. The Q11 splits into halves and adds a rotary knob. The Q1 records backlighting as a feature and the Q11 records no lighting specification. The Q1's recorded switch options are Gateron G Pro, Gateron Phantom and Keychron K Pro, all hot-swappable, where the Q11 records Keychron Super red or brown, Gateron G Pro red or brown, or barebone. No remapping software specification is recorded for the Q1, while the Q11 records QMK firmware and the Keychron Launcher web app. ## What changes with the Keychron K8 Pro The K8 Pro is the recorded alternative for anyone who wants to move the keyboard between machines. Its recorded connectivity is USB-C wired and Bluetooth, its recorded battery is 4,000 mAh rechargeable lithium polymer, and wireless connectivity and hot-swappable switches are in its recorded feature list. What it gives up is the layout. The recorded layout is tenkeyless, so the K8 Pro keeps a function row and drops the number pad, and it is a single piece rather than a split. Its recorded mount style is a tray mount, the same construction as the Q11. Its recorded remapping software is QMK and VIA, where the Q11 records QMK with the Keychron Launcher web app. The recorded weight is about 990 g in the plastic frame and 1,146 g in the aluminium frame. ## What the record does not settle No price is recorded for any of the three boards. No sound profile and no typing feel is recorded for any of them. The Q11's recorded dimensions of 345 mm long and 134 mm wide are marked as only partially verified, because the page does not state whether they describe one half or the pair. And the record does not state whether the Q1 can be remapped, because no remapping software specification is held for it. Products covered: - Keychron K8 Pro (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-k8-pro, alternative): Shares hot-swappable switches and QMK remapping, but records USB-C wired and Bluetooth connectivity with a 4,000 mAh battery and a tenkeyless layout against the Q11's split board. - Keychron Q1 (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-q1, alternative): Shares the 75 percent layout class and the USB-C wired connection, but records a single-piece aluminium board with a gasket mount at 1,825 g and no split or rotary knob. - Keychron Q11 (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-q11, subject): The subject of this page. Its recorded split 75 percent ANSI layout with a rotary knob, all-metal tray mount at 1,186 g and QMK remapping define what the alternatives are measured against. **The Keychron Q1: same layout class, no split, more mass** The Q1 records a 75 percent layout, USB-C wired connectivity, double-shot PBT keycaps that are not shine-through and a 1000 Hz polling rate, the same as the Q11. It records a gasket mount with a steel plate in an aluminium case at 1,825 g against the Q11's tray mount at 1,186 g, and it has no split and no recorded rotary knob. **The Keychron K8 Pro: the recorded wireless option** The K8 Pro records USB-C wired and Bluetooth connectivity, a 4,000 mAh rechargeable lithium polymer battery and wireless connectivity in its feature list. It gives up the split and the 75 percent layout for a tenkeyless single piece, and its recorded remapping software is QMK and VIA rather than the Q11's QMK with the Keychron Launcher web app. **The Q11 itself: what the alternatives are measured against** The Q11 records a 75 percent ANSI split layout with a rotary knob, an all-metal tray-mounted body at 1,186 g, hot-swappable sockets for five pin and three pin switches, screw-in PCB stabilisers and QMK firmware with the Keychron Launcher web app, over a USB-C wired connection with no battery recorded. **What decides between them** Whether the keyboard has to travel between machines, which is the recorded difference between the Q11 and the K8 Pro, and whether the board needs to be one solid piece or two halves that can be angled, which is the recorded difference between the Q11 and the Q1. Everything else the record holds for these three boards is either shared or absent. **What the record does not settle** No price is recorded for any of the three boards, no sound profile or typing feel is recorded for any of them, the Q11's dimensions are marked as only partially verified, and no remapping software specification is held for the Q1. Questions: - **What are the alternatives to the Keychron Q11?** Two recorded products: the Keychron Q1, a 75 percent aluminium board at 1,825 g with a gasket mount, and the Keychron K8 Pro, a tenkeyless board with USB-C wired and Bluetooth connectivity and a 4,000 mAh battery. - **Is the Keychron Q1 a split keyboard?** No. Its recorded layout is 75 percent, the same class as the Q11's, and the record describes a single aluminium board with a gasket mount and a steel plate rather than two halves with a knob. - **Which of these keyboards is wireless?** Only the Keychron K8 Pro. It records USB-C wired and Bluetooth connectivity and a 4,000 mAh rechargeable lithium polymer battery, while the Q11 and the Q1 are both recorded as USB-C wired with no wireless connectivity. - **What is the Q11's advantage over the Q1?** The recorded split layout with a rotary knob, the all-metal tray-mounted body at 1,186 g against the Q1's recorded 1,825 g aluminium case, the recorded screw-in PCB stabilisers, and the recorded remapping software, which the catalogue holds for the Q11 but not for the Q1. - **Does the Q11 have a battery?** No. The recorded connectivity is USB-C wired and the recorded feature list says there is no wireless connectivity. No battery is recorded for this board. - **Can the Keychron K8 Pro be remapped?** Yes. Its recorded remapping software is QMK and VIA, while the Q11 records QMK firmware with the Keychron Launcher web app on macOS and Windows. ### Alternatives to the Logitech Brio 4K URL: https://abackreviews.com/alternatives/logitech-brio-4k-alternatives The Brio 4K is recorded with up to 4K at 30 fps, autofocus, an adjustable field of view and infrared authentication support. The Logitech Brio 4K is recorded as a 4K webcam with autofocus, an adjustable field of view and infrared support for platform authentication. Its recorded specifications are up to 4K at 30 fps and 1080p at 60 fps, autofocus, an adjustable field of view and infrared support recorded as yes. Its recorded features include infrared authentication support, and its recorded audience is people who need 4K capture or Windows Hello style authentication and are willing to pay for it. One product in our catalogue is a recorded alternative. ## The recorded reasons to look elsewhere **The cost of the 4K mode.** The record names 4K capture as a reason to buy this camera, and the recorded audience note says the buyer is willing to pay for it. That makes the resolution a feature you can spend money on rather than a baseline. **The lens.** The focus is recorded as autofocus. A fixed focus prime lens is a different design decision, and one of the alternatives below takes it. **What you keep.** Both products record 1080p at 60 fps and an adjustable field of view. The Brio 4K is not the only camera in our catalogue that records 1080p at 60 fps. ## The Elgato Facecam, a 1080p camera with a fixed focus prime The Facecam is recorded as a 1080p webcam at 60 fps with a fixed focus prime lens, software control over exposure and field of view, and monitor mount and tripod thread mounting. Its recorded features include manual exposure control, and its recorded audience is people who want manual control over a 1080p camera for streaming and calls. The trade is resolution against control and a simpler optical design. The Facecam records no 4K mode at all, so the Brio 4K's headline specification is the thing you give up. What you get instead is a recorded lens type, a fixed focus prime, and manual exposure control listed as a feature, with the field of view adjustable in software. The Facecam also records a mounting arrangement, a monitor mount and a tripod thread. On authentication the answer runs the other way. The Brio 4K records infrared support, and the Facecam's record contains no equivalent specification, so if platform authentication is the requirement the Facecam cannot answer it. ## What the records do not settle The Brio 4K's record does not state how its field of view is adjusted or what mounting options it has, so those two points cannot be compared. Neither product records a price, and no image quality measurement exists for either camera in our data, so neither can be placed ahead of the other on picture quality. Every value here carries the state it was recorded in: read from the manufacturer's own documentation and not yet checked against a specific product page. Products covered: - Elgato Facecam (https://abackreviews.com/products/elgato-facecam, alternative): Recorded as a 1080p at 60 fps camera with a fixed focus prime lens, software adjustable field of view, manual exposure control and a recorded mount, so it trades 4K capture for manual control. - Logitech Brio 4K (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-brio-4k, subject): The subject of this page. Its recorded 4K at 30 fps mode, autofocus and infrared authentication support define what the alternative is measured against. **Paying for the 4K mode** The recorded audience note for the Brio 4K names 4K capture as a reason to buy it and says the buyer is willing to pay for it. A buyer who does not need 4K is paying for a specification they will not use. **Focus mechanism** Focus is recorded as autofocus. The alternative records a fixed focus prime lens instead, which is a different mechanism and does not require the camera to hunt for focus. **What the alternative gives up and gains** The Facecam records no 4K mode, so the headline specification is lost. It gains a recorded lens type, manual exposure control, a field of view adjustable in software and a recorded monitor mount with tripod thread. **What the records do not settle** The Brio 4K's record does not state how its field of view is adjusted or how it mounts, neither product records a price, and no image quality measurement exists for either. Every value carries the state it was recorded in. Questions: - **Does the Logitech Brio 4K record 4K video?** Yes. The recorded resolution is up to 4K at 30 fps, with 1080p at 60 fps also recorded for the same camera. - **Does the Brio 4K support Windows Hello?** The recorded infrared support is yes, and the recorded description names infrared support for platform authentication. Specific platform versions are not recorded. - **What does the Elgato Facecam record that the Brio 4K does not?** A fixed focus prime lens, manual exposure control as a feature, and a recorded mounting arrangement of a monitor mount and a tripod thread. The Brio 4K records autofocus and infrared support instead. - **Do the two webcams record the same frame rate at 1080p?** Yes. Both record 1080p at 60 fps, so the resolution difference between them sits in the 4K mode that only the Brio 4K records. ### Alternatives to the Logitech C920s URL: https://abackreviews.com/alternatives/logitech-c920s-alternatives Two recorded alternatives to the C920s: the 4K Brio with adjustable presets, and the discontinued Elgato Facecam with manual exposure control. Two products in this catalogue overlap with the Logitech C920s, and they overlap in different ways. The Logitech Brio 4K is the current camera from the same manufacturer, with a higher capture ceiling and infrared support for platform sign-in. The Elgato Facecam is a fixed focus 1080p camera that the manufacturer has discontinued, so it is a reference rather than something to buy. ## What the C920s records The recorded resolution is 1080p at 30 fps, 720p at 30 fps. The recorded field of view angle is 78 degrees diagonal. The recorded focus is autofocus with a glass lens. The recorded built-in microphone is yes, stereo, with a range up to 1 m. The recorded privacy shutter is yes, a physical shutter on the lens, and physical privacy shutter and built-in microphone are in the recorded feature list. The recorded mounting is a universal mounting clip that fits laptops and monitors, and a tripod is not included. The recorded cable is 1.5 m, attached USB-A, and the recorded USB connection is USB-A. The recorded dimensions are 43.3 by 94 by 71 mm including the mounting clip, the recorded weight is 162 g, 5.71 oz, and the recorded operating systems are Windows 8 or later, macOS 10.10 or later and ChromeOS. ## What changes with the Brio 4K The Brio records up to 4K at 30 fps and 1080p at 60 fps, against the C920s's 30 fps at both of its resolutions. Its recorded field of view is adjustable, with 90, 78 or 65 degrees as three presets, where the C920s records a single 78 degrees diagonal. Its recorded infrared support is yes, which is what makes it usable for Windows Hello style platform authentication. Its recorded built-in microphone is dual omni-directional with a range up to 1.2 m, against the C920s's stereo microphone with a range up to 1 m. Its recorded HDR is RightLight 3 with HDR. The recorded dimensions are 102 by 27 by 26.5 mm and the recorded weight is 65 g, against the C920s at 162 g. The one thing the Brio record does not settle for a buyer who cares about privacy is the shutter. No privacy shutter is recorded for the Brio 4K, while the C920s records one as a physical shutter on the lens. That absence in the record is not proof that the camera lacks one, and it has to be put to the manufacturer. ## What changes with the Elgato Facecam The Facecam records 1080p at 60 fps, where the C920s records 30 fps. It records a fixed focus prime lens against the C920s's autofocus with a glass lens, and a field of view adjustable in software against the C920s's fixed 78 degrees diagonal, at 82 degrees. Its recorded built-in microphone is no, so the C920s has the built-in microphone where the Facecam does not. Its recorded mounting is a monitor mount and a tripod thread, its recorded USB connection is USB 3.0 or better over Type-C against the C920s's attached USB-A cable, and its recorded dimensions are 58 by 80 by 48 mm without the mount at a recorded weight of 103 g. Its recorded product status is that it is discontinued by the manufacturer, and the manufacturer states that the camera has been discontinued. It stays on this site as a reference for what a fixed focus, manually controlled 1080p camera looks like on paper, and it is not a current recommendation. ## What decides between them Whether you need 4K capture, 60 fps at 1080p or infrared support for platform sign-in, which points to the Brio 4K, and whether you want a camera that records a physical shutter over the lens, which points to the C920s. The Facecam records manual exposure control that neither of the other two records, but its manufacturer has discontinued it, so it settles a question rather than a purchase. ## What the record does not settle No price is recorded for any of the three cameras, and no image quality, autofocus behaviour or microphone performance has been measured here. The catalogue holds no privacy shutter specification for the Brio 4K or the Facecam, no software requirement for any of them and no statement about how the C920s shutter is operated. Products covered: - Elgato Facecam (https://abackreviews.com/products/elgato-facecam, alternative): The recorded fixed focus 1080p camera with manual exposure control and a 82 degree diagonal field of view. Its manufacturer has discontinued it, so it settles a question rather than a purchase. - Logitech Brio 4K (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-brio-4k, alternative): The recorded alternative from the same manufacturer. It records up to 4K at 30 fps, 1080p at 60 fps, three field of view presets of 90, 78 or 65 degrees and infrared support, and no privacy shutter is recorded for it. - Logitech C920s PRO HD Webcam (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-c920s-pro-hd-webcam, subject): The subject of this page. Its recorded 1080p at 30 fps, single 78 degree diagonal field of view, autofocus with a glass lens and physical privacy shutter are what the alternatives are measured against. **The Logitech Brio 4K: a higher capture ceiling** The Brio records up to 4K at 30 fps and 1080p at 60 fps, an adjustable field of view with 90, 78 or 65 degrees as three presets, infrared support as yes, and a built-in microphone of dual omni-directional type with a range up to 1.2 m. It records RightLight 3 with HDR, 102 by 27 by 26.5 mm and a weight of 65 g. No privacy shutter is recorded for it. **The Elgato Facecam: a discontinued fixed focus camera** The Facecam records 1080p at 60 fps, a fixed focus prime lens, a field of view adjustable in software at 82 degrees diagonal, a monitor mount and a tripod thread, no built-in microphone, and USB 3.0 or better over Type-C. Its recorded product status is discontinued by the manufacturer, so it is a reference and not a recommendation. **The C920s: the fixed 1080p camera with a shutter** The C920s records 1080p at 30 fps, 720p at 30 fps, a 78 degree diagonal field of view, autofocus with a glass lens, a physical privacy shutter on the lens, a stereo microphone with a range up to 1 m, a universal mounting clip, and an attached 1.5 m USB-A cable. **What decides between them** Whether you need 4K capture, 60 fps at 1080p or infrared support for platform sign-in, which points to the Brio 4K, and whether you want a camera that records a physical shutter over the lens, which points to the C920s. The Facecam records manual exposure control that neither of the other two records. **What the record does not settle** No price is recorded for any of the three cameras, no image quality or autofocus behaviour has been measured here, and no privacy shutter specification is recorded for the Brio 4K or the Facecam. An absent record is not a finding. Questions: - **What are the alternatives to the Logitech C920s?** Two recorded products: the Logitech Brio 4K, which records up to 4K at 30 fps and infrared support, and the Elgato Facecam, a fixed focus 1080p camera that its manufacturer has discontinued. - **Does the Logitech Brio 4K have a privacy shutter?** No privacy shutter is recorded for the Brio 4K, while the C920s records one as a physical shutter on the lens. The catalogue holds no shutter specification for the Brio, so it is an absence rather than a finding. - **What field of view does the Logitech Brio 4K record?** The recorded field of view angle for the Brio 4K is 90, 78 or 65 degrees as three presets, and its field of view is recorded as adjustable. The C920s records a single fixed 78 degrees diagonal. - **Can you still buy the Elgato Facecam?** The Facecam product page states that the camera has been discontinued, and its recorded product status is discontinued by the manufacturer. It is kept as a reference rather than as a current recommendation. - **Does the Elgato Facecam have a built-in microphone?** No. The recorded built-in microphone is no, and no built-in microphone appears in its recorded feature list. The C920s records a stereo microphone with a range up to 1 m. - **Which of these webcams records infrared support?** The Logitech Brio 4K, where infrared support is recorded as yes and linked to Windows Hello style platform authentication. No infrared support is recorded for the C920s or the Facecam. ### Alternatives to the Logitech Lift URL: https://abackreviews.com/alternatives/logitech-lift-alternatives The Lift is a vertical 57 degree mouse recorded at 125 g for small to medium hands. The Logitech Lift is recorded as a vertical ergonomic wireless mouse at a 57 degree grip angle, weighing 125 g, with Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt connectivity, and it is recorded for small to medium hands. Its recorded features are multi device switching and a vertical grip. Two horizontal mice in our catalogue are the products a buyer would compare it against. ## The recorded reasons to look elsewhere **The grip.** The recorded grip angle is vertical, at 57 degrees. A vertical mouse holds the forearm in a handshake position rather than the flat, angled position of a standard mouse. If you want to keep your wrist flat rather than change it, a horizontal mouse is a different proposition. **Hand size in the other direction.** The Lift is recorded for small to medium hands. The MX Master 3S is recorded for medium to large hands, so it is the mouse built for the larger hand. **Surface support.** Surface support is not recorded for the Lift. One of the alternatives below records a statement about glass and most surfaces, and the other records no surface support value at all. ## The Logitech MX Master 3S, for a sculpted shape and more buttons The MX Master 3S is recorded as an ergonomic wireless mouse with an 8000 DPI sensor, a weight of 141 g, Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt connectivity, a stated battery life of up to 70 days on a full charge, and 7 buttons. Its recorded features are multi device switching and quiet switches. The differences from the Lift are shape, weight and controls. The MX Master 3S is horizontal and sculpted for medium to large hands, and it is 16 g heavier at a recorded 141 g against the Lift's 125 g. The Lift's records do not include a button count or a sensor resolution, so the 7 buttons and 8000 DPI are recorded advantages that we cannot weigh against anything on the Lift side. ## The Logitech MX Anywhere 3S, for travel and weight The MX Anywhere 3S is recorded as a compact wireless mouse intended for travel, weighing 99 g, with Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt connectivity, a stated battery life of up to 70 days on a full charge, and recorded surface support that states it works on glass and most surfaces. This is the lighter option, 26 g lighter than the Lift on the recorded figures, and the one with a recorded statement about surfaces. It gives up the vertical grip entirely, and the Lift records multi device switching, and the MX Anywhere 3S records an electromagnetic scroll wheel and multi device switching as well. ## What the records do not settle The Lift has no recorded sensor resolution and no recorded button count, so any comparison of pointing precision or the number of controls stops at the recorded data. Neither mouse records a price. The MX Master 3S and the MX Anywhere 3S record the same battery figure as each other, and no battery figure is recorded for the Lift. Every value here carries the state it was recorded in: read from the manufacturer's own documentation and not yet checked against a specific product page. Products covered: - Logitech Lift (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-lift, subject): The subject of this page. Its recorded vertical grip angle, 125 g weight and small to medium hand size define what each alternative is measured against. - Logitech MX Anywhere 3S (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-anywhere-3s, alternative): Recorded as a compact travel mouse at 99 g with surface support for glass and most surfaces, so it trades the Lift's vertical grip and recorded multi device switching for portability. - Logitech MX Master 3S (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-master-3s, alternative): Recorded as a horizontal sculpted mouse for medium to large hands at 141 g with 7 buttons and an 8000 DPI sensor, so it trades the Lift's vertical grip for palm support and more controls. **The grip angle** The recorded grip angle is vertical, at 57 degrees. A buyer who wants to keep the wrist flat rather than rotate the forearm into a handshake position needs a horizontal mouse instead. **Hand size in the other direction** The recorded intended hand size is small to medium. The MX Master 3S is recorded for medium to large hands, so for a larger hand the horizontal alternative is the one built for it. **The MX Master 3S, horizontal and heavier** The MX Master 3S records an 8000 DPI sensor, 7 buttons, a weight of 141 g and a stated battery life of up to 70 days. The Lift records no sensor resolution and no button count, so those two advantages cannot be priced against the subject. **The MX Anywhere 3S, compact and lighter** The MX Anywhere 3S records a weight of 99 g, a stated battery life of up to 70 days and surface support for glass and most surfaces. The Lift records multi device switching and a vertical grip, and no surface support value. **What the records do not settle** The Lift records no sensor resolution, no button count and no battery figure, and none of the three mice records a price. Every value carries the state it was recorded in and has not been checked against a specific product page. Questions: - **How much lighter is the Logitech Lift than the MX Master 3S?** On the recorded weights, 16 g lighter: 125 g for the Lift against 141 g for the MX Master 3S. - **Is the Logitech Lift smaller than the MX Anywhere 3S?** Not on the recorded figures. The Lift is recorded at 125 g and the MX Anywhere 3S at 99 g, so the Lift is the heavier of the two by 26 g. The records describe the Anywhere 3S as compact and the Lift by its hand size rather than its dimensions. - **Which of these mice records support for glass surfaces?** The MX Anywhere 3S. Its recorded surface support states that it works on glass and most surfaces, while the Lift records no surface support value at all. - **Does the Logitech Lift have as many buttons as the MX Master 3S?** That cannot be answered from our records. The MX Master 3S records 7 buttons, and no button count is recorded for the Lift. ### Alternatives to the Logitech MX Anywhere 3S URL: https://abackreviews.com/alternatives/logitech-mx-anywhere-3s-alternatives The MX Anywhere 3S is a recorded 99 g travel mouse that works on glass and most surfaces. The Logitech MX Anywhere 3S is recorded as a compact wireless mouse intended for travel, weighing 99 g, with Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt connectivity, a stated battery life of up to 70 days on a full charge, and recorded surface support that states it works on glass and most surfaces. No recorded features are listed for it. Two other mice in our catalogue are the products a buyer weighs against it. ## The recorded reasons to look elsewhere **Palm support.** The MX Anywhere 3S is recorded as compact. A mouse recorded as sculpted for medium to large hands is a different object, and one buyer will find the shape restful where the other finds it small. **Grip.** There is no recorded grip angle for the MX Anywhere 3S. A mouse recorded at a 57 degree vertical angle is a different approach to forearm position rather than a variation on the same shape. **The feature list.** No features are recorded for the MX Anywhere 3S, while both alternatives record multi device switching. That is a difference in what our records hold as much as in the products themselves. ## The Logitech MX Master 3S, for a sculpted shape and more controls The MX Master 3S is recorded as an ergonomic wireless mouse with an 8000 DPI sensor, a weight of 141 g, Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt connectivity, a stated battery life of up to 70 days on a full charge, and 7 buttons. Its recorded features are multi device switching and quiet switches. The two mice share the same recorded connectivity and the same stated battery figure. What separates them is size and purpose. The MX Master 3S is 42 g heavier on the recorded weights and is recorded for medium to large hands, with a sculpted shape and a thumb rest, while the MX Anywhere 3S is recorded as compact and built for travel. The MX Master 3S also records a button count and a sensor resolution, and neither is recorded for the MX Anywhere 3S. ## The Logitech Lift, for a vertical grip and smaller hands The Logitech Lift is recorded as a vertical ergonomic wireless mouse at a 57 degree grip angle, weighing 125 g, with Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt connectivity, and it is recorded for small to medium hands. Its recorded features are multi device switching and a vertical grip. Here the trade runs the other way. The Lift is 26 g heavier than the MX Anywhere 3S on the recorded figures, and it gives up the recorded surface support that says the MX Anywhere 3S works on glass. What it adds is a recorded grip angle and a recorded intended hand size, neither of which is recorded for the MX Anywhere 3S. ## What the records do not settle No features are recorded for the MX Anywhere 3S, so a comparison of build characteristics against the alternatives cannot be completed from the data we hold. Neither mouse records a price, and the Lift records up to 24 months on one AA battery, so the 70 day statement applies only to the mice that record it. Every value here carries the state it was recorded in: read from the manufacturer's own documentation and not yet checked against a specific product page. Products covered: - Logitech Lift (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-lift, alternative): Recorded as a vertical mouse at a 57 degree grip angle and 125 g for small to medium hands, so it trades the recorded glass and most surfaces support for a different grip. - Logitech MX Anywhere 3S (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-anywhere-3s, subject): The subject of this page. Its recorded 99 g weight, travel intent and glass and most surfaces support define what each alternative is measured against. - Logitech MX Master 3S (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-master-3s, alternative): Recorded as a sculpted mouse for medium to large hands at 141 g with 7 buttons, an 8000 DPI sensor and quiet switches, so it trades travel weight for palm support and controls. **Palm support and hand size** The MX Anywhere 3S is recorded as compact, and the MX Master 3S is recorded as sculpted for medium to large hands. A buyer who wants the mouse to fill the palm rather than travel in a bag has to accept 42 g more weight. **No recorded grip angle and no recorded features** The MX Anywhere 3S records no grip angle and no feature entries, while the Lift records a 57 degree vertical grip angle and the MX Master 3S records multi device switching and quiet switches. **The MX Master 3S, same connectivity and battery** Both mice record Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt connectivity and a stated battery life of up to 70 days. The MX Master 3S adds a recorded 8000 DPI sensor, 7 buttons, quiet switches and a sculpted shape for medium to large hands. **The Logitech Lift, a recorded vertical grip** The Lift records a 57 degree vertical grip angle, a weight of 125 g and an intended hand size of small to medium. It gives up the recorded glass and most surfaces support and weighs 26 g more than the subject. **What the records do not settle** No features are recorded for the MX Anywhere 3S and no battery figure is recorded for the Lift, so parts of the comparison cannot be completed. Every value carries the state it was recorded in and has not been checked against a specific product page. Questions: - **How much heavier is the MX Master 3S than the MX Anywhere 3S?** On the recorded weights, 42 g heavier: 141 g for the MX Master 3S against 99 g for the MX Anywhere 3S. - **Can the MX Anywhere 3S be used on glass?** Yes. Its recorded surface support states that it works on glass and most surfaces, which is one of the reasons it is recorded as a travel mouse. - **Do the MX Anywhere 3S and the MX Master 3S use the same wireless connection?** Yes. Both record Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt connectivity, and both record a stated battery life of up to 70 days on a full charge. - **Is the Logitech Lift a vertical mouse?** Yes. The recorded grip angle is vertical at 57 degrees, and vertical grip appears in the recorded feature list. ### Alternatives to the Logitech MX Keys Mini URL: https://abackreviews.com/alternatives/logitech-mx-keys-mini-alternatives The MX Keys Mini is a flat, compact wireless keyboard with multi device switching and a battery figure of up to 5 months with backlighting off. The Logitech MX Keys Mini is recorded as a compact low profile wireless keyboard with backlit spherical keycaps, multi device switching and USB-C charging. Its recorded connectivity is Bluetooth and Logi Bolt, and its recorded battery life is up to 5 months with backlighting off. Two mechanical keyboards in our catalogue are the products buyers actually weigh against it. ## The recorded reasons to move away **The typing mechanism.** Our records describe the MX Keys Mini as a low profile keyboard. Nothing in our records places it among the mechanical boards, and no hot-swappable switches are recorded for it. **The feature set.** The recorded features are multi device switching and wireless connectivity. No remapping software is recorded, so a buyer who wants to move keys around is looking at a different kind of product. **The desktop footprint.** The recorded layout is compact with a function row. That keeps the function keys in the usual place in a small board, which is the Mini's main layout argument against the alternatives below. ## The Keychron Q1, for a rebuildable aluminium board The Q1 is recorded as a 75 percent mechanical keyboard with a full aluminium case, hot-swappable switches, backlighting and USB-C connectivity, weighing 1,825 g. The trade is an exchange of mechanism and of posture. You gain hot-swappable sockets, which means the switches can be changed later without soldering, and you gain an aluminium case that the recorded weight suggests stays put on a desk. You give up the compact function row layout, because 75 percent drops the function row into a second row and removes the number pad, and you give up the recorded battery figure because none is recorded for the Q1. ## The Keychron K8 Pro, for a tenkeyless layout with remapping The K8 Pro is recorded as a tenkeyless mechanical keyboard with a plastic case, hot-swappable sockets, USB-C wired and Bluetooth connectivity, and QMK and VIA as the remapping software. This is the alternative for a buyer who wants the mechanical feel and also wants to configure the keys. Against the Mini it is a different footprint that keeps a full function row, and it carries a recorded remapping layer that the Mini's records do not mention. Against it, the Mini is smaller, it has recorded multi device switching, and it has a recorded battery figure of up to 5 months with backlighting off. ## What the records do not settle No weight is recorded for the Mini or for either Keychron board, and no price is recorded for any of the three. No battery figure is recorded for the Keychron boards, so the difference in power management between a flat wireless keyboard and a mechanical board cannot be put a number on. Every value here carries the state it was recorded in: read from the manufacturer's own documentation and not yet checked against a specific product page. Products covered: - Keychron K8 Pro (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-k8-pro, alternative): Recorded as a tenkeyless mechanical board with hot-swappable sockets and QMK and VIA remapping, so it trades the Mini's compact flat layout for a configurable mechanical board. - Keychron Q1 (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-q1, alternative): Recorded as a 75 percent mechanical board with an aluminium case, hot-swappable switches and backlighting, so it trades the Mini's flat keycaps and battery figure for a rebuildable board. - Logitech MX Keys Mini (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-keys-mini, subject): The subject of this page. Its recorded compact layout, flat keycaps, multi device switching and 5 month battery figure define what each alternative is measured against. **Typing mechanism** The Mini is recorded as a low profile keyboard with backlit spherical keycaps. No hot-swappable switches are recorded for it, and nothing in the record places it among the mechanical boards that the alternatives below are. **No recorded remapping software** The recorded features for the Mini are multi device switching and wireless connectivity. A buyer who wants to move keys around has to look at a board that records a remapping layer. **The Q1 as a rebuildable aluminium board** The Q1 records hot-swappable switches, backlighting, a full aluminium case and a weight of 1,825 g in a 75 percent layout. It gains the mechanical mechanism and the case, and gives up the compact function row layout and the recorded battery figure. **The K8 Pro as a configurable tenkeyless board** The K8 Pro records QMK and VIA as the remapping software, hot-swappable sockets and USB-C wired and Bluetooth connectivity in a tenkeyless layout with a plastic case. It gains configuration and a mechanical feel, and gives up the Mini's compact footprint and recorded battery life. **What the records do not settle** No weight, price or battery figure is recorded for the Mini or for the Keychron boards, so only the recorded specifications can be compared. Every value carries the state it was recorded in and has not been checked against a specific product page. Questions: - **Does the Logitech MX Keys Mini have hot-swappable switches?** No hot-swappable switches are recorded for it. Our records describe the Mini as a compact low profile wireless keyboard with backlit spherical keycaps, and that is where the record ends. - **Can I remap keys on the Logitech MX Keys Mini?** No remapping software is recorded for the Mini. The Keychron K8 Pro, which appears on this page as an alternative, records QMK and VIA as its remapping software. - **How long does the Logitech MX Keys Mini battery last?** The recorded battery life is up to 5 months with backlighting off, and the recorded charging connection is USB-C. That condition is part of the figure rather than a separate number. - **Do the Keychron alternatives have a number pad?** No. The Q1 is recorded as 75 percent and the K8 Pro as tenkeyless, so neither includes one. The Mini's recorded layout is compact with a function row, which also rules out a number pad. ### Alternatives to the Logitech MX Master 3S URL: https://abackreviews.com/alternatives/logitech-mx-master-3s-alternatives Three reasons to look past the MX Master 3S: you want less weight, a smaller mouse for travel, or a vertical grip. The MX Master 3S is a good fit for a specific set of hands and preferences. If it does not fit yours, the useful question is which property you want to change. ## Why you might look for an alternative **Weight.** At around 141 grams it is heavy. If you move the cursor across a large display all day, a lighter mouse reduces effort. **Hand size.** It is sized for medium to large hands. In a small hand, the sculpted shape can force you to reach rather than rest. **Grip.** It is a horizontal mouse. If you want your forearm in a handshake position, a vertical mouse is a different ergonomic approach. ## The alternatives The **Logitech Lift** addresses grip and weight: it is vertical, lighter, and sized for smaller hands. You give up the sculpted thumb rest and some buttons. The **Logitech MX Anywhere 3S** addresses portability: it is considerably smaller and lighter and works on more surfaces. You give up palm support for long sessions. ## What does not change Both alternatives come from the same manufacturer and rely on the same configuration software, so the software dependency is unchanged. If you want to avoid vendor software entirely, that is a different search. Products covered: - Logitech Lift (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-lift, alternative): Choose this if you want a vertical grip and a lighter mouse sized for smaller hands. - Logitech MX Anywhere 3S (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-anywhere-3s, alternative): Choose this if portability matters most and you are willing to give up palm support. - Logitech MX Master 3S (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-master-3s, subject) **Weight** Around 141 grams is heavy for constant large cursor movement. **Hand size** The shape is sized for medium to large hands and can force a smaller hand to reach. **Grip** It is horizontal. A vertical mouse is a different ergonomic approach. ### Alternatives to the MOFT Z URL: https://abackreviews.com/alternatives/moft-z-alternatives One recorded alternative to the MOFT Z: the Rain Design mStand, a fixed 150 mm aluminium riser that needs an external keyboard and never folds. There is one recorded alternative to the MOFT Z in this catalogue, and it is the Rain Design mStand. It is also the other stand in the laptop stand category, and the two differ in how they are used rather than in how they look. The MOFT Z is a folding sit-stand. It folds flat to 1.3 cm, half an inch, raises a laptop to 25 cm, 10 inches, and tilts through three angles. The mStand is a fixed block of machined aluminium at 150 mm that stays on the desk. ## What the MOFT Z records The recorded height is 25 cm, 10 inches, standing, with 12 cm at 25 degrees, 19.4 cm at 45 and 25 cm at 60. The recorded folded thickness is 1.3 cm, half an inch. The recorded material is vegan leather, fibreglass, magnets and metal sheets. The recorded weight is 960 g, 33.7 oz, and the recorded dimensions are 279 by 239 by 12.7 mm, 11 by 9.4 by 5 inches. The recorded laptop support is laptops up to 16 inches, and it also works with tablets. The recorded load capacity is up to 22 lb. The recorded adjustable value is yes, three tilt angles and a standing height, and the recorded keyboard access is that it works as a riser with an external keyboard. Folds flat and raises the laptop to standing height are in the recorded feature list. ## What the mStand records The recorded height is 150 mm, 5.9 inches. The recorded material is aluminium, with aluminium body in the recorded feature list. The recorded keyboard access is that it requires an external keyboard. The recorded adjustable value is no. The recorded width and depth are 253 by 190 mm, 10 by 7.5 inches. The recorded weight is 1.46 kg, 3 pounds. The recorded laptop support is that it fits all MacBooks and most notebooks. Its recorded audience is users who use an external keyboard and want a stable fixed-height stand. ## What changes between them Three recorded values carry almost the whole decision. The first is keyboard access. The mStand requires an external keyboard. The MOFT Z works as a riser with an external keyboard and is recorded as a lap desk in its description, so it also has positions where the machine's own keyboard is in reach. The second is adjustment. The mStand records adjustable as no and a single height of 150 mm. The MOFT Z records three tilt angles and a standing height, with recorded heights of 12 cm, 19.4 cm and 25 cm. The third is what happens when you leave. The MOFT Z records a folded thickness of 1.3 cm and a weight of 960 g. The mStand records 1.46 kg and no folded thickness, because it does not fold. Everything else the record holds for the two is close to parallel. Both raise a laptop off the desk, both take a laptop rather than a tablet as the main use, and the mStand records a slightly smaller footprint at 253 by 190 mm against the MOFT Z's 279 by 239 by 12.7 mm. ## What the record does not settle No price is recorded for either stand, no stability or wobble measurement is recorded for either, and no retention force is recorded for the magnets in the MOFT Z. The catalogue holds no compatibility statement beyond the size and load figures, and no sense of how either surface feels under a keyboard. Products covered: - MOFT Z 5-in-1 Sit-Stand Desk (https://abackreviews.com/products/moft-z-5-in-1-sit-stand-desk, subject): The subject of this page. Its recorded folded thickness of 1.3 cm, three tilt angles from 12 cm to 25 cm and 960 g weight are what the alternative is measured against. - Rain Design mStand (https://abackreviews.com/products/rain-design-mstand, alternative): The only other stand in the catalogue, so the only recorded alternative. It records a fixed 150 mm aluminium block at 1.46 kg that requires an external keyboard and never changes height. **The Rain Design mStand: a fixed aluminium riser** The mStand records a height of 150 mm, 5.9 inches, aluminium as its material and aluminium body in its recorded feature list. It records adjustable as no, keyboard access as requiring an external keyboard, a width and depth of 253 by 190 mm, a weight of 1.46 kg, 3 pounds, and laptop support as fitting all MacBooks and most notebooks. **The MOFT Z: a folding sit-stand that moves** The MOFT Z records a height of 25 cm, 10 inches, standing, with 12 cm at 25 degrees, 19.4 cm at 45 and 25 cm at 60, and adjustable as yes, three tilt angles and a standing height. It records a folded thickness of 1.3 cm, half an inch, a weight of 960 g, 33.7 oz, and keyboard access as working as a riser with an external keyboard. **What decides between them** Whether you still type on the laptop keyboard, whether the height has to change, and whether the stand travels with you. Those three recorded values separate the two stands, and every other recorded specification is either close to parallel or absent on one side. **What the record does not settle** No price is recorded for either stand, no stability or wobble measurement is recorded for either, and no retention force is recorded for the magnets in the MOFT Z. The catalogue holds no compatibility statement beyond the size and load figures. Questions: - **What is the main alternative to the MOFT Z?** The Rain Design mStand. It is the only other stand in this category, and it records a fixed height of 150 mm in aluminium against the MOFT Z's three tilt angles and 1.3 cm folded thickness. - **Do I need an external keyboard with the Rain Design mStand?** Yes. The recorded keyboard access is that it requires an external keyboard, and the recorded adjustable value is no, so there is no lower position in which the laptop keyboard stays in reach. - **Does the MOFT Z need an external keyboard?** Only in the raised position. The recorded keyboard access is that it works as a riser with an external keyboard, while its recorded description also names a lap desk among the arrangements. - **Which of the two stands is lighter?** The MOFT Z records 960 g, 33.7 oz, and the mStand records 1.46 kg, 3 pounds, so the folding stand is 500 g lighter. The fixed block also records no folded thickness, because it does not fold. - **How many laptop stands does this catalogue cover?** Two. The MOFT Z and the Rain Design mStand are the only stands recorded, and the mStand is therefore the only recorded alternative to the MOFT Z. - **Which stand allows a standing position?** The MOFT Z. Its recorded height is 25 cm, 10 inches, standing, and it records three tilt angles with a standing height, while the mStand records one fixed height of 150 mm and adjustable as no. ### Alternatives to the Samsung T7 Shield URL: https://abackreviews.com/alternatives/samsung-t7-shield-alternatives The plain Samsung T7 is the one recorded alternative to the Shield: the same interface, speeds and encryption, with a 2 m drop rating and no water rating. There is one recorded alternative to the Samsung T7 Shield in this catalogue, and it is the drive the Shield is built on: the Samsung T7 portable SSD. Everything the Shield does not change, the T7 does the same, and the recorded differences between them are the drop rating, the water rating and the size and weight of the body. That is worth stating plainly rather than padding the list. A page that named anything else here would have to justify the overlap from the recorded data, and in the storage category there is nothing else recorded to justify it. ## What the T7 Shield records The T7 Shield is recorded as a ruggedised portable solid state drive with an IP 65 water resistance rating and a drop resistance of up to 3 m. Its recorded interface is USB 3.2 Gen 2 at 10 Gbps, its recorded read speed is up to 1,050 MB/sec and its recorded write speed is up to 1,000 MB/sec. Its recorded capacities are 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB, its recorded encryption is AES 256-bit hardware encryption, its recorded weight is 98 g and its recorded dimensions are 59 by 88 by 13 mm. The recorded warranty is three years, limited, and the recorded operating systems are Windows 7 or later, macOS 10.10 or later and Android Lollipop or later. ## What changes with the plain T7 The interface, the two speed figures, the three capacities, the encryption and the warranty are all recorded identically for the plain T7. A buyer moving between the two drives is moving between the same specification. The recorded differences are physical. The plain T7 records a drop resistance of up to 2 m, a metre less than the Shield, and no water resistance rating at all. It records dimensions of 85 by 57 by 8 mm against the Shield's 59 by 88 by 13 mm, so it is the flatter and narrower object. Its recorded weight is 72 g on the datasheet and 2.0 oz on the product page, and the catalogue marks that entry as conflicting, so the gap to the Shield's recorded 98 g is close to 26 g without being an exact figure. Its recorded description calls it a pocket-sized external SSD with a metal body, and its recorded audience is people who need fast portable storage for large files and travel frequently. ## Which one the record points to The Shield is the one to choose when the drive travels somewhere it might be dropped or get wet, because that is the only difference the record draws. The plain T7 is the one to choose when the drive lives in a laptop bag between a desk and a sofa, because the smaller, flatter body is recorded for that and the ratings add nothing there. ## What the record does not settle No price is recorded for either drive, and no sustained transfer figure is recorded for either. The plain T7's weight is marked as conflicting between two manufacturer pages, and the catalogue publishes that disagreement rather than resolving it by choosing a figure. Neither drive records an endurance rating, a temperature range or a seal detail behind the Shield's IP 65 code. Products covered: - Samsung T7 Portable SSD (https://abackreviews.com/products/samsung-t7-portable-ssd, alternative): The only other drive in the catalogue, so the only recorded alternative. It shares the interface, speeds, capacities and encryption, and changes the drop rating to 2 m, drops the water rating and records a smaller body. - Samsung T7 Shield (https://abackreviews.com/products/samsung-t7-shield, subject): The subject of this page. Its recorded IP 65 water resistance, 3 m drop resistance, 98 g weight and 59 by 88 by 13 mm body are what the alternative is measured against. **The plain T7: the same specification in a smaller, flatter body** The interface, the read and write speeds, the capacities, the AES 256-bit encryption and the three year warranty are recorded identically for the T7. What changes is the physical side: a recorded drop resistance of up to 2 m instead of 3 m, no recorded water rating, dimensions of 85 by 57 by 8 mm and a recorded weight of 72 g on the datasheet against the Shield's 98 g. **The T7 Shield: the same specification with the ratings added** The Shield keeps the recorded interface, speeds, capacities, encryption and warranty and adds a recorded IP 65 water rating and a drop resistance of up to 3 m. The cost is the recorded weight of 98 g and the recorded dimensions of 59 by 88 by 13 mm, which make it the larger object of the two. **What decides between them** Whether the drive gets dropped or wet, and how much space it takes up in the bag. Everything else recorded for the two drives, the interface, the speeds, the capacities, the encryption and the warranty, is identical, so no other recorded value separates them. **What the record does not settle** No price is recorded for either drive, no sustained transfer figure is recorded for either, and the T7's weight is marked as conflicting between the datasheet and the product page. The catalogue publishes that disagreement rather than choosing a figure. Questions: - **What is the main alternative to the Samsung T7 Shield?** The Samsung T7 portable SSD. It is recorded with the same USB 3.2 Gen 2 interface, the same peak speed figures, the same 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB capacities and the same AES 256-bit hardware encryption. - **Is the plain T7 as rugged as the T7 Shield?** No. The plain T7 records a drop resistance of up to 2 m and no water resistance rating, while the Shield records an IP 65 water rating and a drop resistance of up to 3 m. - **Does the T7 Shield hold more than the plain T7?** No. The recorded capacities are 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB for both drives, so the choice between them is not a choice about how much data the drive holds. - **Which is heavier, the T7 Shield or the plain T7?** The Shield records 98 g. The plain T7 records 72 g on the datasheet and 2.0 oz on the product page, and the catalogue marks that entry as conflicting between the two manufacturer pages. - **Do both drives support encryption?** Yes. Both record AES 256-bit hardware encryption, and hardware encryption appears in the recorded feature list for each of them. - **Do the two drives run at the same speed?** On the record, yes. Both record USB 3.2 Gen 2 at 10 Gbps, a read speed of up to 1,050 MB/sec and a write speed of up to 1,000 MB/sec, and both of those figures are peaks rather than sustained rates. ### Alternatives to the Shure MV7 URL: https://abackreviews.com/alternatives/shure-mv7-alternatives The MV7 is a recorded dynamic USB and XLR microphone with cardioid pickup and built in headphone monitoring. The Shure MV7 is recorded as a hybrid USB and XLR dynamic microphone with cardioid pickup and built in headphone monitoring. Its recorded element type is dynamic, its recorded pickup pattern is cardioid, unidirectional, its recorded connection is USB and XLR, and its recorded headphone monitoring is built in. Its recorded audience is people who want a forgiving dynamic microphone and the option to move to an audio interface later. One product in our catalogue is a recorded alternative. ## The recorded reasons to look elsewhere **One pattern only.** The MV7 records cardioid and cardioid only. The alternative records four pickup patterns, cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo, which is the reason to look at it. **A USB only path.** The MV7 records USB and XLR. The alternative records a USB connection only, so there is no recorded second output to move into a hardware setup. **What you give up in return.** The MV7's recorded audience note is built around a forgiving dynamic microphone. The alternative's recorded audience note is built around recording in a quiet room, and it records a condenser element. ## The Blue Yeti, a USB condenser with switchable patterns The Yeti is recorded as a USB condenser microphone with switchable pickup patterns and an integrated stand. Its recorded element type is condenser, its recorded pickup patterns are cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo, its recorded connection is USB, and its recorded headphone monitoring is built in. The choice comes down to two recorded properties. If you want to change how the microphone listens, the Yeti records four patterns and the MV7 records one. If you want the option to move to an audio interface later, the MV7 records an XLR connection and the Yeti does not. There is also a practical difference in what the records say about setup. The Yeti records an integrated stand. The MV7's record contains no mounting detail, so what supports it on a desk or an arm is not described in our data. Both products record built in headphone monitoring, so monitoring is not a reason to choose one over the other. ## What the records do not settle No sensitivity, noise figure or room measurement is recorded for either microphone, so neither can be placed ahead of the other on sound quality, and neither record says how either behaves in a noisy or untreated room. The Yeti's recorded audience note assumes a quiet room. No price is recorded for either product. Every value here carries the state it was recorded in: read from the manufacturer's own documentation and not yet checked against a specific product page. Products covered: - Blue Yeti (https://abackreviews.com/products/blue-yeti, alternative): Recorded as a condenser with four switchable pickup patterns, a USB only connection and an integrated stand, so it trades the XLR output and fixed pattern for flexibility. - Shure MV7 (https://abackreviews.com/products/shure-mv7, subject): The subject of this page. Its recorded dynamic element, single cardioid pattern and USB and XLR connections define what the alternative is measured against. **Cardioid only** The recorded pickup pattern for the MV7 is cardioid, unidirectional, with no other pattern listed. The alternative records four patterns, so a buyer who needs to change how the microphone listens has to change product. **The XLR route** The recorded connection is USB and XLR, and the recorded audience note describes the option to move to an audio interface later. The alternative records USB only, so that route disappears. **Element type and setup** The Yeti is recorded as a condenser with an integrated stand, while the MV7 is recorded as a dynamic with no mounting detail in its record. Both record built in headphone monitoring. **What the records do not settle** No sensitivity, noise figure, room behaviour measurement or price is recorded for either microphone, so the sound comparison cannot be made from our data. Every value carries the state it was recorded in. Questions: - **Can you change the pickup pattern on the Shure MV7?** No. The recorded pickup pattern is cardioid, unidirectional, and no other pattern is listed for it. The Blue Yeti records four selectable patterns. - **Does the Shure MV7 work over USB without an interface?** Yes. USB is one of the two recorded connections, and headphone monitoring is recorded as built in, so no separate interface is needed for the recorded features. - **Does the Blue Yeti need a separate stand?** An integrated stand is part of the recorded description of the Blue Yeti, so no separate support is recorded as necessary for it. - **Which of these two microphones records a condenser element?** The Blue Yeti. The Shure MV7 is recorded as a dynamic microphone with a cardioid, unidirectional pickup pattern. ## Questions ### Does the Anker 555 support dual monitors? URL: https://abackreviews.com/questions/does-the-anker-555-support-dual-monitors The Anker 555 records one HDMI output and no multiple display support, and the manufacturer states that display is carried over HDMI only. No. The recorded port list for the Anker 555 is 8 in 1, and those ports are HDMI, Ethernet, SD and microSD readers, USB-A and USB-C data ports and pass-through power delivery. There is one HDMI output in that list, the recorded HDMI output is up to 4K at 30 Hz, and no multiple display support is recorded for this hub. The manufacturer is more direct than our record is. On the Anker product page for this model, display is carried over HDMI alone, and the hub does not carry a display signal over its USB-C ports. That is a statement about the hardware, not a gap in the documentation. In the same category, the CalDigit TS4 does record multiple display support as a feature. Its recorded display support is up to 8K on one display on compatible Windows computers and up to 6K on macOS, with dual 6K on Apple M1 Pro and M1 Max. That is the recorded difference between the two products in our catalogue. ## What the record settles - One HDMI output, at up to 4K and 30 Hz. - Eight ports in total, of which one is HDMI. - Display is carried over HDMI only. The USB-C ports are data ports. - A single display is the configuration this hub supports. - The recorded power delivery pass-through is up to 85 W of input, with laptop charging wattage depending on hub draw, so display use and charging compete for the same connection. ## What it does not settle The record does not list which laptop models are supported, what the full display mode list is, or whether the 4K at 30 Hz figure applies at every resolution. The product page lists a 4K at 60 Hz output, which conflicts with the 30 Hz figure we had recorded, so both are shown on the product page with the conflict marked. The same caution applies to the operating system side. No display support statement is recorded for any platform. ## Verification state The port list, the display output and the statement that display is carried over HDMI only were read from the manufacturer's own product pages. That is the documented behaviour, not a confirmed result from our own use. Products covered: - Anker 555 USB-C Hub (https://abackreviews.com/products/anker-555-usb-c-hub, subject): The subject of this question. Its recorded 8 in 1 port list, single HDMI output and bus powered design are the values the answer is built on. **One display, and no display over USB-C** The hub carries one HDMI output, at up to 4K and 30 Hz as recorded, and the manufacturer states that display is not carried over the USB-C ports. The USB-C and USB-A ports are data ports, so a second display needs a different dock. **Verification state** The port list, the display output and the statement that display is carried over HDMI only were read from the manufacturer's own product pages. The record does not list which laptop models are supported, what the full display mode list is, or any operating system support statement. Questions: - **How many monitors can the Anker 555 drive?** One. The recorded port list contains a single HDMI output, and the manufacturer states that the hub carries display over HDMI only, so the USB-C ports cannot be used for a second display. - **Does the Anker 555 have an HDMI port?** Yes. HDMI is in the recorded 8 in 1 port list, and the recorded HDMI output is up to 4K at 30 Hz, with the product page listing 4K at 60 Hz. - **Can the USB-C port on the Anker 555 carry a display?** No. The manufacturer states that the hub carries media display over the HDMI port only, and that it does not support media display over the USB-C ports. - **Which hub in our catalogue records support for multiple displays?** The CalDigit TS4. Its recorded features include multiple display support, and its protocol is recorded as Thunderbolt 4. - **Does the Anker 555 need power from a wall socket?** It is recorded as bus powered, so it draws from the laptop. The recorded pass-through is up to 85 W of input, with laptop charging wattage depending on the hub draw. ### Does the CalDigit TS3 Plus Work With Thunderbolt 4 Laptops? URL: https://abackreviews.com/questions/does-the-caldigit-ts3-plus-work-with-thunderbolt-4-laptops The record settles that the TS3 Plus speaks Thunderbolt 3 and the TS4 speaks Thunderbolt 4, and holds no compatibility statement between them. The catalogue does not record a compatibility statement between the CalDigit TS3 Plus and a Thunderbolt 4 laptop, so it can neither confirm nor rule the pairing out. What it does record is the protocol on each side, the TS3 Plus as Thunderbolt 3 and the CalDigit TS4 as Thunderbolt 4, and the display behaviour the manufacturer states for Apple silicon. That is a thinner answer than most buyers want, so this page sets out what the record does hold and where it stops. ## What the record settles - The TS3 Plus records the protocol Thunderbolt 3. - The TS4 records the protocol Thunderbolt 4. - The TS3 Plus records 15 ports, up to 87 W of laptop charging and 1 GbE Ethernet. - The TS4 records 18 ports, up to 98 W of laptop charging and 2.5 GbE Ethernet. - The TS3 Plus records two displays at up to 4K 60 Hz each, or one display at up to 5K 60 Hz over Thunderbolt. - The TS4 records up to 8K on one display on compatible Windows computers, up to 6K on macOS and dual 6K on Apple M1 Pro and M1 Max. - Both record an external power supply as the power source, and the TS3 Plus records a 180 W adapter. - The TS3 Plus records macOS 10.12 or later and Windows 10 or later as its supported operating systems. ## The Apple silicon condition the manufacturer states The manufacturer's own statement is the part that answers the question a buyer with a recent Mac actually has. Apple M1 and M2 laptops support only one external display through their Thunderbolt port, while M1 Pro and M1 Max support two. On a base M1 or M2 Mac that limit sits on the laptop rather than on the dock, and it applies before any question about which dock is plugged in. On an M1 Pro or M1 Max the dock's recorded two-display support is available, which is where the TS3 Plus's recorded 4K 60 Hz per display figures apply. ## What the record does not settle There is no recorded compatibility matrix, no recorded statement about a Thunderbolt 4 host recognising a Thunderbolt 3 dock, and no recorded note about what a host does with a device that negotiates the older protocol. The catalogue holds no price for either dock, so the cost comparison cannot be made here either. It also holds no record of how the two docks behave with a particular host, because neither dock was connected for this page. Every value here is documentation. ## The practical reading If the laptop on the desk is a Thunderbolt 3 machine, the TS3 Plus is the recorded match, with Thunderbolt 3, up to 87 W of charging, two displays at up to 4K 60 Hz each and 15 ports. If the laptop is a Thunderbolt 4 machine and the requirement is Thunderbolt 4 bandwidth, 2.5 GbE Ethernet, a microSD slot or the higher charging figure, the TS4 is the product the record points to. For a Thunderbolt 4 laptop buyer who simply wants a desk dock with power and two displays, the honest position is that the record does not settle the TS3 Plus against a Thunderbolt 4 host, and the manufacturer documentation for the exact machine is where that has to be confirmed. ## Verification state The protocols, the port counts, the charging figures and the Ethernet speeds were read from the manufacturer's own product and support pages, and the Apple display statement comes from the same manufacturer. None of it is a result from our own use. Products covered: - CalDigit TS3 Plus (https://abackreviews.com/products/caldigit-ts3-plus, subject): The subject of this question. Its recorded Thunderbolt 3 protocol, 15 ports, up to 87 W of charging and recorded display support are the values the answer is built on. - CalDigit TS4 Thunderbolt Station (https://abackreviews.com/products/caldigit-ts4, competitor): The recorded Thunderbolt 4 dock in the same category, with 18 ports, up to 98 W of charging, 2.5 GbE Ethernet and dual 6K on Apple M1 Pro and M1 Max recorded against it. **Verification state and what the record does not settle** The protocols, port counts, charging figures and Ethernet speeds were read from the manufacturer's product and support pages. The catalogue holds no compatibility statement between a Thunderbolt 3 dock and a Thunderbolt 4 host, no price for either dock, and no record of either dock in use. **The Apple silicon display limit the manufacturer states** Apple M1 and M2 laptops support only one external display through their Thunderbolt port, while M1 Pro and M1 Max support two. The limit sits on the laptop, so it applies to the dock's recorded two-display support before any choice of dock is made. **What the record points a Thunderbolt 4 buyer to** The TS4 records the Thunderbolt 4 protocol, 18 ports, up to 98 W of laptop charging, 2.5 GbE Ethernet and support for up to 6K on macOS with dual 6K on Apple M1 Pro and M1 Max, which is what a buyer who needs the newer protocol recorded should look at. Questions: - **Does the CalDigit TS3 Plus work with a Thunderbolt 4 laptop?** The catalogue holds no compatibility statement either way. It records the TS3 Plus as a Thunderbolt 3 dock and the TS4 as Thunderbolt 4, so the pairing has to be confirmed with the manufacturer for the exact machine. - **What protocol does the TS3 Plus use?** Thunderbolt 3 is the recorded protocol, and the CalDigit TS4 is recorded as Thunderbolt 4. - **How many displays can an Apple M1 laptop show through a dock?** One. The manufacturer states that Apple M1 and M2 laptops support only one external display through their Thunderbolt port, while M1 Pro and M1 Max support two. - **Does the TS3 Plus charge a Thunderbolt 4 laptop?** The recorded laptop charging figure is up to 87 W and the recorded power source is an external power supply with a 180 W adapter. Whether a Thunderbolt 4 host accepts that charging is not recorded. - **Which CalDigit dock records 2.5 GbE Ethernet?** The TS4, at a recorded 2.5 GbE against the 1 GbE recorded for the TS3 Plus. - **Does the TS3 Plus need a power adapter?** Yes. The recorded power source is an external power supply, a 180 W adapter, and being a powered dock is in the recorded feature list. ### Does the CalDigit TS4 need a power adapter? URL: https://abackreviews.com/questions/does-the-caldigit-ts4-need-a-power-adapter The CalDigit TS4 records an external power supply as its power source and up to 98 W of laptop charging. The records do not state what ships in the box. Yes. The recorded power source for the CalDigit TS4 is an external power supply, so the dock is not bus powered and needs a power source of its own. Its recorded laptop charging is up to 98 W, which is the figure that makes the external supply necessary rather than optional. ## What the record settles The TS4's recorded specifications are a protocol of Thunderbolt 4, a port count of 18, laptop charging of up to 98 W, Ethernet of 2.5 GbE, and an external power supply as the power source. Its recorded features are wired Ethernet, multiple display support and being a powered dock. The practical consequence of those values is fixed. A powered dock with 18 ports and high wattage laptop charging is a desk fixture. It needs a socket, and the laptop connected to it is charged by the dock rather than by the laptop's own charger. For comparison within our category, the Anker 555 is recorded as bus powered, with a recorded pass through of up to 85 W of input and laptop charging wattage that depends on hub draw. That is a different arrangement: the laptop charges through the hub, and the hub takes its power from the laptop. ## What it does not settle The record does not state the wattage of the power supply itself, whether a supply ships in the box, or whether the supply is sold separately in some regions. It does not state what happens to laptop charging if the dock is connected without the supply, because that behaviour is not part of the record. It also does not record a price, and the difference between a powered dock and a bus powered hub is one of hardware and use rather than a figure on a shared scale. ## Verification state Every value here was read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page. It is the documented specification, not a confirmed result from our own use. Products covered: - CalDigit TS4 Thunderbolt Station (https://abackreviews.com/products/caldigit-ts4, subject): The subject of this question. Its recorded external power supply, 18 ports and up to 98 W of laptop charging are the values the answer is built on. **No supply wattage and no box contents** The record does not state the wattage of the power supply, whether a supply is included, whether it is sold separately in some regions, or what happens to laptop charging if the dock is connected without it. **Verification state** Every value on this page was read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page. It is the documented specification, not a confirmed result from our own use. Questions: - **Is the CalDigit TS4 bus powered?** No. The recorded power source is an external power supply, and being a powered dock appears in the recorded feature list. - **How much power does the CalDigit TS4 deliver to a laptop?** The recorded laptop charging figure is up to 98 W. That is the wattage the laptop receives, not the input rating of the power supply. - **Does the CalDigit TS4 need a Thunderbolt 4 port on the laptop?** Its recorded protocol is Thunderbolt 4, so the dock connects over that protocol. The record does not list specific laptop models. - **Is a power supply included with the CalDigit TS4?** Our records do not say. The external power supply is recorded as the power source, but what ships in the box is not documented in the data we hold. ### Does the Elgato Facecam work without software? URL: https://abackreviews.com/questions/does-the-elgato-facecam-work-without-software The Elgato Facecam records a field of view adjustable in software and manual exposure control. Partly, and the recorded specifications show you exactly where the software sits. The field of view for the Elgato Facecam is recorded as adjustable in software, and manual exposure control appears in the recorded feature list. Two of the camera's recorded controls are therefore tied to the software, which tells you the software is a genuine part of the setup rather than an optional extra. ## What the record settles - Resolution: 1080p at 60 fps. - Lens: a fixed focus prime. - Field of view: adjustable in software. - Mounting: a monitor mount and a tripod thread. - Recorded feature: manual exposure control. The fixed focus prime is worth separating out, because it is a hardware answer rather than a software one. A fixed focus lens does not need software to stay in focus, and it is also the reason the camera is not recorded with an autofocus specification. ## What it does not settle The record does not state whether the camera captures video at all with no software installed on the computer. There is no operating system requirement recorded, no software dependency specification, and no statement about what happens to the video output when the camera is plugged in and nothing is running. We cannot tell you from this data that the camera is unusable without software, and we cannot tell you that it is entirely independent of it either. Nor does the record cover the software itself: not its name, not the platforms it runs on, and not whether it is needed for recording or only for the two controls named above. ## Verification state Every value here was read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page. It is the documented specification, not a confirmed result from our own use, and the software behaviour is absent from the record rather than recorded as either positive or negative. Products covered: - Elgato Facecam (https://abackreviews.com/products/elgato-facecam, subject): The subject of this question. Its recorded software adjustable field of view, manual exposure control and fixed focus prime lens are the values the answer is built on. **No operating system or capture dependency is recorded** The record does not state whether the camera captures without software installed, gives no system requirements, names no software and does not say whether the software is required for recording or only for the two recorded controls. **Verification state** Every value on this page was read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page. It is the documented specification, and the software behaviour is absent from the record rather than recorded as either positive or negative. Questions: - **Does the Elgato Facecam need software to adjust the field of view?** Yes. The recorded field of view specification says it is adjustable in software, so that control depends on the software being available. - **What resolution does the Elgato Facecam record?** 1080p at 60 fps. That is the only resolution in the recorded specifications for this camera. - **Does the Elgato Facecam have autofocus?** No autofocus is recorded. The recorded lens is a fixed focus prime, which is a different mechanism and does not depend on software. - **How do you mount the Elgato Facecam?** The recorded mounting is a monitor mount and a tripod thread. - **Can the Elgato Facecam be used with no software installed?** Our records do not say. They record a field of view adjustable in software and manual exposure control as a feature, but they do not state whether the camera captures video without the software. ### Does the Keychron K8 Pro support remapping? URL: https://abackreviews.com/questions/does-the-keychron-k8-pro-support-remapping The Keychron K8 Pro records QMK and VIA as its remapping software, so key positions and layers can be changed. Yes. The recorded remapping software for the Keychron K8 Pro is QMK and VIA, so the key layout of this board can be changed rather than fixed at the factory. Hot-swappable switches are also recorded as yes, which means the switch sockets can be opened and the switches replaced without soldering. ## What the record actually says The K8 Pro's recorded specifications list four values: a tenkeyless layout, USB-C wired and Bluetooth connectivity, QMK and VIA as the remapping software, and hot-swappable switches as yes. The remapping entry is the one that answers this question. QMK is the firmware layer that changes how the board interprets key presses, and VIA is the configuration interface that sits on top of it. Between them they cover the two things a buyer usually means by remapping: moving keys to different positions, and changing what a key does in a given layer. ## What this settles - The board can be configured rather than left on a fixed default layout. - The configuration is not limited to what a single vendor application offers, because the record names a firmware layer and a configuration interface rather than one app. - You can change switches as well as layouts, so a switch change does not mean giving up a configured board. ## What it does not settle The record does not say which layers are available, how many layers the board supports, or what the exact key positions are in the default layout. It also does not say whether the VIA configuration is browser based, whether it needs an internet connection, or whether any particular feature requires the firmware to be updated first. If a specific layout matters to you, that has to be checked in the manufacturer documentation for the exact revision you are buying. Every value above is recorded as read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page, so treat it as the documented specification rather than as a verified result. Products covered: - Keychron K8 Pro (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-k8-pro, subject): The subject of this question. Its recorded QMK and VIA remapping software and hot-swappable switches are the values the answer is built on. **No layer count and no default key map** The record names QMK and VIA but does not list a layer count, a default key position map, a requirement for an internet connection or a firmware update step. Those details are not in the data we hold. **Verification state** Every value on this page was read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page. It is the documented specification, not a measured result, and no configuration was carried out on our side. Questions: - **What remapping software does the Keychron K8 Pro use?** QMK and VIA. Both are named in the recorded specifications for this board, which is the entry that answers the question. - **Can you change the switches on the Keychron K8 Pro?** Yes. Hot-swappable switches are recorded as yes, so the switch sockets can be opened and the switches replaced without soldering. - **Does the K8 Pro work both wired and wirelessly?** Yes. Connectivity is recorded as USB-C wired and Bluetooth, and wireless connectivity is in the recorded feature list. - **How many remappable layers does the K8 Pro have?** The record does not say. It names QMK and VIA as the remapping software but lists no layer count, so that figure has to be found in the manufacturer documentation for the revision you buy. ### Does the Keychron Q1 support Bluetooth? URL: https://abackreviews.com/questions/does-the-keychron-q1-support-bluetooth The Keychron Q1 offers wired USB-C connectivity and a Bluetooth option, unlike the original all-wired Q1 release. Confirm the exact revision before buying. The answer depends on the revision you buy. Keychron has shipped Q1 revisions with different connectivity options, and listings are often reused across revisions. ## What to check before buying - Confirm the exact model name and revision on the listing and the manufacturer page. - Look for an explicit Bluetooth statement rather than assuming wireless is included. - Check how many devices the board can pair with if you plan to switch between machines. ## Why this matters Connectivity is the specification most likely to change between revisions of the same product name. Because the product identity and its variants are separate in our database, we do not treat a wireless claim on one revision as a universal property of the Q1. If the listing does not state the revision clearly, treat the connectivity as unconfirmed. Products covered: - Keychron Q1 (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-q1, subject) **Revision dependence** Connectivity has changed between revisions of the same product name. Confirm the exact revision in the listing. ### Does the Logitech Brio 4K support Windows Hello? URL: https://abackreviews.com/questions/does-the-logitech-brio-4k-support-windows-hello The Logitech Brio 4K records infrared support, which is what Windows Hello relies on. Whether a given laptop has the sensor is a different question. Yes, on the recorded evidence. The Logitech Brio 4K records infrared support as yes, and infrared authentication support is in the recorded feature list. Its recorded description names infrared support for platform authentication, and its recorded audience is people who need 4K capture or Windows Hello style authentication and are willing to pay for it. ## What the record settles - Infrared support: yes. - Recorded feature: infrared authentication support. - Resolution: up to 4K at 30 fps, and 1080p at 60 fps. - Focus: autofocus. - Field of view: adjustable. Infrared is the part that matters for authentication. A camera that records infrared support has an imaging path for the face recognition that a sign-in flow uses, which is why the record ties it to platform authentication rather than to general image capture. ## What it does not settle No platform version is recorded. Nothing in the data names a specific Windows release, an edition, or an enrolment procedure, so we cannot tell you that the camera works with the authentication flow on any particular machine. There is also no record of a driver, of an application requirement, or of how the camera is enrolled. For comparison, the Elgato Facecam in our catalogue records no infrared specification at all, so on the recorded data the Brio 4K is the one of the two webcams we hold that can answer this question. ## Verification state Every value here was read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page. It is the documented specification, not a confirmed result from our own use, and the specific platform support remains unverified. Products covered: - Logitech Brio 4K (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-brio-4k, subject): The subject of this question. Its recorded infrared support and 4K capture modes are the values the answer is built on. **No platform version and no enrolment detail** No Windows release, edition, driver or enrolment procedure is recorded, so the record supports the presence of infrared authentication support without confirming the authentication flow on any particular machine. **Verification state** Every value on this page was read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page. It is the documented specification, not a confirmed result from our own use, and the platform support remains unverified. Questions: - **Does the Logitech Brio 4K support Windows Hello?** The recorded infrared support is yes, and the recorded description names infrared support for platform authentication. Specific platform versions are not recorded. - **What resolution does the Logitech Brio 4K capture at?** Up to 4K at 30 fps, and 1080p at 60 fps. Both modes are recorded for this camera. - **Does the Brio 4K have autofocus?** Yes. Focus is recorded as autofocus. - **Is infrared support recorded for the Elgato Facecam?** No. The Facecam's recorded specifications contain no infrared entry, so the record does not cover authentication support for that camera. ### Does the Logitech C920s Have A Privacy Shutter? URL: https://abackreviews.com/questions/does-the-logitech-c920s-have-a-privacy-shutter The C920s records a physical privacy shutter on the lens, while no shutter is recorded for the Brio 4K or the discontinued Facecam. Yes. The Logitech C920s PRO HD Webcam records a physical privacy shutter: the recorded privacy shutter is yes, a physical shutter on the lens, and a physical privacy shutter appears in the recorded feature list. That is the whole of the answer, and the catalogue holds no ambiguity about it. The useful part of the question is what a shutter does and does not tell you about the rest of the camera. ## What the record settles - Privacy shutter: yes, a physical shutter on the lens. - Resolution: 1080p at 30 fps, 720p at 30 fps. - Field of view angle: 78 degrees diagonal. - Focus: autofocus with a glass lens. - Built-in microphone: yes, stereo, with a range up to 1 m. - Mounting: a universal mounting clip that fits laptops and monitors. A tripod is not included. - Cable: 1.5 m, attached USB-A. USB connection: USB-A. - Dimensions: 43.3 by 94 by 71 mm including the mounting clip. Weight: 162 g, 5.71 oz. - Operating systems: Windows 8 or later, macOS 10.10 or later, ChromeOS. The recorded intended user wants a fixed 1080p camera for calls and streaming, with a shutter they can close without unplugging it. The shutter is a mechanical barrier over the lens rather than a setting in software, and that is the reason the camera is worth a page of its own. ## What the other two cameras record The Logitech Brio 4K records up to 4K at 30 fps, 1080p at 60 fps, autofocus, an adjustable field of view with 90, 78 or 65 degrees as three presets, infrared support as yes, and a built-in microphone of dual omni-directional type with a range up to 1.2 m. No privacy shutter is recorded for it. The Elgato Facecam records 1080p at 60 fps, a fixed focus prime lens, a field of view adjustable in software, 82 degrees diagonal, a monitor mount and a tripod thread, and a built-in microphone of no. Its manufacturer states that the camera has been discontinued, and its recorded product status is discontinued by the manufacturer. No privacy shutter is recorded for it either. An absent record is not a finding. The catalogue holds no privacy shutter specification for either of those cameras, which means the question has to be put to the manufacturer for them rather than answered from here. ## What the record does not settle There is no recorded statement about how the shutter is operated, whether it can be closed while the camera is in use, or whether the microphone is muted when it is closed. There is no recorded indicator light, no recorded indicator behaviour, and no recorded software requirement for the camera at all. The catalogue records what the hardware is, not what a person experiences on a call. If the question behind the question is whether the camera can be trusted in a shared room, the recorded shutter is the strongest part of the answer, and everything else about image and sound quality is not covered by the record. Products covered: - Logitech Brio 4K (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-brio-4k, competitor): The recorded comparison from the same manufacturer. It records 4K capture, three field of view presets and infrared support, and no privacy shutter is recorded for it. - Logitech C920s PRO HD Webcam (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-c920s-pro-hd-webcam, subject): The subject of this question. Its recorded physical privacy shutter on the lens, 1080p at 30 fps and 78 degree diagonal field of view are the values the answer is built on. **Verification state and what the record does not settle** The privacy shutter, resolution, field of view, focus, microphone, mounting, cable, dimensions, weight and operating systems were read from the manufacturer's product page. The catalogue holds no statement about how the shutter is operated, no indicator light behaviour and no software requirement for the camera. **What the other Logitech camera in the catalogue records** The Brio 4K records up to 4K at 30 fps, 1080p at 60 fps, an adjustable field of view with 90, 78 or 65 degrees as three presets, infrared support as yes, and a dual omni-directional microphone with a range up to 1.2 m. No privacy shutter is recorded for it. Questions: - **Does the Logitech C920s have a privacy shutter?** Yes. The recorded privacy shutter is yes, a physical shutter on the lens, and a physical privacy shutter appears in the recorded feature list for the camera. - **Is the C920s shutter physical or a software setting?** It is physical. The recorded value is yes, a physical shutter on the lens, and the recorded feature list names a physical privacy shutter rather than a software control. - **Does the Logitech Brio 4K have a privacy shutter?** No privacy shutter is recorded for the Brio 4K. The catalogue holds a shutter specification for the C920s only, so this page cannot tell you whether the Brio has one. - **Does the Elgato Facecam have a built-in microphone?** No. The recorded built-in microphone is no, and no built-in microphone appears in its recorded feature list. The C920s records a stereo microphone with a range up to 1 m. - **What resolution does the Logitech C920s record?** The recorded resolution is 1080p at 30 fps, 720p at 30 fps, and the recorded field of view angle is 78 degrees diagonal. - **What operating systems does the Logitech C920s support?** The recorded operating systems are Windows 8 or later, macOS 10.10 or later and ChromeOS, and the recorded USB connection is USB-A with an attached 1.5 m cable. ### Does the Logitech MX Keys Mini work with a Mac? URL: https://abackreviews.com/questions/does-the-logitech-mx-keys-mini-work-with-mac The Logitech MX Keys Mini records Bluetooth and Logi Bolt connectivity, which is how it reaches a computer. At the connection level, yes. The recorded connectivity for the Logitech MX Keys Mini is Bluetooth and Logi Bolt, which are the two ways the board is recorded as reaching a computer, and a Mac is one of the machines a Bluetooth keyboard connects to. What our records do not contain is any statement about macOS support or about the key legends, and that is where the caveats sit. ## What the record settles The MX Keys Mini's recorded specifications are a compact layout with a function row, Bluetooth and Logi Bolt connectivity, a battery life of up to 5 months with backlighting off, and USB-C charging. Its recorded features are multi-device switching and wireless connectivity. That gives a Mac buyer two things that matter: - A wireless connection method that does not need a cable in use, whether over Bluetooth or over Logi Bolt. - Multi-device switching, which is the recorded reason the board is worth carrying between a work machine and a personal one. The USB-C charging entry also means one cable serves the board regardless of what is plugged into the computer. ## What it does not settle No operating system compatibility is recorded for the board, and no key layout or key legend specification is recorded either. If you need a Command key in place of the Windows key, or Option and Control in the positions a Mac user expects, that is not answered by anything in our data. The recorded layout is described as compact with a function row, which is a physical description rather than a legend set. The board is also recorded with a battery figure of up to 5 months with backlighting off. That tells you something about the connection you can keep, and nothing about how the board behaves under macOS software updates. ## The verification state Every value on this page is recorded as read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page. The connectivity and battery figures should be read as documented specification, and the macOS details are absent from our data rather than recorded as a negative. If the platform details matter to you, the manufacturer documentation for the exact revision is where to confirm the legends and the system requirements. Products covered: - Logitech MX Keys Mini (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-keys-mini, subject): The subject of this question. Its recorded Bluetooth and Logi Bolt connectivity, multi device switching and USB-C charging are the values the answer is built on. **No platform statement and no key legend record** No operating system compatibility is recorded for this board and no key legend or key layout specification is recorded either, so Mac specific modifiers cannot be confirmed from our data. **Verification state** Every value on this page was read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page. It is the documented specification, and the platform details are absent from the record rather than recorded as unsupported. Questions: - **How does the Logitech MX Keys Mini connect to a computer?** The recorded connectivity is Bluetooth and Logi Bolt, and multi-device switching is a recorded feature, so the board can be paired with more than one machine. - **Does the MX Keys Mini have Mac key legends?** That is not recorded. The layout is recorded as compact with a function row, which describes the physical arrangement rather than the symbols on the keys, so the legends have to be confirmed on the manufacturer page. - **How long does the MX Keys Mini battery last?** The recorded figure is up to 5 months with backlighting off. That condition matters, because no separate figure is recorded for use with the backlighting on. - **Can the MX Keys Mini be charged while it is in use?** The recorded charging connection is USB-C, so charging happens over USB-C. Whether the board continues to work while it is plugged in is not stated in our records. ### Does the Logitech MX Anywhere 3S work on glass? URL: https://abackreviews.com/questions/does-the-mx-anywhere-3s-work-on-glass The Logitech MX Anywhere 3S records surface support as working on glass and most surfaces, at 99 g. Yes. The recorded surface support for the Logitech MX Anywhere 3S is explicit: it works on glass and most surfaces. That value sits alongside the other recorded specifications for the mouse, a weight of 99 g, Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt connectivity, and a stated battery life of up to 70 days on a full charge. ## Why this matters for the mouse in the catalogue The MX Anywhere 3S is recorded as a compact wireless mouse intended for travel, for users who move between desks and need a small mouse that works on a range of surfaces. The surface line is part of that travel brief rather than a separate claim. For comparison within our own records, the Logitech MX Master 3S and the Logitech Lift both record no surface support value at all, and the MX Master 3S is 42 g heavier at a recorded 141 g against 99 g. ## What the record settles - The mouse is recorded as usable on glass. - It is recorded as usable on most surfaces, which is a general claim rather than a list of surfaces. - It is recorded as compact and light at 99 g, which is what makes glass and other flat surfaces a realistic place to use it rather than a desk only scenario. ## What it does not settle The record does not name the tracking technology, so how the mouse reads a surface, and whether that differs between glass and a desk, is not described. It does not give a pointer speed figure either, and no sensor resolution is recorded for this mouse. No compatibility list is recorded either, so if you work on a coated or textured surface, the record does not confirm it. The statement also carries the same verification state as everything else on this page. It was read from the manufacturer's own documentation and has not been checked against a specific product page, so treat it as the documented specification rather than as a confirmed result from our own use. Products covered: - Logitech MX Anywhere 3S (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-anywhere-3s, subject): The subject of this question. Its recorded surface support of glass and most surfaces and its recorded 99 g weight are the values the answer is built on. **No tracking technology and no pointer speed** The record names glass and most surfaces but does not describe the sensor technology, give a pointer speed or sensor resolution, or list which surfaces are covered by the general phrase. **Verification state** Every value on this page was read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page. It is the documented specification, not a confirmed result from our own use. Questions: - **Can the Logitech MX Anywhere 3S be used on a glass table?** Yes. The recorded surface support states that it works on glass and most surfaces, which is a direct answer to that question. - **How heavy is the Logitech MX Anywhere 3S?** The recorded weight is 99 g, which is 42 g lighter than the recorded 141 g of the MX Master 3S. - **Does the MX Anywhere 3S work on a desk as well as glass?** The recorded surface support says it works on glass and most surfaces, so a desk is covered by that statement rather than by a separate specification. - **How long does the MX Anywhere 3S battery last?** The recorded figure is up to 70 days on a full charge. That is a manufacturer statement and we have not measured it ourselves. ### Does the MX Master 3S work with a Mac? URL: https://abackreviews.com/questions/does-the-mx-master-3s-work-with-mac Yes, it works on macOS over Bluetooth or with the vendor receiver. The advanced features depend on the vendor software. Yes. The MX Master 3S connects to a Mac over Bluetooth Low Energy or through the vendor wireless receiver, and basic pointer movement and clicking work without additional software. ## What works without extra software - Pointer movement and both mouse buttons. - Scrolling, including the free-spin and ratcheted modes on the main wheel. - Multi-device pairing, so you can switch between the Mac and another machine. ## What needs the vendor software Per-application button mapping, gesture button assignment and some scroll behaviour customisation are configured through the manufacturer application. Expect to install it if you want the mouse to do more than a standard pointer input device. ## What is not guaranteed Battery remaining indicators and firmware updates are surfaced through the vendor software, so the information available depends on the operating system version and the application version. Confirm current macOS compatibility on the manufacturer site before relying on a specific feature. Products covered: - Logitech MX Master 3S (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-master-3s, subject) **Hardware versus software** Basic pointer input works on macOS without extra software. Configuration features require the vendor application. ### Does the Rain Design mStand need a keyboard? URL: https://abackreviews.com/questions/does-the-rain-design-mstand-need-a-keyboard The Rain Design mStand records that an external keyboard is required, with a fixed height and no adjustment. Yes. The recorded keyboard access for the Rain Design mStand is explicit: it requires an external keyboard. The stand raises the laptop, and the laptop's own keyboard is underneath the raised chassis, so typing on it is not the arrangement the product is built for. ## What the record settles The mStand's recorded specifications are a fixed height, aluminium as the material, keyboard access requiring an external keyboard, and no adjustability. Its recorded description is a fixed height aluminium laptop stand that raises the screen and improves airflow under the chassis, and its recorded audience is users who use an external keyboard and want a stable fixed height stand. That last point matters for how you should read the keyboard requirement. The external keyboard is not an obstacle in this design, it is the intended companion. If you already type on a separate keyboard, the stand is doing the job it was made for. ## What it does not settle The record does not give the height in millimetres, so you cannot check from our data whether the raised screen matches your monitor position. It does not record a list of compatible laptop sizes, whether the base is non-slip, or how the aluminium body affects the laptop's cooling in practice. It also does not say what the screen angle becomes once the stand is in use, only that the height is fixed and that there is no adjustment. If you need to type on the laptop keyboard, or you need to raise the screen to a specific height, none of that is answered here. ## Verification state Every value on this page was read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page. It is the documented specification rather than a confirmed result from our own use, and no dimension appears in it. Products covered: - Rain Design mStand (https://abackreviews.com/products/rain-design-mstand, subject): The subject of this question. Its recorded keyboard access requirement, fixed height and aluminium material are the values the answer is built on. **No height and no compatible laptop list** The record gives no height in millimetres, no list of compatible laptop sizes, no statement about the base surface and no description of the screen angle once the stand is in use. **Verification state** Every value on this page was read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page. It is the documented specification, not a confirmed result from our own use, and no dimension appears in it. Questions: - **Do I need a separate keyboard for the Rain Design mStand?** Yes. The recorded keyboard access specification states that an external keyboard is required, because the raised chassis puts the laptop's own keyboard out of reach. - **Can the height of the Rain Design mStand be adjusted?** No. The recorded height is fixed and adjustability is recorded as no, so there is a single standing height for the laptop. - **What material is the Rain Design mStand made from?** Aluminium. It is the recorded material, and the aluminium body appears in the recorded feature list. - **Does the mStand leave room for the laptop keyboard?** Our records do not describe the clearance under the raised chassis. The recorded entry is simply that an external keyboard is required. ### Does the Shure MV7 need an audio interface? URL: https://abackreviews.com/questions/does-the-shure-mv7-need-an-audio-interface The Shure MV7 records USB and XLR connections with built in headphone monitoring, so an interface is optional at the start and available later. No, not to begin with. The Shure MV7 records a connection of USB and XLR, so it works as a USB microphone with the computer and does not need a separate interface to produce sound. It also records headphone monitoring as built in, which is the piece people most often end up buying an interface for. ## What the record settles - Element type: dynamic. - Pickup pattern: cardioid, unidirectional. - Connection: USB and XLR. - Headphone monitoring: yes, built in. - Recorded features: headphone monitoring and an XLR output. The recorded description calls it a hybrid USB and XLR dynamic microphone, and the recorded audience is people who want a forgiving dynamic microphone and the option to move to an audio interface later. That last phrase is the important one for this question. The interface is the later step, not the first one. Two things follow from the recorded values. Monitoring needs nothing extra, because it is built in. And the XLR output means the microphone can be moved into a hardware setup later, because the recorded feature list includes the XLR output explicitly. ## What it does not settle The record does not state whether the XLR path functions at all without an interface, and it gives no gain control, no sample rate, no bit depth and no output level detail. So while an interface is clearly not needed for the USB route, the record cannot tell you what changes when you move to the XLR route or what you would need to buy to do it. For comparison, the Blue Yeti in our catalogue records a USB connection only, with no XLR output in its record. ## Verification state Every value here was read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page. It is the documented specification, not a confirmed result from our own use. Products covered: - Shure MV7 (https://abackreviews.com/products/shure-mv7, subject): The subject of this question. Its recorded USB and XLR connections, built in headphone monitoring and dynamic element are the values the answer is built on. **No gain, sample rate or XLR behaviour is recorded** The record does not state whether the XLR path functions without an interface, and gives no gain control, sample rate, bit depth or output level detail, so the later move to hardware cannot be planned from it. **Verification state** Every value on this page was read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page. It is the documented specification, not a confirmed result from our own use. Questions: - **Can I use the Shure MV7 without an audio interface?** Yes. The recorded connection is USB and XLR, and the USB path means the microphone connects to a computer without separate hardware for the recorded features. - **Does the Shure MV7 have headphone monitoring built in?** Yes. Headphone monitoring is recorded as yes, built in, so no separate monitoring purchase is needed. - **What type of microphone is the Shure MV7?** A dynamic microphone with a cardioid, unidirectional pickup pattern. The recorded features are headphone monitoring and an XLR output. - **Can the Shure MV7 be used with an XLR interface later?** The record includes an XLR output in the recorded features, and the recorded description calls it a hybrid USB and XLR microphone. The record does not describe what an interface adds. ### How long does the Logitech MX Keys Mini battery last? URL: https://abackreviews.com/questions/how-long-does-the-mx-keys-mini-battery-last The Logitech MX Keys Mini records a battery life of up to 5 months with backlighting off, and USB-C charging. The recorded figure is up to 5 months with backlighting off. That condition is part of the value, not a footnote, because the record does not give a separate number for use with the backlighting on. ## What the record settles The MX Keys Mini's recorded specifications are a compact layout with a function row, Bluetooth and Logi Bolt connectivity, a battery life of up to 5 months with backlighting off, and USB-C charging. Its recorded features are multi-device switching and wireless connectivity. So the answer a buyer needs is narrow and specific: a stated battery life of up to 5 months, on the condition that the backlighting is off, with charging over USB-C. It is a wireless board, which is the reason the battery figure is a headline number for it in the first place, and multi-device switching means the same charge serves more than one machine. ## What it does not settle No figure is recorded for the backlighting being on, and no figure is recorded for a different usage pattern, so the number to plan a week around depends on the backlight setting you actually use. There is no record of how long the board runs on a partial charge, no information about how the battery behaves over time, and no record of whether a replacement battery is possible. Nothing in the record describes charging time either. The entry for charging states the connection, USB-C, without a duration. ## Verification state The battery figure is recorded as read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page. It is a stated maximum under a stated condition rather than a measured result, and it should be read as the documented specification. For context within the catalogue, the Logitech MX Master 3S and the Logitech MX Anywhere 3S both record a battery life of up to 70 days on a full charge, while the two Keychron boards in our catalogue record no battery figure at all. Products covered: - Logitech MX Keys Mini (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-mx-keys-mini, subject): The subject of this question. Its recorded battery life of up to 5 months with backlighting off and its recorded USB-C charging are the values the answer is built on. **No figure with the backlighting on** The only recorded battery figure carries the condition that the backlighting is off. There is no recorded figure for backlighting on, no partial charge behaviour, no battery ageing information and no charging time. **Verification state** The battery figure was read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page. It is a stated maximum under a stated condition, not a measured result from our own use. Questions: - **How long does the Logitech MX Keys Mini battery last?** The recorded battery life is up to 5 months with backlighting off. That condition is attached to the figure rather than being a separate detail. - **How is the MX Keys Mini charged?** Over USB-C, which is the recorded charging connection for the board. - **Does the MX Keys Mini work over Bluetooth?** Yes. The recorded connectivity is Bluetooth and Logi Bolt, and multi-device switching is a recorded feature, so one charge serves more than one machine. - **Is there a battery figure for the MX Keys Mini with the backlighting on?** No. The up to 5 months with backlighting off figure is the only battery value recorded for this keyboard. ### Is the Blue Yeti good for a home office? URL: https://abackreviews.com/questions/is-the-blue-yeti-good-for-a-home-office The Blue Yeti records a USB condenser with four selectable patterns, built in headphone monitoring and an integrated stand. On the recorded specifications, yes, with one condition attached. The Blue Yeti is recorded as a USB condenser microphone with switchable pickup patterns and an integrated stand, and its recorded audience is people who record in a quiet room. A home office that is quiet is the situation our records describe, and a shared or untreated room is not. ## What the record settles - Element type: condenser. - Pickup patterns: cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo. - Connection: USB. - Headphone monitoring: yes, built in. - Recorded features: headphone monitoring and switchable pickup patterns. - Integrated stand, as part of the recorded description. Three of those values are directly relevant to a home setup. USB means it connects to a computer with no interface. The integrated stand means it needs no separate support at the desk. Built in headphone monitoring means no separate monitoring purchase. The switchable patterns matter for a home office in a specific way. Cardioid is the pattern that faces a single person, and having the other three recorded means the microphone can be reconfigured if the room changes, which is the practical value of the feature in a space where the setup is not fixed. ## What it does not settle The record contains no measurement of how the microphone behaves in a noisy room, no sensitivity figure and no comparison of the four patterns in practice, so we cannot tell you how much room sound a given pattern picks up. That matters because the recorded audience note assumes a quiet room in the first place. It is also silent on calls and meetings. Nothing in the record covers voice call quality, mounting on a monitor arm or a boom, or latency, so if the home office use is mostly video meetings rather than recording, these specifications do not answer the question. ## Verification state Every value here was read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page. It is the documented specification, not a confirmed result from our own use. Products covered: - Blue Yeti (https://abackreviews.com/products/blue-yeti, subject): The subject of this question. Its recorded USB connection, four switchable pickup patterns, integrated stand and quiet room audience note are the values the answer is built on. **No noise handling measurement and nothing on call quality** The record holds no sensitivity figure, no room measurement, no comparison of the four patterns in practice, and nothing about voice call quality, arm mounting or latency, so a shared room and a meeting based use are not covered. **Verification state** Every value on this page was read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page. It is the documented specification, not a confirmed result from our own use. Questions: - **Does the Blue Yeti connect without an audio interface?** Yes. The recorded connection is USB, and headphone monitoring is recorded as built in, so no interface or monitoring hardware is recorded as necessary. - **What pickup patterns does the Blue Yeti have?** Four are recorded: cardioid, bidirectional, omnidirectional and stereo. Cardioid is the one aimed at a single speaker, which is the usual choice in a home setup. - **Does the Blue Yeti need a separate stand?** An integrated stand is part of the recorded description, so no separate support is recorded as necessary for it. - **Is the Blue Yeti suitable for a noisy room?** Our records do not answer that. No noise handling measurement is recorded, and the recorded audience note assumes a quiet room. ### Is the Keychron Q11 wireless? URL: https://abackreviews.com/questions/is-the-keychron-q11-wireless The Q11 is recorded as a USB-C wired board with no wireless connectivity and no battery, and the catalogue holds no charging figure for it. No. The Keychron Q11 records its connectivity as USB-C wired, and its recorded feature list says it has no wireless connectivity. No battery, no battery life figure and no charging specification is recorded for this board either, which is consistent with a board that is designed to be plugged in. One keyboard in the catalogue records wireless connectivity alongside a battery, and the contrast is worth setting out. ## What the record settles - Connectivity: USB-C wired. - Recorded features: hot-swappable switches and remapping software, with no wireless connectivity. - Battery: none recorded. - Layout: 75 percent ANSI split layout with a rotary knob. - Frame material: all-metal. Weight: 1,186 g plus or minus 10 g fully assembled. - Mount style: tray mount, with the plate integrated into the case. - Switch options: Keychron Super red or brown, Gateron G Pro red or brown, or barebone. - Hot-swappable switches: yes, five pin and three pin. - Remapping software: QMK firmware with the Keychron Launcher web app, on macOS and Windows. - Polling rate: 1000 Hz. Keycap material: double-shot PBT, normal profile. - Stabilisers: screw-in PCB. Dimensions: 345 mm long and 134 mm wide, marked as only partially verified. The practical difference between the two arrangements is not subtle. A wired board is connected and ready, and it stays attached to one machine at a time, so nothing needs charging and nothing needs pairing. A board with a recorded battery and a recorded Bluetooth radio can be moved between machines, which is what the K8 Pro's recorded 4,000 mAh rechargeable lithium polymer cell and its recorded Bluetooth connection exist for. The catalogue holds no comparable record for the Q11, so there is nothing on record to set against that. ## What the K8 Pro records, for contrast The Keychron K8 Pro records USB-C wired and Bluetooth connectivity, a 4,000 mAh rechargeable lithium polymer battery, and wireless connectivity in its recorded feature list. Its recorded layout is tenkeyless and its recorded remapping software is QMK and VIA, where the Q11 records QMK with the Keychron Launcher web app. So the two boards differ in exactly the way this question asks about. One of them has a battery and a wireless radio recorded, and the other does not. ## What the record does not settle Nothing here describes a cable length, a detachable or coiled cable, or the port on the host end of the lead. No price is recorded for either board. And the catalogue holds no statement about how the two behave in the same workflow, because no board was measured for this page. ## Verification state The connectivity, the feature list and the absence of any battery specification were read from the manufacturer's own product page for this board. The recorded figure is a documentation entry rather than a result from our own use. Products covered: - Keychron K8 Pro (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-k8-pro, competitor): The only board in the catalogue that records a wireless connection and a battery, with USB-C wired and Bluetooth connectivity and a 4,000 mAh rechargeable lithium polymer cell recorded. - Keychron Q11 (https://abackreviews.com/products/keychron-q11, subject): The subject of this question. Its recorded USB-C wired connectivity, the recorded absence of wireless connectivity and the recorded absence of a battery are the values the answer is built on. **Verification state and what the record does not settle** The recorded connectivity, the recorded feature list and the absence of any battery specification were read from the manufacturer's product page. The catalogue holds no cable detail, no price and no measurement of either board, so the answer describes the documented specification only. **The catalogue's one recorded wireless board** The Keychron K8 Pro records USB-C wired and Bluetooth connectivity and a 4,000 mAh rechargeable lithium polymer battery, with wireless connectivity in its recorded feature list, which is the arrangement the Q11's record does not describe. Questions: - **Is the Keychron Q11 wireless?** No. The recorded connectivity is USB-C wired and the recorded feature list says there is no wireless connectivity for this board. - **Does the Keychron Q11 have a battery?** No battery is recorded for it, and no battery life or charging specification is recorded either. The board is recorded as a USB-C wired board. - **Which Keychron board in the catalogue is wireless?** The Keychron K8 Pro. It records USB-C wired and Bluetooth connectivity and a 4,000 mAh rechargeable lithium polymer battery, with wireless connectivity in its recorded feature list. - **Can the Keychron Q11 be remapped?** Yes. The recorded remapping software is QMK firmware with the Keychron Launcher web app, on macOS and Windows, and remapping software is in the recorded feature list. - **Does the Keychron Q1 have Bluetooth?** No. Its recorded connectivity is USB-C wired, and the same record notes that the wireless 75 percent aluminium board is sold as the Q1 Max. ### Is the Logitech Lift good for small hands? URL: https://abackreviews.com/questions/is-the-logitech-lift-good-for-small-hands The Logitech Lift is recorded for small to medium hands at 125 g with a 57 degree vertical grip. Our records set that answer and stop at hand size. Yes, and the reason is a single recorded specification rather than a general impression. The intended hand size for the Logitech Lift is recorded as small to medium, which places it on the small hand side of the mice we hold, and its recorded weight is 125 g. In the same catalogue, the Logitech MX Master 3S is recorded for medium to large hands at 141 g, so the two mice are aimed at different hands by the manufacturer's own description. ## What the record settles - Intended hand size: small to medium. - Weight: 125 g, which is 16 g lighter than the recorded 141 g of the MX Master 3S. - Grip angle: vertical, recorded at 57 degrees. - Connectivity: Bluetooth Low Energy and Logi Bolt. - Recorded features: multi-device switching and a vertical grip. The vertical angle is usually the part that matters more than the size label. A vertical mouse holds the forearm in a handshake position instead of the flattened, angled posture of a horizontal mouse, and that changes how a hand sits on the body of the mouse. ## What it does not settle Hand size on its own does not decide whether a mouse is comfortable. Our records contain no measurement of grip feel, no hand measurement guidance and no information about palm support, because no such specification is recorded for the Lift. A small hand that prefers a horizontal shape may find that a vertical mouse asks for a different posture before it asks for less reach. The records also do not state the sensor resolution or the button count for the Lift, so it cannot be compared with the MX Master 3S on pointing precision or on the number of controls. The number of controls is often the deciding factor in the other direction, when a buyer wants the thumb wheel the Lift does not record. ## Verification state Every value above is recorded as read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page. It is a documented specification, not a measured result, and no comfort claim in this page rests on anything outside the record. Products covered: - Logitech Lift (https://abackreviews.com/products/logitech-lift, subject): The subject of this question. Its recorded intended hand size of small to medium, its 125 g weight and its 57 degree grip angle are the values the answer is built on. **Comfort is not settled by a hand size label** No grip feel measurement, hand measurement guidance or palm support information is recorded for the Lift, so the small to medium hand size entry settles which hand the product is aimed at and nothing about how it feels to use. **Verification state** Every value on this page was read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page. It is the documented specification, not a measured result from our own use. Questions: - **What hand size is the Logitech Lift designed for?** The recorded intended hand size is small to medium, and its recorded weight is 125 g. That is the specification the small hand answer rests on. - **How much lighter is the Logitech Lift than the MX Master 3S?** On the recorded weights, 16 g lighter: 125 g for the Lift against 141 g for the MX Master 3S. - **Does the Logitech Lift have a vertical grip?** Yes. The recorded grip angle is vertical at 57 degrees, and a vertical grip appears in the recorded feature list. - **Does the Logitech Lift have as many buttons as the MX Master 3S?** That cannot be answered from our records. The MX Master 3S records 7 buttons, and no button count is recorded for the Lift. ### Is the MOFT Z Good For Travel? URL: https://abackreviews.com/questions/is-the-moft-z-good-for-travel The MOFT Z records a folded thickness of 1.3 cm and a weight of 960 g against the mStand's 1.46 kg fixed block, with no recorded stability figure. On the record, the MOFT Z is the more portable of the two stands in this category, and the reason is one recorded figure: a folded thickness of 1.3 cm, half an inch. The Rain Design mStand records no folded thickness at all, because it is a fixed block of aluminium at 1.46 kg that stays on the desk. Whether that makes it good for travel is a question about what you carry and how you work when you arrive, and the catalogue holds enough to answer part of it. ## What the record settles - Folded thickness: 1.3 cm, half an inch. - Weight: 960 g, 33.7 oz. - Dimensions: 279 by 239 by 12.7 mm, 11 by 9.4 by 5 inches. - Material: vegan leather, fibreglass, magnets and metal sheets. - Load capacity: up to 22 lb. - Laptop support: laptops up to 16 inches, and it also works with tablets. - Adjustable: yes, three tilt angles and a standing height. - Height: 25 cm, 10 inches, standing. 12 cm at 25 degrees, 19.4 cm at 45 and 25 cm at 60. - Keyboard access: works as a riser with an external keyboard. - Recorded features: folds flat, and raises the laptop to standing height. The recorded audience for the MOFT Z is users who alternate between sitting and standing, or who want a stand that folds into a bag instead of living on the desk. Folding into a bag is in the record, and the folded thickness is the figure that supports it. ## The other stand in the category, for comparison The mStand records a height of 150 mm, 5.9 inches, aluminium as its material, a width and depth of 253 by 190 mm, 10 by 7.5 inches, and a weight of 1.46 kg, 3 pounds. It records adjustable as no, and keyboard access as requiring an external keyboard. Its recorded audience is users who use an external keyboard and want a stable fixed-height stand. The gap that matters for travel is the weight and the fact that it does not fold. 1.46 kg is 500 g more than the MOFT Z, and a fixed block does not go into a bag. ## What the record does not settle Nothing here measures how the MOFT Z feels to carry, how well its magnets hold, how steady either stand is once set up, or how either lasts in a bag. There is no recorded measurement of friction or retention, no recorded fold cycle rating, and no recorded folded footprint beyond the thickness. No price is recorded for either stand, so the value of a folding design cannot be weighed against cost here. The honest summary is that the MOFT Z is recorded as a folding, adjustable, 960 g stand that fits into a bag, and the mStand is recorded as a fixed 1.46 kg aluminium block that does not. Whether that is the right choice for a particular trip depends on how you work when you get there. Products covered: - MOFT Z 5-in-1 Sit-Stand Desk (https://abackreviews.com/products/moft-z-5-in-1-sit-stand-desk, subject): The subject of this question. Its recorded folded thickness of 1.3 cm, weight of 960 g and recorded audience of people who want a stand that folds into a bag are the values the answer is built on. - Rain Design mStand (https://abackreviews.com/products/rain-design-mstand, competitor): The comparison the record supports. It records a fixed 150 mm aluminium block at 1.46 kg that requires an external keyboard, and it records no folded thickness. **Verification state and what the record does not settle** The folded thickness, weight, dimensions, height, material, load capacity, laptop support and keyboard access were read from the manufacturer's product page, and the mStand figures come from the Rain Design product page. The catalogue holds no price, no stability measurement and no record of either stand in use, so this answer covers the documented specification only. **What the other stand in the category records** The mStand records a fixed height of 150 mm, aluminium as its material, a weight of 1.46 kg, 3 pounds, a width and depth of 253 by 190 mm, adjustable as no, and keyboard access as requiring an external keyboard. It has no folded thickness because it does not fold. Questions: - **Is the MOFT Z good for travel?** On the recorded specification it is the more portable of the two stands in this category. It folds flat to 1.3 cm, half an inch, and weighs 960 g, 33.7 oz, where the mStand records a fixed 1.46 kg block that never folds. - **How much does the MOFT Z weigh?** The recorded weight is 960 g, 33.7 oz, and the recorded folded thickness is 1.3 cm. The mStand records 1.46 kg, 3 pounds, so the folding stand is 500 g lighter. - **Does the MOFT Z fold flat?** Yes. The recorded folded thickness is 1.3 cm, half an inch, and folds flat appears in the recorded feature list. The mStand records no folded thickness, because it is a fixed block of aluminium. - **What size of laptop does the MOFT Z support?** The recorded laptop support is laptops up to 16 inches, and it also works with tablets, with a recorded load capacity of up to 22 lb and recorded dimensions of 279 by 239 by 12.7 mm. - **Can I use the MOFT Z with an external keyboard while travelling?** Yes, in the raised position. The recorded keyboard access is that it works as a riser with an external keyboard, and the recorded description also names a lap desk among its arrangements. - **Is the Rain Design mStand easier to carry than the MOFT Z?** No. The mStand records 1.46 kg, 3 pounds, and a width and depth of 253 by 190 mm with no folded thickness, so it is a fixed object to lift onto a desk rather than one to pack into a bag. ### Is the Samsung T7 encrypted? URL: https://abackreviews.com/questions/is-the-samsung-t7-encrypted The Samsung T7 records hardware encryption support, with USB 3.2 Gen 2 and capacities from 1 TB to 4 TB. Yes. Hardware encryption support is recorded for the Samsung T7 portable SSD, and hardware encryption is in the recorded feature list. That means the encryption is handled by the device rather than by software running on the computer attached to it. ## What the record settles - Encryption: hardware encryption support. - Interface: USB 3.2 Gen 2. - Capacities: 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB. - Weight: 72 g on the datasheet, 2.0 oz on the product page. - Recorded description: a pocket-sized external SSD with a metal body and hardware encryption support. - Recorded audience: people who need fast portable storage for large files and travel frequently. The distinction between hardware and software encryption is the part worth holding on to. With hardware encryption the protection travels with the drive, so a drive that is lost or borrowed does not hand over readable data just because the computer it was plugged into has a different setup. That is the property that matters for a device described as portable. ## What it does not settle The record does not name the encryption algorithm, and it does not say whether encryption is on by default or how a password is set, stored or recovered. Those are setup steps, and our data does not document them. It is also silent on file level encryption. Hardware encryption support for the drive as a whole is not the same thing as encrypting individual files, and the record does not describe per file options. For comparison within our catalogue, this drive is the drive we cover in the storage category alongside the T7 Shield, and no other recorded specification touches encryption. ## Verification state Every value here was read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page. It is the documented specification, not a confirmed result from our own use. Products covered: - Samsung T7 Portable SSD (https://abackreviews.com/products/samsung-t7-portable-ssd, subject): The subject of this question. Its recorded hardware encryption support, interface and capacities are the values the answer is built on. **No algorithm, no default state and no password workflow** The record does not name the encryption algorithm, does not say whether encryption is on by default, and does not describe how a password is set, stored or recovered. It also says nothing about encrypting individual files. **Verification state** Every value on this page was read from the manufacturer's own domain and has not been checked against a specific product page. It is the documented specification, not a confirmed result from our own use. Questions: - **Does the Samsung T7 support encryption?** Yes. The recorded encryption specification is hardware encryption support, and hardware encryption appears in the recorded feature list. - **What interface does the Samsung T7 use?** USB 3.2 Gen 2, which is the recorded interface for the drive. - **What capacities are available?** Four are recorded: 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB. The recorded weight is 72 g on the datasheet. - **Which encryption algorithm does the Samsung T7 use?** Our records do not name it. The record states that hardware encryption support is present and does not describe the algorithm or how the password is managed. ### Is the Samsung T7 Shield waterproof? URL: https://abackreviews.com/questions/is-the-samsung-t7-shield-waterproof The T7 Shield records an IP 65 water resistance rating and a 3 m drop rating, with no immersion time, seal detail or test procedure recorded. The Samsung T7 Shield records a water resistance rating of IP 65. That is the rating the manufacturer states, and it is the whole of what the catalogue holds on the question: there is no recorded immersion time, no recorded seal specification, no recorded cap and no recorded water test procedure, so the record does not support a claim that the drive can be submerged. The related figure on the same record is the drop resistance, recorded as up to 3 m. The plain Samsung T7 records up to 2 m and no water rating at all, and that difference is what separates the two drives in the storage category. ## What the record settles - Water resistance: IP 65. - Drop resistance: up to 3 m. - Interface: USB 3.2 Gen 2, 10 Gbps. - Read speed: up to 1,050 MB/sec. Write speed: up to 1,000 MB/sec. - Capacities: 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB. - Encryption: AES 256-bit hardware encryption. - Weight: 98 g. Dimensions: 59 by 88 by 13 mm. - Warranty: three years, limited. - Operating systems: Windows 7 or later, macOS 10.10 or later, Android Lollipop or later. The drive is recorded as a ruggedised portable solid state drive, and its recorded audience is people who need portable storage that survives a site, a trip or a drop. The recorded description names the IP 65 water rating and the three metre drop rating as the two features that define it. ## What the record does not settle IP 65 is a rating code. What the catalogue does not hold is the detail that would turn it into a practical instruction: how long the drive can be under water, whether the rating covers jets or immersion, whether a closing cap is fitted, and what the manufacturer advises after a drive has been in water. None of that is recorded for this product, and it is not recorded for the plain T7 either. Nor is anything recorded about the effect of water on a drive that has been running, or about how the warranty treats liquid damage. The recorded warranty is three years, limited, and that is the full extent of it. ## The comparison the record supports The plain Samsung T7 in the catalogue records a drop resistance of up to 2 m and no water resistance figure. Everything else recorded for the two drives is the same: the USB 3.2 Gen 2 interface at 10 Gbps, the read and write speed figures, the 1 TB, 2 TB and 4 TB capacities, the AES 256-bit hardware encryption and the three year limited warranty. So the recorded answer is that the Shield carries a water rating and the plain T7 does not, and that the only other difference the record draws between them is the drop distance and the size and weight of the body. ## Verification state The water rating and the drop rating were read from the manufacturer's own datasheet, and the operating systems list from the manufacturer's product page. Every value here is documented specification rather than a result from our own use, and no drive was handled for this page. Products covered: - Samsung T7 Portable SSD (https://abackreviews.com/products/samsung-t7-portable-ssd, competitor): The comparison the record supports. It records a drop resistance of up to 2 m and no water resistance figure at all, with the same interface, speeds, capacities and encryption. - Samsung T7 Shield (https://abackreviews.com/products/samsung-t7-shield, subject): The subject of this question. Its recorded IP 65 water resistance and 3 m drop resistance are the values the answer is built on. **Verification state and what the record leaves open** The IP 65 rating and the 3 m drop rating were read from the manufacturer's datasheet and the operating systems from the manufacturer product page. The catalogue holds no immersion time, no seal detail and no warranty treatment of liquid damage, so the rating should be read as a code rather than as permission to submerge the drive. **What the plain T7 records** The plain Samsung T7 records a drop resistance of up to 2 m and no water resistance figure, with the same interface, speeds, capacities, encryption and warranty. The absence of a recorded rating is not the same as a recorded failure, it is simply not in the catalogue. Questions: - **Is the Samsung T7 Shield waterproof?** The recorded water resistance is IP 65. That is the rating the manufacturer states, and the catalogue holds no immersion time, no seal detail and no water test procedure for the drive. - **How far can the Samsung T7 Shield be dropped?** The recorded drop resistance is up to 3 m, against the 2 m recorded for the plain Samsung T7. - **Does the plain Samsung T7 have a water rating?** No water resistance rating is recorded for it. Its recorded protection figure is a drop resistance of up to 2 m. - **Is the T7 Shield sealed?** That is not recorded. The catalogue holds the IP 65 water resistance rating and the 3 m drop resistance, and no seal, cap or immersion specification for the drive. - **What is the T7 Shield warranty?** The recorded warranty is three years, limited. The record does not describe how liquid damage is treated under it. - **Which operating systems does the T7 Shield support?** The recorded operating systems are Windows 7 or later, macOS 10.10 or later and Android Lollipop or later, which is the manufacturer product page figure.